The Geographical Distribution of Mammals
Abstract
(Uploaded by Plazi for the Bat Literature Project) No abstract provided.
Full text
This is a r epr oduction of a libr ary book that was digitiz ed
b y Google as part of an ongoing e ff ort to pr eserv e the
inf orma tion in book s and mak e it univ ersally accessible .
https: / / book s.google . com
3J
n
■1
wSA
■
■■■
■
H
■E
U
■■
■
IP*™
«*..«.
'
aDi
ol
&i
f
.
v
»,
:
Dtj
A
Son.
(Limited)
Lill
A
MARSUP|AL.
Autechinus
mmutissimiis.
B
PLACENTAL.
Mus.delicalulus
in;
-mhilmphioa],
ins
• i
MA
MM
A
!:s
A NT)
:.',
'
1
'
it!
DAY
AMl
«•■
r.;,
l.i.
i i
!
■
ii.
:
\
-
.
\
■-
j■
^m
L.
'
+&$
m
V
V
2■..
■
S3
■
THE
GEOGRAPHICAL
DISTRIBUTION
MAMMALS
HY
ANDREW
MURRAY
LONDON.
DAY
AND
SON,
LIMITED,
LITHOGRAPHERS
AND
PUBLISHERS,
GATE
STREET,
LINCOLN-S
INN
FIELDS.
1866.
r
;
UVVA
I
KXi-rJA.
LONDON
Stkangeways
and
Waldew,
2S
Castle
Street,
Leicester
Square.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
Classification
adopted
in
this
volume,
and
Dates
of
Appearance
of
Families
of
PAtlE
Mammals
in
Geological
Time
.........
i
Introduction
.............
1
i.
Preliminary
Inquiries
—
Origin
of
Species
—
Specific
Centres
....
4
II.
Preliminary
Inquiries
continued
—
Modes
of
Dispersal
of
Species
. .
.
15
m.
Geography
of
the
Globe
since
the
Secondary
Epoch
—
Subsidence
in
Southern
and
Elevation
in
Northern
Hemispheres
—
Coral
Reefs
—
Bands
of
Elevation
and
Depression
............
23
iv.
Past
Geography
of
the
Globe
continued
—
Miocene
Atlantis
—
Glacial
Epoch
.
30
v.
Glacial
Epoch
continued
...........
43
vi.
Mammals
—
Classification
and
Mutual
Affinities
.
. . .
51
vii.
Distribution
of
Man
—
Black
and
White
Races
56
vm.
Distribution
of
Man
continued
—
Hill
Tribes
of
India
—
Rank
and
Priority
of
Black
and
White
Races
..........
66
rx.
Monkeys
—
Extinct
and
Living
.........
73
x.
Lemuridae
—
Fauna
of
Madagascar
82
xi.
Carnivora
—
Affinities
—
Extinct
Feline
Species
—
Origin
and
Distribution
—
Bone-caves
in
Brazil
—
Mauvaises
Terres
.......
85
xii.
Carnivora
continued
—
Existing
Feline
Species
—
Their
Distribution
in
Borneo
.
93
xiii.
Carnivora
continued
—
Dogs
and
Foxes
105
xrv.
Carnivora
continued
—
Weasels
—
Polecats
—
Otters
—
Badgers
....
113
xv.
Carnivora
continued
—
Arctocyonida)
.
.
.
...
.
.
.117
xvi.
Carnivora
continued
—
Bears
..........
118
xvii.
Carnivora
continued
—
Seals
—
Extinct
Species
—
Existing
Species
—
Seals
in
Caspian
Sea
and
Lake
Baikal
—
Walrus
.......
123
IV
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
PAGE
xvm.
Hoofed-mammals
(Ungulata)
—
Classification
132
xix.
Hoofed-mammals
continued
—
Horses
........
134
xx.
Hoofed-mammals
continued
—
Ruminants
—
Camels
—
Oxen
.....
137
xxi.
Ruminants
continued
—
Sheep
and
Goats
—
Antelopes
—
Camelopards
. .
.
143
xxii.
Ruminants
continued
—
Deer
—
Reindeer
—
Inquiry
into
their
Origin
in
North
America,
Greenland,
Spitzbergen
149
xxm.
Ruminants
continued
—
Musk-deer
—
Chevrotains
—
Anoplotheridae
.
.
.
161
xxiv.
Artiodactylian
Non-Ruminants
—
Swine
—
Peccary
—
Hippopotamus
.
.
.
164
xxv.
Multungula
—
Palaeotheridae
—
Nesodontidae
—
Macrauchenia
—
Tapirs
. .
167
xxvi.
Multungula
continued
—
Rhinoceros
.........
171
xxvii.
Multungula
continued
—
Extinct
Elephants
—
Mastodon
—
Mammoth
.
.
.
178
xxviii.
Multungula
continued
—
Existing
Elephants
—
Question
as
to
Distinctness
of
Su-
matran
Species
—
Elephants
in
Borneo
.......
191
xxix.
Multungula
continued
—
Sirenia
—
Dinotherium
—
Manatee
—
Dugong
—
Rhytina
.
196
xxx.
Cetacea
—
Classification
—
Whales
and
Dolphins
—
Zeuglodon
—
Platanista
. .
205
xxxi.
Edentata
—
Classification
—
Extinct
Species
—
Date
and
Range
of
Megatheroid
Species
in
North
America
—
Existing
Species
. . . .
.
.217
xxxit.
Insectivora
—
Classification
—
Moles
—
Shrews
—
Tupaias
—
Hedgehogs
.
.
.
229
xxxm.
Insectivora
continued
—
Bats
—
Frugivorous
Bats
—
Insectivorous
Bats
(Leaf-bear
ing
and
not
Leaf-bearing)
.........
234
xxxiv.
Rodents
—
Classification
—
Toxodon
240
xxxv.
Rodents
continued
—
Hystricidae
—
Capybara
—
Cavies
—
Chinchillas
—
Octodons
—
Echimyina
—
Agoutis
—
Porcupine
.......
243
xxxvi.
Rodents
continued
—
Hyrax
...
.......
249
xxxvii.
Rodents
continued
—
Pikas
—
Hares
.........
251
xxxviii.
Rodents
continued
—
Dormice
—
Squirrels
—
Marmots
......
255
xxxix.
Rodents
continued
—
Beavers
—
Voles
—
Rats
—
Mice
......
263
xl.
Marsupials
—
Classification
—
Entomophaga
—
Sarcophaga
—
Volitantia
—
Rhizo-
phaga
—
Poephaga
—
Linguales
.........
283
xmi.
Monotremes
—
Ornithorhynchus
—
Echidna
.......
293
xlii.
Regional
Distribution
of
Mammals
. .
.
296
xliii.
Great
and
Minor
Mammalian
Regions
........
304
Appendix.
i.
Systems
of
Classification
of
Mammals
proposed
by
different
Authors
of
eminence
315
ii.
Different
Classifications
of
the
Insectivora
319
iii.
Synonymic
List of
Species
of
Mammals
and
their Localities
....
330
CONTENTS.
PAGE
tv.
Mammals
of
Special
Districts
365
v.
Table
of
Geographical
Distribution
of
the
Lagothricinae
.....
408
vi.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
of
Living
Non-Marine
Mammals
peculiar
to
Special
Districts,
viz
:
—
..........
1.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
present
both
in
Africa
south
of
the
Sahara,
and
the
Indian
region,
and
found
nowhere
else
......
409
2.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
present
in
Africa
south
of
the
Sahara,
and
not
in
the
Indian
region
;
and
in
the
Indian
region
and
not
in
the
African
409
3.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
present
in
Europe
or
Asia
north
of
the
Himma-
layahs,
and
found
neither
in
Africa south
of
the
Sahara,
nor
in
the
Indian
region
410
4.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
found
in
Europe,
and
not
in
Asia
;
or
vice
versa
............
410
5.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
found
in
the
Northern
half
of
North
America
and
the
Europeo-
Asiatic
region,
and
nowhere
else
...
.
.410
6.
Families
or
Characteristic
Forms
peculiar
to
the
New
World,
and
found
in
both
South
and
North
America
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.411
7.
Families
or
Characteristic
New
World
Forms
found
in
South
America,
and
not
in
North
America
;
and
in
North
America
and
not
in
South
. .
411
vii.
Letter
from
Mr.
Palgrave
as to
the
relations
of
Arabia
(received
too
late
to
be
embodied
in
the
work)
..........
411
Index
413
MAPS
AND
ILLUSTRATIONS.
Map
TO
FACE
r
AQK
Frontispiece
—
Figures
of
Antechinus
minutissimus
and
Mus
delicatulus.
„
Diagram
of
Geological
Formations
.......
x
1.
Showing
approximately
the
100-Fa
thorn
line
of
Soundings
.....
1
2.
Showing
the
approximate
effect
of
a
Depression
of
the
Land,
600
feet
...
1
3.
Showing
approximately
what
is
known
of
the
Tertiary
and
Quaternary
formations,
and
generally
the
Land,
including
Mountain-ranges,
which
was
probably
under
Water
during
the
Tertiary,
or
not
long
before
the
Glacial
Epoch
...
1
4.
Showing
the
portions
of
the
Earth
where
marks
of
Glacial
action
have been
observed
or are
on
strong grounds,
believed
to
occur
.......
1
5.
Showing
approximately
the
rising
and
falling
Land
at
the
present
day
...
28
5*.
Sargassum
Seas
.............
34
6.
Distribution
of
Man
.............
56
7.
Monkeys
72
8.
Anthropoid
Apes
i
9.
Baboons
.
)
10.
Prehensile-tailed
Monkeys
\
„,.,.,[••■•:
80
11.
Lemuridae
and
Galeopithecidae
)
12.
Places
where
remains
of
Carnivora
have
been
observed
in
formations
prior
to
Glacial
Epoch
86
13.
Lion
14.
Tiger
!
15.
Leopards
and
Jaguars
j
16.
Puma
[
92
1
17.
Fossil
Hyaenas
102
18.
Existing
Hyaenas
j
viii
MAPS
AND
ILLUSTRATIONS.
MAp
TorACEPAOE
19.
Viverridae
—
Civet
Cats,
Ichneumons,
Paradoxuri
1
.
.
.
20.
Wolves
.
21.
Canidae
.
22.
Canis
fulvus.
Red
Fox
23.
Otters
.
24.
Mustelidae
—
Weasels,
&c.
. )
25.
Skunks
—
Mephitis
—
Mydaus
and
Helictis
}
26.
Bears
........
i
--^
27.
Racoons
—
Coati-Mundis
—
Kinkajou
and
Binturong
)
28.
Seals
122
28*.
Walrus
and
Rhytina
128
29.
Hippopotamus
—
Fossil
and
Living
i
-
fi
,
30.
Swine
. .
. .
•.
f
106
108
114
TragulidaB
and
Moschidae
|
-
_«
Deer
—
Reindeer
'
Antelopes
)
-
.
_
140
31.
32.
Deer
—
Reindeer
"
33.
34.
Goats
35.
Sheep
....
1
142
36.
Musk
Ox
—
Living
and
Fossil
)
37.
Bovidae
i
38.
Buffaloes
j
39.
Camelopards
j
40.
Camels
|
41.
Horses
and
-Asses
42.
Do.
Living
and
Extinct
!
43.
Anoplotherium
)
j„„
44.
Tapir
and
Palaeotherium
I
45.
Hyrax
.....)
m
46.
Rhinoceros
—
Living
and
Extinct
I
47.
Mastodons
and
Elephants
in
Lower
Miocene
Epoch
i
48.
Do.
Upper
Miocene
Epoch
)
49.
Do.
Pliocene
Epoch
i
50.
Elephants
—
Existing
...
I
51.
Sirenia
198
52.
Right
and
Sperm
Whales
•
206
134
MAPS
AND
ILLUSTRATIONS.
IX
/
Hap
To
face
Paoe
53.
Whale-bone
Whales
208
54.
Finner
—
Megaptera
longimana
l
55.
Fossil
Cetacea,
including
Zeuglodon
)
56.
Grampus,
Porpoise,
&c.
(Phocaena))
'!
j
220
57.
Delphinidae
—
Dolphins
58.
Edentata
—
Fossil
59.
Do.
Existing
60.
Anteaters
—
Orycteropus
—
Manis
—
Armadillos
|
61.
Sloths
i
62.
Insectivora
)
230
63.
Moles
)
64.
Shrews
...
\
232
65.
Hacroscelides
and
Tupaias
)
66.
Hedgehogs
—
European
Hedghog
—
Centetes
)
f
.......
rbOQ
67.
Pteropi
—
Frugivorous
Bats
)
68.
Istiophora
—
Leaf-nosed
Bats
.
F
. .
i
236
69.
Bats
—
Vespertilios
70.
Lagomys
250
71.
Hares
72.
Hystricidae
,
.
I
242
73.
Cavies
74.
Chinchillas
,
,
.
. .
.
244
75.
Echimyina
76.
Porcupines
,
*
!■
248
77.
Beavers
;
270
1
1
78.
Pouched
Rats
.......
79.
Rats
and
Mice
—
Exclusive
of
semi-domesticated
Species
I
80.
Jumping
Mice
—
Meriones
and
Hapalotis
)
„
81.
Gophers
)
82.
Jerboas,
&c.
)
„S9
83.
Spalacini
)
84'
Vole\
}
266
85.
Lemmings
)
86.
Musk
Rat
)
264
87.
Dormice
)
b
MAPS
AND
ILLUSTRATIONS.
Map
88.
Spermophilus
—
Ground
Squirrel
89.
Spermophilus
Parryi
and
Spermophilus
Eversmanni
90.
Marmot
. . . )
91.
Tamias
—
Striped
Squirrel
j
92.
Xerus
—
Bristly
Squirrel
]
93.
Squirrel
...
)
94.
Flying
Squirrels
and
Petaurus
......
95.
Marsupials
.........
96.
Opossums
and
Kangaroos
)
97.
Marsupial
Carnivora
)
98.
Myrmecobius
and
Tarsipes
—
Ornithorhynchus
and
Echidna
99.
Vermilingual
Species
.......
100.
Great
Mammalian
Regions
......
101.
Minor
Subdivisions
of
Great
Mammalian
Regions
TO
FACE
PAOl
260
258
254
256
286
288
292
304
308
PERIOD
p&OCIAL
DR«t
OH
BOULDER
pur
!
—
~pTe
i
sTociTt
i'ToW^as16^~<
j -
pliocene
-formatiohs
-
ENUMERATION
&
SECTION
lIK
CEOLOCICAL
FORMATIONS.
>-
o:
o
<
o
i-
«c
Q.
U
Ui
0.
MIQCENE
FORMATIONS
-
8.000
FF.ETW
STRATA
DEPTH
IN
FEF.T.
Recent
EOCENE
FORMATIONS
:2367„ FEET
CHALK
FORMATIONS
37iLO
FEET
OOLITIC
formations
.3330
FEET
TRIASSJC
FORMATIONS
3.000
FEET
■-?
[eeifetahlc
mould.
.
Write
or
Bouletcr
clay
{Superficial
cUposits
Pleistocene
/#"/>''
A-liw
Gravels.
[S-orwich
thll)
,,..
[Reel
(rati
Pliocene
\r
,,.
,,
\toraMuie.
trag..
[Sands
ef
Richiaond.
Hri1uiui
Vifayeiiee
basin.
.
Miocene
JFaldiuis
of
Taaramt
iSewalik
formations
[Hamp-itead
series
(115*)
/L'fper
Eocene
(Aw/vtA/?
sine*
I
j
Osborne
series
|
Middle
or
)#„„/„„
„
/Paris
KoreiieiD
r.ocene
<
yiiaejsfiot
s,
senns
series
Cluilk
^
•
—
-
—
-*
OLD RED
SANLTSTONE
D
O
c
D-
-3.0
0
0
FEET
—
,
^_:
a-
_
—
DEVONIAN
6.000
FORMATIONS
FEET
Lower
Chalk
a
i
h.
UPPER—
SILUR
IAN
8350
FEET
FORMATIONS
i:
Oolitic
or
Jurassic
formntjons
(bdord
or
middle
Oolite
Balk
w
lower
Oolitp
—
t
2
6.0
0
0
-
F E
ET
-
\
\
[Tfuwet
Sand
iMaestricht
Oialk.
\wiutt
Chalk
with
fhnts
•
r
<n
ii
I
White
Oialk
mUwut-
Flints
l'FMk(W
,„al.l
I
Upper
Creen
Sand-
.
..
\
(ill
id
t
Lower
Gruei
Sand
Speeton
Cla
V
.
Wia
Id
Clav
.
VeaWmBeds^.
jltnd
iPue-bcck
Beds
.
Pcrtani
or
\por,illlld
Beds
upper
Oolite
fr,. .,
...
\hi
mmtridije
day
I
Upper
Calcaneus
Grit'
Coral
ra4
ifloMic
Limestone.
[Lower
Calcaneus
Crie
'
Oxford
Clay
iCornbraah
Corcibrash
iForcst
Marble
[Hitidlciil
Clay
..
[Freestone
d--
Rag
'Great Oolite
\SlomM)M
Siatr
Fullers
Earth
rRaetstene
'inkruvOoYltt-'FreeslcM
[Pea
Crrut,
Lias
.
.
iheuper
Triassic
U/nsr/ielkalk
[Banter
Saridstein
Permian
Marls
J'
limestone
I-Magnes1an
Limestcne
(out
measures
formations
M^e
'"■"
i.Weuntairi
Limestone
\Ca
rlvn
ife
rous
Slate
Devonian
Devonian
group
(Upper
Ludlow
Rock
IAymestrv
Limestone
Lower
Ludlew
Rock
iWenleek
group
>
Mavhill
group
[Upper
Llandevery
Beds
Lower
Llandoeeiy
Metis
(-my
tdec
Sandstcne
Ltandcilo
Flags
Lirupila
(tags
Cambrian
Rocks
Ludlow
group
r
Upper
Silurian
.3
s
.fO
50
>
■10
cr
)
<
\
8.000
1
I-
□:
115
ul
10
181
1-
1.270
480
wa
90
100
500
600
100
100
150
850
60
280
1,000
>
;
9oo
<
1
°
}
780
z
1
\
O
o
UJ
\
550
M
1.100
1.000
O0P
IfiOO
300
750
IZooo
1.600
1.500
o
4.650
-
3.000
6.000
o
M
1500
o
1.850
m
■
4MOO
j
1.000
<
9.000
0.
5000
5.000
26.000
hVo-.Shi
■Lnutfvd;Lith.
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS,
ADOPTED
IN
THIS
WORK.
Note.
—
The
Geological
formations
in
which
remains
of the
different
families
have
been
found
are
indicated
by
the
Asterisks.
Recess
of
Glacial
Epoch.
Access
of
Glacial
Epoch.
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
QTTADRUHANA.
1.
ANTHROPIDjE
*
?
••
••
2.
PITHECIDJ3.
1.
Catarrhini
*
*
*
•
•
2.
Plattrhini
*
*
?
3.
Arctopithecini
* *
■>
••
3.
LEMURIDiE.
1
.
Lemurini
••
2.
Cheiromtjni
• • ■
3.
Galeopithecini
*
••
••
••
CAENIVORA.
1.
FELIDiE
* * *
••
2.
VIVERRIDiE
*
* *
••
3.
HY^ENIDjE
*
*
•■ ••
4.
CANID^
*
*
*
*
5.
MUSTELID^
*
*
*
••
6.
PLANTIGRADA.
1.
Arctocyonid-e
*
*
*
*
2.
URsro-a:
* *
?
XII
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS.
7.
PINNIPEDIA.
1.
Phociu^
. .
1.
Phocinae
2.
Otarinae
2.
Trichechid-s:
UNGULATA.
1.
MONODACTTLA.
1.
SOLIDUNGDLA
2.
ARTIODACTYLA.
1.
RUMINANTIA.
1.
Camelidee
2.
Bovidae
1.
Ovibos
. .
2.
Bison
. .
3.
Bubalus
4.
Bos
3.
Capridae.
1.
Ovin<B..
2.
Caprints
4.
Antilopidaa
1.
Bovina
.
.
2.
Catablepas
3.
Bubalus
4.
Oryx
.
.
5.
Gazella
6.
Tragelaphus
7.
Antilope
8.
Redunca
9.
Oreotragus
10.
Cephalophus
1
1
.
Tetracerus
5.
Camelopardidae
. .
6.
Cervidae
7.
Moschidaa
Recess
of
Glacial
Epoch.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Access
of
Glacial
Epoch.
*
*
*
*
*
*
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
*
*
*
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS.
X1U
8.
Tragulidae.
1.
Tragulus
2.
Hyomoschus
3.
Dichobune
9.
Anoplotheridae
. .
2.
NON-RUMINANTIA.
1.
Dicotylidte
2.
Suidae
3.
Hippopotamidae
3.
MULTUNGULATA.
1.
Paljeothehid^;
2.
Nesodontid-s
3.
Tapirim:
.
4.
Nasicornia
5.
Proboscidea.
1.
Mastodontidre
. .
2.
Elephantidae
6.
Sirenia.
1
.
Dinotheridae
2.
Manatidae
CETACEA.
1.
B&LJEKTDJE
2.
DELPHINIDJB
.
3.
ZEUGLODONTID
J5
EDENTATA.
1.
BRADYPODID^
. .
1.
Gravigrada
.
.
2.
Tardiorada
.
.
2.
DASYPODIDjE
3.
SCUTATA
..
Recess
of
Access
of
Glacial
Glacial
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
Epoch.
Epoch.
*
*
*
,
.
, .
*
*
••
••
*
*
••
■•
••
*
*
••
* *
. .
*
*
*
•■
••
*
* *
■•
••
*
*
*
••
***
••
••
* *
*
••
••
*
* *
.
.
#
*
*
••
••
* *
*
*
* *
*
,
.
•
■
*
* *
*
••
•■
•
■
' '
* *
' *
?
*
••
*
••
*
*
*
*
?
'
••
'
Cuvier
and
Owen
ascribe
the
remains
of
the
Maorothirium
qiqanteum
(on
which
the
existence
of
Scutata,
in
the
Miocene,
rests)
to
an
animal
allied
to
the
Manis;
Gervais
to
an
Orycteropus
;
Giebel
to
one
of
the
Dasypodidje.
XIV
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS.
EDENTATA
(continued).
4.
MYRMECOPHAGA..
INSECTIVORA.
1.
TALPIDyE
..
2.
SORICIDyE
..
3.
MACROSCELIDES
4.
TUPAIADiE..
5.
ERINACIDiE
6.
CENTETIDiE
CHEIROPTERA.
1.
FRUGIVORA
2.
ENTOMOPHAGA
1.
istiophora
2.
Gymnorhini
. .
RODENTIA.
1.
TOXODONTIDiE
..
2.
HYSTRICKQJE
1.
Caviinje
2.
ClllNCHILLINje
. .
3.
OCTODONTINjE
. .
4.
EciIIMYINjE
5.
Dasyproctinje
6.
Hystricinje
3.
HYRACIDyE..
4.
LEPORIDvE
1
.
Lagoiiys
2.
Lepus
5.
MYOXIDiE
..
6.
SCIURID>E
..
Recess
of
Glacial
Epoch.
*
*
*
*
*
Access
of
Glacial
Access.
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
*
*
*
*
*
*
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS.
XV
SCIURIDiE
(continued)
1
.
Xerus
2.
Rhinoscidros
. .
3.
Scicrus
4.
Pteromys
1.
Sciuropterus
2.
Pteromys
5.
Tamias
.
.
6.
Spermophilus.
.
-
7.
Cynomts
8.
Arctomys
7.
PECTIN
ATORIDiE..
8.
MURIDiE
1.
Castorinve
2.
ARVICOLINjE
3.
Spalicinje
4
s
accom
yisjf.
5.
Cricetin^e
6.
Sigmodontes
7.
Hesperomyin^e
8.
Morin>v.
9.
Sminthin.e
10.
Merionides
11.
Dipodin.e
MARSUPIALIA.
1
.
Entomophaga
1.
Antechini
. .
2.
Phascogale
2.
Sarcopiiaga
1.
Dasyuridje
. .
2.
DlDELPHIDES
3.
Phalangette
3.
Volitantia
1
.
Petauri
4.
Rhtzopiiaga
1.
PhASCOI.OWYIDJE
Recess
of
Access
of
Glacial
Epoch.
Glacial
,
Epoch.
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
••
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
••
-
.
. .
.
* *
*
* *
•
*
*
*
••
•• ••
* *
*
*
*
*
*
"
*
* *
* *
XVI
CLASSIFICATION
OF
MAMMALS.
MARSUPIALIA
(continued).
5.
PoEPHAGA
1.
Macropidje
.
.
2.
Stereognathid.e
3.
Peramelid/k
6.
LlNGUALES
1.
Tarsipes
2.
Mtrmecobius
3.
Microlestidje
MONOTREMATA.
1.
Echidna
..
2.
Ornithorhynchus
Eecess
of
Access
of
Glacial
Epoch.
Glacial
Epoch.
Miocene.
Eocene.
Secondary.
*
•• •• ••
••
••
••
•• ••
••
" * •
'
* *
*
::
•• •• ••
" "
■'
••
••
D.iyS-oon
kLimtnl
■
L1tji
no
wo
/.;,•
MAP
II.
SHOWING
THE
APPROXIMATE
EFFECT
OF
A
DEPRESSION
OF
THE
LAND
600
FEET.
no
nut
iso
1
L
J■.
*>?
120
tie
too
so
o»mrs
6P SO 40 3O
?w
\
-
10
30
30
40
SO
60
70
.90
too
I1O
IW
IXC
MO
ISO
H»
170
■M'lad
no wo
>so 140 130
ne
no
too
so
so
70
ee
so
-to
30
to
•-•l'
30
SO
60
70
SO
90
100
HO
120
i.V
HO
ISO
ISO
170
s
o
IT
II
a
s
1
I■-'■
*
-W
SO
60
70
SO
too
no no
1Mj
l-Hl
ISO
160 170
WN
!.-
no
i6o
ise 140
130
izo
no
too
so
so
SHOWING
THE
PORTIONS
OF
THE
EARTH
WHERE
MARKS
OF
GLACIAL
ACTION
HAVE
BEEN
OBSERVED
OR
ARE
ON
STRONG
GROUNDS
BELIEVED
TO
OCCUR.
So
'***7^*
°A
no
tie
mo
mo
iso
izo
no
too
70
e»
SO 40 30
W
■fi{
yxjuirj)
mjs?A■(I
J'
t.i
li
ra:
L'u
M
'■:
u
tfl
i-
*r
&:
INTRODUCTION.
OBJECT
AND
PLAN
OF
THE
AVORK
MAPS
EXPLAINED
—
SUBSIDENCE
ELEVATION
—
TERTIARY
FORMATIONS
—
GLACIAL
ACTION
SARGASSO
SEAS
DISTRIBUTION.
The
great
amount
of
information
which
has
of
late
years
been
accumulated
regarding
the
Geo
graphical
Distribution
of
Plants
and
Animals
renders
it
very
desirable
that
it
should
be
classified
and
displayed,
so
that
some
general
and
connected
view
of
the
facts,
and
of
their
bearing
on
each
other,
may
be
obtained.
To
do
this
is
the
object
of
the
present
work.
I
shall
to
a
certain
extent
follow
the
arrangement
suggested
by
Schouw,*
and
adopted
by
Decandollef
and
others
in
regard
to
plants,
and
consider
the
subject
under
two
aspects
equivalent
to
those
which
in
Zoology
Van
Der
Hoevenf
has
recently
proposed
to
distinguish
respectively
by
the
names
of
"
Geographical
Zoology "
and
"
Zoological
Geography,"
the
former
referring
to
the
range
of
species,
the
latter
to
the
Faunas
of
districts,
and
treat
each
great
class
separately
and
independently
upon
both
these
points.
I
shall
commence
with
the
former,
and
shall
first
pass
the
different
families
in
each
class
under
review,
giving
an
account
of
their distribution,
and
affinities.
Their
history
and
that of
their
nearest
relatives
during
past
geological
epochs
is
a
most impor
tant
point
in
relation
to
this,
and
to
these
I
propose
to
give
special
attention
;
and
I
shall
endeavour,
by
the
aid
of
maps,
to
exhibit
the
facts
more
clearly
and
comprehensively
than
I
could
otherwise
do.
On
these
maps
the
localities
where
the
groups
or
species
are
found
will
be
marked
;
and
the
districts
where
they
are
most
fully
or
most
feebly
represented
will,
when
necessary,
be
shown
by
different
in
tensities
of
colour.
To
save
expense,
and
so
to
allow
of
greater
use
being
made
of
maps
than
would
otherwise
be
the
case,
they
have
been
drawn
of
three
sizes,
so
that,
when
a
mere
general
reference
is
required
the
smaller
ones
may
be
used,
and
the
larger
be
reserved
for
those
cases
which
require
more
detail.
Where
the
distribution
of
a
species
or
group
is
peculiar,
any
speculations
which
have
been
made
as
to
its
cause
will
be
noticed.
After
a
full
inquiry
into
the
Geographical
Zoology
of
each
class,
I
shall
conclude
its
history
with
a
summary
of
its
Zoological
Geography.
The
geographical
distribution
of
each
class
will
thus
form
an
independent
treatise
by
itself.
While
the
work
is
mainly
addressed
to
the
scientific
naturalist,
it
is
also
intended
for
the
general
reader
;
and
with
this
view,
scientific
names
will
be
avoided
whenever
there
are
*
Schouw,
"Grundzeuge
einer
allgemcincn
Pflanzengcographie."
Berlin,
1823,
p. 4.
t
Decandolle,
"Geographic
Botauique."
Paris
and
Geneva,
1855.
X
J.
Van
Der
Hoeven,
"
Philoaophia
Zoologica."
Leyden,
1864,
p.
375.
2
INTRODUCTION.
English
ones
to
express
the
meaning.
For
the
same
reason,
in
addition
to
displaying
in
correlative
order
the
distribution
of plants
and
animals
throughout
the
globe, so
that
the
facts
may
be
analysed
and
reasoned
on, I
shall
make
it
an
object
to
supply
general
information
regarding
the
habitats
of
those
plants
or
animals
as to
which
the
educated
reader
is
most
likely
to
feel
curiosity.
References
to
authorities
will
be
given
whenever
they
seem
likely
to
be
useful.
Every
naturalist
must
have
felt
the
want
of
such
references
when
searching
for
information
on
any
subject
;
and
in
the
present
case
they
are
especially
necessary,
for
the
Zoologist
is
often
unfamiliar
with
Botany,
the
Botanist
with
Zoology,
and
the
specialist
at
sea
when
he
gets
beyond
the
limits
of
his
own
territory
;
and
yet
none
of
them
can
proceed
far
in
their
work
without
having
frequent
occasion
to
know
something
relating
to
the
geographical
distribution
of
other
organized
beings
which
incidentally
come
in
con
nexion with
the
subject
of
their
studies.
I
have
endeavoured
in
my
references
to hit
the
medium
between
a
burthensome
display
of
erudition,
and
a
selection
too
meagre
to
be
of
use.
It
is
right
for
me
to
say
that
I
should
never
have
ventured
to
undertake
a
work
of
such
extended
scope,
were
it
not
for
the
promised
aid
and
support
of
many
naturalists
eminent
in
those
depart
ments
in
which
I
am
myself
more
especially
deficient.
To
assist
the
non-geological
reader
in
following
any
speculations
in
which
extinct
animals
arc
concerned,
I
have
given
a
diagram,
showing
the
succession
of
geological
strata,
and
their
respective
thickness.
I
have
also
given
several
maps
of a
general
nature.
The
first
is
one
representing
the
100
fathom
line
of
coast
;
that
is,
the
line
outside
of
which
no
soundings
are
obtained
at
a
depth
of
100
fathoms
(600
feet),
so
that
it
shows
what
would
be
the
configuration
of
the
dry
land
if
it
were
everywhere
raised
600
feet.
I
have
to
thank
Captain
Richards
and
the
other
officers
of
the
Hydrographic
department
of
the
Admiralty
for
the
kindness
and
liberality
with
which
they
enabled
me
to
prepare
this
map,
by
giving
me
access
to
the
charts
in
their
possession,
as
well
as
ready
information
on
every
point
on
which
I
applied
to
them.
The
second
map
represents
what
would
be
the
probable
coast-line
if
the
whole
land
were
depressed
600
feet.
It
is
unnecessary
to
say
that
this
is
much
less
accurate,
notwithstanding
that
I
have
had
the
advantage
of
the
materials
in
the
Geographical
Society's
possession.
Com
paratively
few
of
the
lower
altitudes
of
the
earth's
surface
are
known
;
it
is,
therefore,
not
to
be
taken
as
more
than
a
very
conjectural
approximate
essay.
A
third
map
shows
the
parts of
the
earth
on
which
tertiary
and
quaternary
formations
have
been
ascertained
to
occur,
that
is,
those
which
were
probably
under
water
at
the
time
of
the
glacial
epoch
or
not
long
previously.
A
fourth
map
shows,
so
far
as
known,
the
localities
where
glacier
action
or
remains
of
the
drift
or
boulder
clay
have
been
remarked.
My
best
thanks
are
due
to
Professor
Ramsay
for
the
readiness
with
which
he
has
imparted
to
me
his
copious
information
both
on
this
and
other
subjects.
Nevertheless
this
map,
too,
is
merely
offered
as a
distant
approximation.
The
importance
of
the
effects
of
the
glacial
epoch,
however,
renders
even
such
an
imperfect
tentative
very
desirable
for
the
proper
understanding
of
the
questions
arising
out
of
the
action
of that
period.
INTRODUCTION.
3
A
fifth
map
is
given,
showing
the
lands
which
are
supposed
to
bo
now
rising
and
those
now
sinking.
The
portion
of
this
latter
map
which
relates
to
the
Northern
Hemisphere
is
drawn
from
various
sources,
but
much
of
it
is
conjectural
and
inferential,
little
being
known
of
the
greater
part
of
it.
The
portion
relating
to
the
Southern
Hemisphere
has
been
chiefly
deduced
from
the
data
laid
down
by
Mr.
Darwin
in
the
map
published
in
his
volume
on
"Coral
For
mations."
Prof.
Edward
Forbes,
in
speaking
of
the
Gulf
weed
in
the
Atlantic,
suggested
that
it
might
indicate
the
spot
where
land
had
been
submerged,
and
as
botanists
are
disposed
to
admit
that
the
Sargassum
bacciferum,
or
Gulf
weed,
is
only
another
form
of
the
Sargassum
vulgare,
which
fringes
our
own
coasts,
it
seemed
not
an
improbable
conjecture,
and
its
presence
must
always
be
taken
into
account
in
any
speculations
on
the
past
changes
of
the
distribution
of
land
and
sea.
I
have,
therefore,
added
a
map
in
which
the
different
Sargassum
Seas
are
laid
down.
I
had
hoped
to
have
given
a
seventh
general
map,
illustrative
of
Dr.
Forschammer's
con
clusions
regarding
the
regional
distribution
of
different
kinds
of
sea-water.
That
gentleman
has
made
this
the
subject
of
investigation,
and
has
communicated
the
results
to
the
Royal
Society
in
a
paper
on
the
component
parts
of
sea-water
in
all
quarters
of
the
globe.
These
results
have
induced
him
to
divide
the
sea
into
sixteen
regions,
each
distinguished
by
different
physical
qualities.
It will
be
most
interesting
to
compare
how
far
these
correspond
with
the
regional
distribution
of
sea
animals
and
sea
plants.
Unfortunately
his
paper
has
not
yet
been
published.
Before
I
reach
the
Fishes
I
trust
that
this
will
have
been
done,
and
that I
may
then
be
able
to
give
a
map
showing
Dr.
Forschammer's
sea-water
regions.
The
order
in
which
I
shall
pass
the
different
animals
and
plants
in
review,
is
that
known
as
the
descending
order,
viz.
commencing
with
Man
and
going
down
the
scale
of
Nature,
until
we
reach
the lowest
organisms
of
animal
life.
Perhaps
the
most
natural
course,
when
I
have
reached
that
stage,
would
be
then
to
enter
on
the vegetable
kingdom
by
the
lowest
links
in
its
scale,
which
can
hardly be
distinguished
from
the
like
links
in
the
animal
kingdom,
and
to
work
upwards
to
the
highest.
I
think
on
the
whole,
however,
that
it
will
be
found
more
convenient
to
treat
the
vegetable
kingdom
as
a
parallel
scries,
and
deal
with
it
also
in
the
descending
order.
CHAPTER
I.
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES
—
ORIGIN
OF
SPECIES
SPECIFIC
CENTRES.
Before
entering
on
the
special
subject
of
this
work,
there
are
one
or
two
topics
on which
I
should
wish
to
make
some
profession
of
faith.
The
chief
of
these
is
Mr.
Darwin's
theory
of
the
origin
of
species.
A
man's
opinion
on
this
subject
must
necessarily
and
unconsciously
modify
his
views
on
many
other
important
points,
and
it
becomes
a
matter
of
some
moment
to
the reader
to
know
from
what
point
of
view
the
author
regards
things.
When
he
once
knows
that,
the
reader
can
himself
apply
a
compensation-balance
to
reduce
the
author's
conclusions
to
his
own
standard.
I
the
more
desire
to
explain
the
views
which
I
now
hold
regarding
the
origin of
species,
that
some
years
since
(shortly
after
the
first
appearance
of
Mr.
Darwin's
work),
I
took
exception
to
it,
and
urged
various
objections
to
his
theory.*
Some
of
these
I
still
maintain,
but
others
I
have
seen
reason
to
modify.
If
it
were
a
mere
recantation
that
I
had
to
make,
a
couple
of
lines
would
be
sufficient
for
that
purpose
;
I
should
not
detain
the
reader
long
in
announcing
that
whereas
I
had
formerly
been
an
opponent
of
Mr.
Darwin's
views,
I
was
now
a
supporter.
But
it is
not
so.
In
some
respects,
I
have
come
nearer
to
Mr.
Darwin's
views
;
but
in
others I
still
differ
from
him,
if
not
as
much
as
before,
at
least
sufficiently
to
render
some
explanation
necessary
to
the
understanding
of
my
opinions.
It
is
not,
however,
by
way
of opposition
to
his
that
I
offer
mine.
The
reader
will
see
that
mine
are
rather
of
the
nature
of
a
sequel
to
his,
or
an
attempt
to
work
out the
truth
by
the
light
of
his
previous
labours.
If
I
have
been
in
any
respect
successful
in
throwing
more
light
upon
the
subject,
I
owe
it
to
the
ideas
suggested
by
his
works.
The
objections
which
I
took
to
his
theory
were
not
to
the
origin
of
species
by
derivation
or
descent
—
but
to
the
machinery
by
which
he
supposed
this to
take
place
;
viz.,
development
by
long-continued
gradual
variation
and
selection
through
the
struggle
for
life.
I
thoroughly
accepted
the
theory
that
species
are
not
produced
by
independent
creation,
but
that,
under
the
operation
of
a
general
law,
the
germs
of
organisms
produce
new
forms
different
from
themselves,
when
particular
circumstances
call
the
law
into
action.
I
held
very
much
the
invo
lution
theory
of
Bonnet and
Priestley,
f
"
that
all
the
germs
of
future
plants,
organical
bodies of
all
kinds,
and
the reproducible
parts
of
them,
were
really
contained
in
the
first
germ."
That
theory
appeared
to
me
to
furnish
a
satisfactory
explanation
of
the
homologies
in
structure
and
of
the
relationships
between
species
which
are
everywhere
apparent
throughout
the
organized
world.
If,
on
the
concurrence
of
particular
circumstances,
a
law
comes
into
action
effecting
an
*
"
Proceedings
of
Royal
Society
of
Edinburgh,"
16th
|
Priestley,
"
Disquisitions
relating
to
Matter
and
January,
1860.
Spirit,"
vol.
i.
p.
201.
Birmingham,
1782.
ORIGIN
OF
SPECIES.
5
alteration
on
the
germ
which
is
about
to
be
developed,
it
follows,
that
in
those
points
where
the
law
has not
affected
the
germ,
it
should
have
the
same
form
as in
the
parent
;
and
on
those
points
where
it
has
affected
the
germ,
it
must
produce
the
alteration,
not
by
creation
of
new
parts,
but
by
alteration
of
those
already
existing.
If
fins
are
wanted
where
legs
were
before,
they
must
be
obtained
not
by
the
creation
of
a
new
organ,
but
by
the
alteration
of
the
parts
of
the
leg
;
hence
the
existence
of
homologies
between
them.
No
doubt
Mr.
Darwin's
slow
and
imper
ceptible
variation
produces
homologies
too
;
but
inasmuch
as
the
establishment
(not
the
first
appear
ance,
but
the
establishment)
of
such
changes,
is
in
his
theory
dependent
on
the
variation
being
such
as
to
enable
the
animal
to
come
off
successful
in
the
struggle
for
life,
it
seemed
to
me
less
applicable
to
those
variations
(and
many
such
exist),
where,
so
far
as
we
can
see,
the
change
has
no
beneficial
effect
in
that
struggle.
I
did
not
deny
the
existence
of
much
variation,
and
of
its
being
continued,
to
a
certain
extent,
by
inheritance
;
neither
did
I
ignore
the
possible
bearing
of
hybridization
on
the
question
;
nor
did
I
dispute
the existence
of
the
struggle
for
life,
and
that
that
influence
cleared
away
the
weakly,
and
left
the
strongly
endowed.
But
with
perfect
conviction
on
these
points,
I
had
not
succeeded
in
bringing
my
mind
to
accept
the
possibility
of
a
new
species
being
eliminated
out
of
any
amount
of
gradual
variation,
hybridization,
or
struggle
for
life,
either
taken
singly
or
in
combination.
What
impressed
me
more
than
anything
else
was
the
absence
of
any
transitional
forms
or
geological
evidence
in
support
of
the
idea
;
I
argued
that
if
such
transition
really
existed,
it
ought
to
have
either
been
seen
or
to
have
left
traces
of
its
having
been
;
but
no
form
has
yet
been
discovered
among
fossil
remains,
which
can
fairly
be
adduced,
as
showing
a
gradation
of
form
passing,
during
the
course
of
time,
from
one
species
to
another.
Species
varying
to
a
greater
or
less
degree
are
there
found
as
we
find
them
existing
now
;
but
they
occur
at
the
same
time,
and
have
never
been
found
gradually
increasing
in
diversity
through
successive
strata,
until
they
reach
the
proportions
of
a
new
species.
In
like
manner,
I
looked
in
vain
for
any
transitional
form
of
existing
animals
in
the
act
of
passing
from
one
type
to
another.
It
appeared
to
me
impossible
for
them
to
exist
consistently
with
the
preservation
of
the
order
which
we
see
in
Nature.
I
argued
that
if
the
transition
were
slow
and
gradual,
there
must
be
a
multitude
of
individuals
in
different
stages
of
progression
towards
species,
and
branching
out
right
and
left
from
the
old
one,
and
consequently
the
homogeneity
which
is
essential
to
the
character
of
species
could
not
exist
:
they
would
never
have
time
to
settle
into
a
species.
No
sooner
would
one
have
reached
that
degree
of
divergence
from
the
type,
than
its
descendants
must
start
again
on
a
fresh
progress
of
variation.
If
Nature
were
provided
with
a
brake
by
which
she could
moderate
and
arrest
the
progress
of
variation
when
the
species
was
completed,
the
case
would
be
different.
But
according
to
Mr.
Darwin,
not
only
time
but
variation
runs
its
ceaseless
course.
Were
it
not
for
that,
we
could
realise
the
idea
that
A
produced
B
slightly
changed
;
B
produced
C
more
changed
;
C
produced
D
still
more
altered,
and
so
on
until
the
entire
change
was
effected,
always
provided
that
the
variation
then
stopped.
But
it
does
not
so.
Like
the
Wandering
Jew,
it
must
go on
—
on
—
without
ceasing
;
no
sooner
arrived
than
it
must
start
again.
This
would
be
the
result
of
variation,
supposing
it
to
be
accomplished
through
singlo
individuals,
forming
specific
centres
;
and
it
appeared
to
me,
that
it
would
be
still
more
hopeless
if
we
abandoned
the
origin
of
species
through
single
individuals,
and
adopted
the
view
of
species
originating
not
in
individuals,
but
in
numbers.
Then
we
should
have
to
deal
not
with
a
change
affecting
one
individual,
one
child
from
each
parent,
but
with one
extending
over a
whole
army
of
descendants
;
and
I
came
to
the
conclusion
that
it
was
inconsistent
with
what
we know
of
the
6
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
variation
which
we
see
daily
in
operation,
that
in
those
descendants
of
different
broods,
exactly
the
same
kind
and
degree
of
variation,
and
in
the
same
direction,
should
occur
in
all.
It
seemed
to
mo
still
more
incredible
that
each
of
the
members
of
all
these
broods
should
produce
exactly
the
same
amount
and
kind
of
further
variation
in
their
many
broods
;
and
so on,
through
a
longer
or
shorter
period.
There
should,
on
this
principle,
be
a
multitude
of
varieties,
and
not
one
type
only.
This
seemed
to
me
sound
reasoning
;
and
it
is
sound,
from
the
premises
assumed.
But
a
doubt
has
-begun
to
grow
in
my
mind
as
to
the
soundness
of
one
part
of
the
premises. I
have
no
doubt
as to
the
fallacy
of
this
constant
persistence
of
change
;
but
I
am
not
so clear as
I
was,
that
it
is
an
impossibility
for
Nature
when
she
does
make
a
change
to
make
the
transition
gradually
or
over
large
bodies
simultane
ously,
and
yet
show
no
traces
of
the
process.
I
think
I
see
some
facts
which
imply
as
much,
and
I
think
I
see
what
the
brake
is
by means
of
which
the
progress
of
change
is
arrested.
We
know
that
throughout
the world,
multitudes
both
of
local
and
climatal
varieties
occur,
which,
whether
they
are
species
or
varieties,
still
possess
one
common
facies.
There
are
dozens
of
forms
of
plants
and
insects
from
North
America,
which
are
so like
European
individuals
of
the
same
species,
that
no
one
would
think
of
separating
them
;
and
yet
any
botanist
or
entomologist
will
tell
without
fail
from
which
side
of
the
Atlantic
each
specimen
came.
There
are
similar
varieties
of
man
in
every
land.
How
have
these
differences
of
form
been
produced
?
On
this
point
we
are
not
wholly
left
without
direction
;
we
have
a
faint
glimmering
of
light,
because
we
have
seen
a
race
of
man
formed
under
our
own
eyes,
the
Anglo
—
or
rather
the
Europco-American
nation,
aa
distinct
and
well
marked
a
race
as
any
other
;
and
yet
the
change
has
been
effected
over
the
whole
of
the
United
States
without
any
transition
men
ever
having
been
observed
;
and
what
is
still
more
extraordinary,
it
has
been
effected
over
the
whole
of
the
region
where
it
occurs
at
the
same
time.
The
race
has
apparently
not
been
produced
by
an
American
being
born
from
an
Englishman,
and
then
by
his
propagating
young
Americans,
but
hundreds
of
thousands
have
had
the
same
impress
affixed
upon
them
over
the
length
and
breadth
of
the
land
at
the
same
time.
Agassiz
may
be
right,
after
all,
although
not
in
the
sense
in
which,
I
imagine,
he
meant
it,
when
he
contended
for
a
multiple
origin
of
species.
Now,
according
to
the
reasoning
in
which
I
trusted,
there
should
have
been
no
Anglo-American
nation,
—
the
type
should
have
been
frittered
away
in
a
thousand
different
directions.
A
congeries
of
all
kinds
of
different
degrees
of
change
should
have
been
jumbled
up
together,
leaving
no
distinguishable
character
by
which
to
know
the
American
from
any
other
nation.
And
yet,
there
he
is,
a
nation
per
se;
known
to
"Punch,"
—
known
to
passport
officers,
—
known
to
ourselves,
—
easily
identified,
easily
figured,
and
easily
caricatured.
So,
I
believe,
there
is
a
modern
Mexican
race
;
a
modern
Brazilian
;
modern
Negroes,
and
a
modern
Australian
race
is
far
on
the
way.
Although
the
example
of
the
American
is,
perhaps,
the
most
striking
I
could
select,
being
almost
the
only
one
where
man
has
had
the
opportunity,
or,
at
least,
has
had
the
occasion
forced
upon
him,
of
observing
such
a
change,
there
is
no
reason
to
doubt
that
what
has
occurred
with
him
has
also
taken
place
in
a
multitude
of
other
varieties.
Such
an
argumentum
ad
hominem
is
hard
to
get
over,
and
I
do
not
mean
to
attempt
to
do
so.
I
have
come
to
the
conclusion
to
accept
the
fact,
that
Nature
can produce
a
new
type
without
our
being
able
to
see
the
marks
of
transition,
and
that
she
can
alter
a
whole
race
simultaneously
without
its
passing
through
the
phase
of
development
from
an
individual
in
whom
the
entire
change
was
first
perfected.
In
the
case
alluded
to,
the
prepotent
typical
influence
has
been
impressed
on
the
whole
;
no
doubt,
by
derivation,
but
still
by
some
additional
influence
affecting
many
at
the
same
ORIGIN
OF
SPECIES.
7
time.
If
this
is
the
case
with
varieties,
I
think
it
must
follow
that
the
same
principle
may
also
act
in
the
formation
of
species.
The
difficulty
in
drawing
the
distinction
between
a
variety
and
a
species
seems
a
sufficient
reason
for
holding
that
if
we
find
a
principle
affecting
the
production
of
the
one,
it
will
also
apply
to
the
other.
At
any
rate,
it
will
not
be
the
Darwinians
who
will
object
to
the
same
measure
being
applied
to
both
;
and
as
to
their
opponents,
I
have
no
fresh
argument
beyond
what
may
be
inferred
from
the
above
to
bring
to
bear
upon
them.
I
need
scarcely
say
that,
in
other
respects,
this
change
in
my
views
brings
me
no
nearer
Mr.
Darwin.
In
the
alteration
which
has
been
made
in
the
European
races
by
transfer
to
America,
I
see
no
indication
of
the
principle
of constant
change,
nor
selection,
nor
yet
of
the
struggle
for
life,
which
are
essential
parts of
his
theory.
These
are
the
chief
differences
between
his
views
and
mine.
He
believes
that
in
all
organic
beings
a
certain
degree
of
change
is
at
all
times
unintermittingly
going
on
;
and
that,
from
that
variation
and
selection,
through
the
struggle
for
life,
new
species
are
being
incessantly
developed.
He
believes
that
the
portals
of
the
manufactory
of
new
species
are
constantly open,
and
the
process
always
going
on.
He
makes
ample
provision
for
instability
;
none
for
stability.
I
believe
that
the
gates are
habitually
shut,
but
that
they
are
always
ready
to
be
opened
to
a
greater
or
less
width
at
a
touch
of
the
key,
and
that
that
key
is
change
in
the
conditions
under
which
species
live.
It
does
not
matter
what
the
change
is,
nor
in
what
direction
it
takes
place.
It
has
no
relation
to
adap
tation
nor
teleological
purposes,
it
may
be
for
their
comfort
or
discomfort
;
for
their
benefit
or
the
reverse
;
its
bearing
on
their
organization
is
a
matter
of
indifference
;
all
that
is
wanted
is
change
of
some
kind
or
other
to
ruffle
the
repose
of
the
pool.
The
only
relation
in
kind,
which
I
can
conceive
between
the
alteration
of
condition
and
the
change
of
species
is
that
the
greater
and
more
sudden
the
change
of
circumstances
the
greater
and
more
divergent
is
the
change
in
the
species.
On
the
other
hand,
it
is
plain
to
me
that
there
must
be
some
law
which
arrests
variation
and
confines
it
within
certain
bounds.
Mr.
Bentham
has
truly
said,
"
Every
species
has
certain
determinate
limits
of
variation,
which
it
only
exceeds
under
exceptional
circumstances,
and
the
exceptionally
abnormal
forms
thus
produced
are
few
in
individuals,
and
are
not
reproduced."
I
imagine
that
the
law
which
secures
this
stability
of
species
is
inertia.
So
long
as
they
are
not
meddled
with
they
stand
still;
but
subject
them
to
change,
—
whether
it
comes
to
them,
or
they
go
to
it,
—
give
them
an
impulse
of
any
kind,
and
variation
commences.
Some
receive
the
impulse
more
easily
than
others.
What
may
be
felt
by
one
may
not
bo
felt
by
another.
Con
stitutions
differ
:
hence,
the
greater
range
of
some
species
than
others
;
but
whenever
the
change
makes
itself
felt,
then
I
apprehend
modification
commences
;
and
as
we
go
along,
we
shall,
I
think,
find
instances,
such
as
the
half-completed
species
of
the
circumpolar
regions,
hovering
between
varieties
and
species,
which
prove
that
the
degree
of
modification
which
takes
place in
species,
bears
some
relation
to
the
amount
of
alteration
on
the
conditions of
their
existence
;
and
it
may
be,
that
change
once
induced
works
more
vigorously
in
warm
than
in cold
climates.
It
is
well
known
to
hybridizers
that
it
is
not
until
the
second
generation
of
hybrids
"
that those
which
do
not
all
revert
to
the
specific
types
give
rise
to
that
irregular
variation
which
induces,
after
some
generations,
that
chaos
of
undecided
forms,
in
the
face
of
which
all
the
efforts
of
botanical
describers
miscarry."*
It
is
not
until
the
barrier
has
been
broken
down
that
these
irregularities
commence
;
that
once
done,
there
is
no
end
to
them.
A
somewhat
parallel
case
is
quoted
by
Sir
Charles
Lyell
from
tho
*
Naudin,
in
"
Comptes
Kendus
do
1'
Academic
des
Sciences."
Nov.
21,
1864.
8
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
observations
of
the
late
Dr.
Turner,
"
that
when
mineral
matter
is
in
a
'
nascent
state,'
that
is
to
say,
just
liberated
from
a
previous
state
of
chemical
combination,
it is
most
ready
to
unite
with
other
matter,
and
form
a
new
chemical
compound."*
In
other
words,
inertia
once
destroyed,
and
motion
given,
impulse
is
more
readily
received
and
propagated.
The
ordinary
state
of
quiescence
will
be
resumed
as
soon
as
the
animal
has
become
habituated
to
the
alteration
;
but
by
that
time
it
is
no
longer
the
same
animal,
it
has
become
a
new
species.
In
this
way,
and
in
this
way
only,
do
I
think
that
hybridization
may
have
some
influence
in
producing
a
new
species,
viz.,
by
disturbing
the
normal
stability
of
an
earlier
species,
and
preparing
it
to
receive
an
impulse
from
less
alteration
of
condition
than
would
otherwise
have
affected
it.
It
may
be
objected
to this
hypothesis,
that
it is
inconsistent
with
our
experience
of
exotic
plants
which
have
been
naturalized
in
this
country.
We
have
plenty
of plants
which
have
been
brought
from
the
other
side
of
the
world,
and
have
been
grown
for
a
couple
of
hundred
years
in
this
country,
and
yet
no
alteration
is
perceptible
upon
them.
My
answer
to this
is,
that
one
essential
element
in
my
theory
is,
that
the
change
is
effected
through
the
medium
not
of
single
individuals,
but
of
a
multitude
of
individuals
—
a
whole
nation
of
the
same
species
;
and
I
know
of
no
instance
in
which
such
an
agglomeration
of
exotic
species
has
ever
existed
in
this
country.
We
can
easily
conceive
that
where
the
individuals
are
isolated
or
in
small
numbers,
any
change
which
might
show
itself
upon
one
or
two
of
their
descendants
may
have
escaped
our
observation,
and become
extinguished
before
it
was
established
for
want
of
individuals
through
which
to
propagate,
develope,
and
extend
it.
Moreover,
the
process
of
change
is
obviously
gradual
and
imperceptible,
and
extends
over a
greater
space
of
time
than
we
have
had
the
opportunity
of
observing.
Again,
the
species
may
have
been
of
those possessing
constitutions
adapted
to
admit
without
feeling
them
considerable
variation
in their
conditions
of
life
;
and
lastly,
it
is
not
absolutely true
that
no change
has
been
observed
;
our
observations
in
this
country
are
made
on
plants
or
animals
which
are
soon
killed
by
the
climate,
if
the
conditions
of
life
are
not
pretty
well
suited
to
their
constitution.
Where
the
climate
is
warmer,
it
seems
that
a
greater
change
of
condition
can
be
borne than
in
cold
countries
without
killing
the
species
;
and
in
tropical
lands
a
change
is
cer
tainly
observed.
In
cattle,
the
Pelones
and
Calougas
now
existing
in
the
warmer
and
warmest
parts
respectively
of
South
America,
having
been
changed
from
ordinary
cattle
so
much
that
the
former
has
only
very
fine
short
hair,
and
the
latter
no
hair
at
all.
The
effect
of
climate
on
the
wool
of
sheep
is
well
known
;
and
Mr.
Winwood
Reade,
in
speaking
of
the
different
animals
and
plants
introduced
into
West
Africa,
speaks
of
a
marked
change
in
all.
The
horse
rapidly
deteriorates,
and
in
some
places
cannot
be kept
alive
at
all.
The
sheep
change
in
other
respects
than
their
wool
;
the
very
dogs,
which
we
should expect
to
bear
the
change
at
least
as
well
as
their
masters,
alter
under
the
baleful
climate.
"
In
process of
time,"
writes
Bosman,
"
our
dogs
alter
strangely
here
;
their
cars
grow
long
and
stiff
like
those of
foxes, to
which
colour
they
also
incline,
so
that
in
three
or
four
years
they
degenerate
into
very
ugly
creatures
;
and
in
three
or
four
broods
their
barking
turns
into
a
howl."
As
to
plants
Mr.
Reade
says,
"
It
is
only
on
the
borders
of
malarious
Africa,
that
is
to say,
in
Angola
and
Senegambia,
that
most
foreign
plants
and
vegetables
can
be
made
to
live
;
and
these,
as
Mr.
Gabriel
of
Loanda
informed
me,
completely
changed
their
nature
when
planted
in
the
African
soil."f
But
although
I
mention
these
instances,
it
is
not
on
them
that
I
rely
for
an
answer
to
the
*
Lyell's
"
Elements
of
Geology."
Sixth
edition,
18G5,
p,
41.
t
Reade,
Winwood,
"
Savage
Africa,"
1SG3,
p.
519.
ORIGIN
OF
SPECIES.
tf
objection.
It
is
the
absence
of a
sufficient
number
of
individuals,
and
for
a
sufficiently
long
time
to
allow
the
experiment
to
be
fairly
tried.
My
hypothesis
seems
also
to
furnish
a
satisfactory
explanation
of a
phenomenon
which
has
puzzled
naturalists
to
account
for.
Professor
Owen
refers to
a
special
law
of
nature
the
remarkable
fact
that,
"with
extinct,
as
with
existing
mammalia,
particular
forms
were
assigned
to
par
ticular
provinces,
and
that
the
same
forms
were
restricted
to
the
same
provinces
at
a
former
geological
period
as at
the
present
day."*
Dr.
Knox
(whose
ability
at
least,
if
not
his
judgment,
commanded
respect)
held
similar
views
still
more
strongly.
He
maintained
that
so specially
were
the
inhabitants
of
every
country adapted
to
that
place,
that
they
would
thrive
there
and
nowhere
else
;
and
he
adduced
the
inhabitants
of
the
United
States,
and
more
especially
the
New
Englanders
(they
being
the
portion
of
them
longest
exposed
to
the
influence
of
physical
conditions
different
from
those
of
the
countries
whence
their
progenitors
came),
as
an
instance
to
show
the
effect
of
a
change
of
country
or
physical
condition,
however
trifling
that
might
be.f
I
have
applied
the
illustration
to
a
different
purpose
;
but
the use
he
made
of
it
was
to
point
to
the
assumed
shortness
of
their
lives,
the
alleged
earlier
maturity
and
more
speedy
loss
of
beauty
in
their
women,
the
rapid
decay
of
their
teeth,
their
restless
and
unsettled
habits,
and any
other
similar
peculiarities
in
which
he
thought
they
contrasted
unfavourably
with
the
English
and
German
people
from
whom
they
sprang,
as
evidence
of
deterioration,
and
insisted
that,
but
for
the
constant
supply
of
fresh
blood
from
the
original
stock,
they
would
have
been
much
worse,
if
not
wholly
extinct.
How
he
reconciled
these
fancied
ideas
of
decadence
with
the
general
acuteness
of
the
American
intellect,
and
what
I
may
almost
admit
to
be
their
national
supremacy,
in
ingenuity
and
constructive
faculty
;
or
how
he
would
have
explained
away
the
brilliant
courage,
chivalrous
feeling,
and
heroic
endurance,
of
which
so
many
bright
examples
have been
lavishly
given
on
both
sides
during
the
late
unhappy
war,
is
no
business
of
mine.
I
do
not
adopt
the
Doctor's
views.
I
believe
in
change,
but
not
in
deterioration.
If
progress
is
to
be
imported
into
the
question,
then
amelioration,
not
de
terioration,
must
be
the
rule.
He,
however,
maintained
that
the
progress
was
retrograde,
that
similar
symptoms
were
already
showing
themselves
in
the
Australian
colonies
;
and
that
so
marked
was
the
deterioration
in
the
sheep
and
cattle,
that
it
was
only
by
the
unceasing
importation
of
the
best
stock
from
this
country
that
the
quality
of
their
flocks
and
herds
was
maintained,
f
This
was
the
dream
or
fancy
of
a
clever
but
eccentric
man,
not
perhaps
too
scrupulous
as
to
the
authenticity
of
his
facts
;
but
Professor
Owen's
unknown
law,
at
least,
is
the
deliberate
opinion
of
a
sober-minded
thinker.
Sir
Charles
Lyell,
in
like
manner,
thus
acknowledges
the
difficulty,
"Dr.
Bachman
pointed
out
to
me
ten
genera
of
birds
and
ten
of
quadrupeds,
all
peculiar
to
North
America,
but
each
represented
on
the
opposite
side
of
the
Rocky
Mountains
by
distinct
species.
The
theory
of
specific
centres,
or
the
doctrine
that
each
species
of
bird
and
quadruped
originated
in
one
spot
only,
may
explain
in
a
satisfactory
manner
one
part
of
this
phenomenon
;
for
we
may
assume
that
a
lofty
chain
of
mountains
opposed
a
powerful
barrier
to
migration,
and
that
the
mountains
were
more
ancient
than
the
introduction
of
these
particular
quadrupeds
and
birds
into
the
planet.
But
the
limitation
of
peculiar
generic
types
to
certain
geographical
areas
note
observed
in
so
many
parts
of
the
globe
points
to
some
other
and
higher
laic
governing
the
creation
of
species
itself,
which
in
the
present
state
of
science
is
inscrutable
to
us,
and
may
perhaps
remain
a mystery for
ever."%
*
Owen,
"
Report
on
the
Extinct
Mammals
of
Austra-
X
Ltell's
"
Second
Visit
to
the
United
States,"
vol.
i.
lia,"
1844,
and
"Palaeontology,"
1858,
p.
397.
364,
1850.
t
Knox
on
the
Races
of
Man,
1862,
p.
71
and
73.
10
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
Agassiz,
again,
says,
"
Nothing
can be
more
striking
to
the
observer
than
the
fact
that
animals,
though
endowed
with
the
power
of
locomotion,
remain
within
fixed
bounds
in
their
geographical
distribution,
although
an
unbounded
field
for
migration
is
open
to
them
in
all
directions
over
land,
through
the
air,
and
through
the
waters.
And
no
stronger
argument
can
be
introduced
to
show
that
living
beings
are
endowed
with
their
power
of
locomotion
to
keep
within
general
boundaries
rather
than
to
spread
extensively."
*
We
know
well
enough
what
he
means
by
this
paradox
;
although,
if
we
were
inclined
to
be
critical,
we
might
call
it
rather
a
Hibernian
definition
of
the
purposes
of
the
organs
of
locomotion,
to
say
that
limbs
are
given
us
to
enable
us
to
stay
at
home.
None
of
these
authors
can
mean
that
there
is
any
special
attraction
for
the
fauna
in
the
solum
of
the
province.
The
history
of
the
glacial
epoch
furnishes
us
with
a
thousand
instances
to
the
contrary.
As
the
cold
retired
from
the
Equator,
the
glacial
inhabitants
(produced,
as I
believe,
under
its
influence)
followed
in
its
footsteps.
The
law
they
speak
of
must
apply
not
to
the
place
but
to
its
conditions.
The
hypothesis
which
I
offer
seems
to
meet
all
the
requirements
of
the
case.
Under
it,
the
provinces
are
preserved
special,
not
by
any
mysterious
emoyri,
or
peculiar
law
which
prevents
their
inmates
from
using
their
limbs
for
going
abroad,
but
simply,
in
the
first
place,
by
the
inertia,
or
instinctive
regard
for
personal
ease,
which
leads
every
creature
to
remain
where
it
is
while
it is
comfortable,
and
so
not
to
pass
beyond
the
bounds
for
which
it
was
originally
fitted
and
best
adapted,
into
others
less
suited
for
it.
And,
in
the
next
place,
when
by
geological
changes,
in
sufficiency
of food
for
growing
numbers,
or
other
extraneous
causes,
it is
reluctantly
driven
out
or
compelled
to
pass
beyond
its
natural
province,
the
province
is
still
preserved
special
either
by
the
death
of
those
which
have
gone
beyond
it,
or
by
their
transformation
(in
consequence
of
their
having
passed
under
new
conditions
of
life,)
into
something
else
—
into
a
new
phase
of
their
old
form
—
in
a
word,
into
new
species,
more
or
less
distant
from
the
original
type
according
to
the
character
of
the
new
conditions.
This
hypothesis
also
accords
sufficiently
well
with
what
we know
of
the
history
of
species
during
past
geological
epochs.
If
the
common
belief
be
well
founded
that
our
globe
at
one
stage
of
its
existence
was
a
ball
of
incandescent
matter,
which
for
long
went
on
gradually
cooling,
it
must
follow that
the
more
such
internal
heat
made
itself
felt
at
the
surface,
the
more
uniform
the
temperature
and
climate
in
every
country
on
the
face
of
the
earth
must
have
been,
and
the
less
the
amount
of
variation
in
the
conditions
of
life
upon
it.
As
the
internal
heat
diminished,
the
more
would
the
surface
become
liable
to
the
extraneous
influence
of
heat
from
the
sun,
or
to
unequal
degrees
of
radiation
from
land
and
sea;
and
as
their
proportions
and
arrangement
varied,
the
greater
would
be
the
variety
of
the
conditions
of
life
upon
the
surface
of
the
globe
and
the
more
frequently
would
changes
in
them
take
place.
Now
the
theoretical
result
of
such
a
state
of
things
upon
the
production
of
species
according
to
the
laws
which
my
hypothesis
presupposes,
would
be,
that
during
the
earlier
periods of
the
history
of
the
globe,
the
number
and
variety
of
forms
of
life
would
be
more
uniform
and
fewer
in
number,
and
during
the
later
periods
when
the
amount
of
internal
heat
was
diminishing, the
forms
of
life
would
be
more
varied
and
numerous.
The
formation
of
new
species
being,
according
to
my
theory,
dependent
upon
the
old
ones
encountering
a
new
condition
of
life,
where
there
was
only
*
Agassiz,
op.
cit.
p.
13.
ORIGIN
OF
SPECIES.
11
one
condition
of
life,
there
could
be
no
change
of
species.
Of
course
such
an
absolute unifor
mity
of
heat
could
not
exist
;
a
pot,
although
boiling,
has not
in
every
point
the
same
degree
of
heat,
therefore
different
degrees
of
temperature,
in
other
words,
different
physical
con
ditions
which
might
give
rise
to
new
species,
must
at
all
times
have
existed
on
our
planet
;
but,
as
in
the
parallel
of
the
boiling
pot,
they
would
not
be
great
(so
might
often
be
ineffective),
and would
not
be
permanently
fixed
for
any
time
upon
one
spot,
so
that
although
new
species
might
occasionally
be
developed,
special
provinces,
or
fauna,
could
not
exist,
or
at
least
could
only
do
so
when
the
internal
heat
had
been
so
far
reduced
as to
allow
external
influences
to
bestow
a
more
or
less
permanent
character
upon
particular
spots.
The
greatest
change
of
all,
however,
must
have
occurred
at
the
glacial
epoch,
when
probably
for
the
first
time
in
the
history
of
the
globe
organic
life
made
acquaintance
with
frost
and
snow.
Then,
if
there
is
any
truth
in
my
theory,
a
universal
change
must
have
taken
place
in
everything
that
was
exposed
to
that
cold; that
is,
in
fact,
in
everything
beyond
the
tropics.
Now,
in relation
to this
latter
point,
we
find
that in
none
of
the
strata
of
a
date
anterior
to
the
glacial
cold
are
the
remains
of
any
boreal
animal
to
be
found.
Every
creature
adopted
for
life
in
a
cold
country
appears
to
have
been
developed,
subsequent
to
that
epoch.
For
example,
the
mice
and
the
voles
are
two
nearly
allied
creatures,
the
former
of
which
is
adapted
to
mild
countries,
the
latter
to
cold.
No
mice
or
rats
are
found
in
the
arctic
circle,
but
voles
abound
;
no
voles
occur
in
the
tropics
or
warmer
temperate
regions,
but
mice
are
abundant.
So
the
fossil
remains
of
mice
are
found
in
the
tertiary
as
well
as
the
recent
deposits,
but
none
of
any
vole
until
the
diluvium
deposited
subsequent
to
the
commencement
of
the
glacial
epoch.
The
same
is
to
be
observed
of
all
boreal
animals
that
I
know
of,
and
I
believe
the
rule
is
universal.
I
apprehend
that
the
change
which
took
place
in
the
northern
hemisphere
at
the
glacial
epoch
was
absolute
:
nothing
that
remained
to
abide
the
influence
of
the
cold
could
escape
alteration.
'Whatever
escaped
change
did
so
by
taking
to
flight
to
the
south,
and
carrying
its
climate
and
conditions
of
life
with
it.
I
shall
have
to
discuss
these
points
more
at
large
and
in
detail
hereafter.
It
is
sufficient
here
to
indicate
the
support
that
they
seem
to
give
to
my
hypothesis
of
the
origin
of
species.
The
facts
relating
to
the
appearance
of
species
in
the
earlier
geological
formations
seem
to
accord
not
less
exactly
with
the
requirements
of
this
hypothesis.
Geologists
inform
us
that
in
the
earlier
periods
of
the
world's
history
the
changes
of
life
in
the
sea
(and
there
appears
no
reason
to
suppose
that
a
different
law
should
regulate
life
in
the
sea
from
life
on
the
land)
were
accomplished
at
a
rate
much
less
rapid
than
that
which
prevailed
in
later
times.
The
premises
from
which
they
derive
these inferences
are
no
doubt
imperfect.
They
do
so
by
com
paring
the
depth
of
sedimentary
rocks
in
which
indications
of
life
have
been
found,
in
the
palaeozoic,
the
mesozoic,
and
the
caenozoic
periods.
f
They
assume
the
amount
of
changes
of
life
on
the
whole
to
be
equal
in
each
of these
periods,
—
an
assumption
which
is,
perhaps,
not warranted,
—
and
having
done
so,
find,
according
to
Prof.
Phillips,
the
rate
of
progressive
change
to
be
-fa
for
palaeozoic,
jig
for
mesozoic,
and
-J
for
caenozoic
time.%
If
the
proportion
thus
given
by
Professor
Phillips
for
caenozoic
and
palaeozoic
time
be
anything
like
correct,
or
\
to
T*g,
we
have,
I
submit,
a
strong
confirmation
of
the
truth
of
the
*
See
Geological
Diagram.
I
Professor
PHiLLirs,
in
"
Quarterly
Journ
Geol.
Soc.,"
vol.
xvi.
part
2,
p.
1.
(May,
I860.)
12
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
general
principles
of
my
theory.
As
to
the
uniformity
of
fauna
in
ancient
times,
every
one
knows
how
complete
that
was.
The
same
fossils
in
the
older
rocks
indicate
with
perfect
certainty
each
for
mation
in
whatever
quarter
of
the
globe
it
may
be
;
and
the
great
breaks
or
commencement
of
a
new
phase
of
life
at
the
end
of
the
palaeozoic
and
mesozoic
epochs
may
be
due
to
some
cosmical
change having
taken
place,
affecting
the
conditions
of
life
over
the
whole
globe,
at
these
dates.
Dr.
Babbage's
machine
furnishes
an
illustration
of
the
mode
in
which
Nature's
action
may
perhaps
be
regulated
in
thus
developing
species.
Dr.
Babbage,
as
all
the
world
knows,
has
invented
a
calculating
and
an
analytical
machine.
The
first
is
merely
a
machine
for
arithmetical
calculation,
the
latter
is
a
contrivance
of
a
much
higher
and
more
difficult
character.
It
not
only
does
the
arithmetical
calculations,
but
changes
the
formulae
where
it is
necessary
to
do
so
in
order
to
work
out
the
result,
and
goes
through
the
operation
of
equation.
This
machine
can put
upon
paper
a
series
of
terms
or arithmetical
numbers
of
any
kind
whatever,
following
any
desired
law.
If,
for
example,
an
order
is
given
to
it
to
make
the
series
of
the
natural
numbers,
12
3
4,
&c.,
and
this
order
alone
is
given,
it
will
go
on
producing
the
series
of
natural
numbers,
without
variation,
until
the
machine
is
worn
out,
or
the
motive
power
ceases.
The
parallel
to
this
in
our
subject
would
be
a
law
in
nature
providing
for
the
continuance
of
species
by
generation,
but
providing
for
no
develop
ment
of
any
new
form.
But
at
the
original
setting
of
the
machine an
order
might
have
been
given
to
it
to
violate
the
above
law,
and
at
some
term
millions
upon
millions
of
times
distant,
to
substitute
a
different
number
following
some
other
law,
and
this
new
law
might
have been
directed
to
be
observed
for
one
turn
of
the
machine,
or
for
any
number
of
turns,
and
then
that
the
original
law
should
be
restored
for
the
future.
This
would
not
exactly
be
the
parallel
to
the
law
ordaining
the
development
of
new
species
on
the
occurrence
of
any
change
in
condition.
It
is
only
a
parallel
to
one
producing
a
new
form
or
species
at
some
certain
time,
and
that
time,
fixed
and
independent
of
the
occurrence
or
concurrence
of
circumstances.
The
parallel,
to
be
complete,
would
require
that
the
new
law
should
not
take
place
at
a
fixed
predetermined
time,
but
be
dependent
on
circumstances,
or
a
circumstance
(as,
for
example,
the
occurrence
in
plants or
animals
of
some
change,
in
the
physical
condition
of
themselves
or
their
place
of
abode.)
Not
being
quite
satisfied,
therefore,
with
the
parallel
so
far
as
I could
work
it
out
from
the
account
of
Dr.
Babbage's
machine
given
in
any
books
about
it
to
which
I
had
access,
I
had
recourse
to
the
Doctor
himself
—
to
whom
I
owe
many
acknowledgments
for
his
kindness
and
patience
with
my
dullness
—
and
asked
him
the
question
whether
he
could
so
set
the
machine
that
it
should
go on
pro
ducing
a
series
of
numbers
until
a
certain
concurrence
of
circumstances
should
take
place,
the
time
when
such
concurrence
would
or
could
take
place
not
being
known
to
him,
and
that
then,
and
not
until
then,
the
alteration
on
the
law
should
take
place.
The
Doctor
thought
for
a
moment
and
then
replied,
"
Certainly
I
can.
I
can
give
the
machine an
order
to
go
on
producing
a
series
of
numbers
until
the
last,
and
the
third
last,
and
the
fifth
last,
or
any
other
combination,
shall
all
be
the
same
figure,
or
shall
be
some
combination
of
figures
—
all
threes,
for
example,
or
all
fives,
or
two
fours
and
one
five,
and
then
the
new
law
shall
come
into
operation.
I
cannot
tell,
when
that
may
happen,
and
do
not
know
whether
it
may
ever
happen,
but
whenever
it
does
happen,
be
it
soon
or
be
it
late,
the
new
law
will
immediately
come
into
operation."
That
is
the
parallel
to
our
case,
and
I use
it
for
the
purpose
of
making
more
plain
to
the reader
the
form
in
which
the
subject
of
which
I
have
been
speaking
presents
itself
to
my
mind.
SPECIFIC
CENTRES.
13
The
adaptation
of
speoies
to
the
conditions
in
which
they
are
to
pass
their
lives,
as
of
tree
kangaroos
to
a
life
in
trees,
or
blind
animals
to
a
life
in
darkness,
is,
I
think,
a
phenomenon
of
a
different
nature,
and
regulated
by
other
laws,
the
working
or
nature
of
which
does
not
come
within
the
scope
of
this
inquiry.
I
offer
no
opinion
here
upon
that
subject.
Only
of
one
thing
I
may
say,
I
feel
as
sure
as I
can
be
of
anything
which
I
do
not
know,
and
that
is,
that
it is
not
by
the
process
supposed
by
Mr.
Darwin,
viz.,
by
Nature
trying
an
infinity
of
experiments
and
rejecting
them
all
until
she
hit
upon
the
right
one.
Nature
never
makes
chips.
When
the
occasion
for
a
tree
kangaroo
arose,
we
may
be
sure that
the
tree
kangaroo
appeared
perfect
.
at
the
first
attempt.
There
was
no
failure
of
myriads
of
forms
of
kangaroos
in
other
directions
created
or
developed
but
to
die,
until
by
chance
one
in
this
direction
appeared.
That
I
feel,
but
I
cannot
prove
it
;
it
is
only
my
feeling,
and
therefore
of
no
use
to
any
one but
myself.
Of
course,
in
adopting
the
view
which
I
have
above
explained,
I
abandon,
to
a
certain
extent,
the
theory
of
specific
centres
of
creation
;
and
I
adopt,
to
a
like
extent,
the
theory
of
a
multiple
origin
of
species.
But
neither
unconditionally.
I
abandon
the
idea
of
specific
centres
of
creation
only
so
far
as
that
implies
that
the
original
centre
was
confined
to
one
or
two
single
progenitors.
My
centre
is
the
whole
species
;
—
from
the
region
where
it
received
the
impress
of
its
character,
it
may
spread
in
all
directions,
continuing
unchanged
wherever
it
feels
no
important
change
in
its
con
ditions
of
life
;
becoming
changed
into
another
species
or
variety
when
a
change
on
them
makes
itself
felt.
In
like
manner
my
multiple
origin
of
species
is
not
that of
Agassiz,
who
imagined
the
same
species to
be
produced
separately
and
independently
of
each
other
in
many
different
places
without
communication,
as,
for
example,
the
same
species
of
fish
to
be
produced
in
three
different
rivers
between
which
there
were
no
means
of
communication.*
*
I
hope
that
I
have
correctly
interpreted
Agassi
z's
views
;
I
have
taken
them
from
the
following
quotation
from
his
paper
on
the
subject
in
the
"
Edinburgh
New
Philosophical
Journal:"
"
Let us
compare
the
different
species
which
occur
in
the
Danube,
in
the
Rhine,
and
the
Rhone,
three
hydro-
graphic
basins
entirely
unconnected
with
each
other
throughout
their
whole
extent.
They
spring
from
the
same
mountain
chain,
as
we
may
take
the
Inn
as
the
source
of
the
Danube.
These
three
great
rivers
take
their
rise
within
a
few
miles
of
each
other.
Nevertheless,
most
of
their
fishes
differ
;
but
there
are
some
which
are
common
to
the
three.
***
If
these
animals
had
not
originated
in
these
rivers
separately,
why
should
not
such
closely-allied
species
—
some
of
which
occur
in
the
three
basins
—
have
all
spread
equally
into
them
;
and
if
they
originated
in
the
separate
basins,
we
have,
within
close
limits,
a
multiple
origin
of
the
same
species
;
and
that
this
multiple
origin
must
be admitted
as
a
fact,
is
shown
by
the
following
further
evidence.
Among
the
carps
we
find,
for
instance,
Barbus,
Gobio,
Carpio,
common
to
the
three
;
but
the
Danube
has
three
Gobios,
whilst
the
others
have
but one
—
one
of
the
Danube
being
identical
with
the
one
of
the
other
two
rivers.
The
most
striking
fact,
however,
occurs
in
the
genus
Lecciscus.
L.
dobula
is
common
to
the
three
;
but
in
addition
to
it
the
Danube
has
second
species,
which
occur
neither
in
the
Danube
nor
in
the
Rhine
;
and
in
the
Rhine
there
are
species
which
be
long
neither
to
the
Rhone
nor
to
the
Danube.
Now
we
ask,
could
all
these
species
of
Leuciscus
have
been
created
in
one
of
the
basins
in
the
Danube,
for
instance,
and
have
migrated
in
such
a
way
that a
certain
number
of
the
species
should
remain
solely
in
the
Danube,
while
some
others
left
the
Danube
altogether
to
settle
finally
only
in
the
Rhone,
and
others
to
settle
only
in
the
Rhine
;
that
one
accompanying
those
species
peculiar
to
the
Rhone
remained
in
the
Danube
with
those
species
peculiar
to
it,
and
settled
also
in
the
Rhine
with
those
species
peculiar
to
that
river
;
and
also
in
the
Rhine,
with
the
species
peculiar
to
the
Rhine.
And
whether
we
assume
the
Rhone
as
the
primitive
centre,
instead
of
the
Danube
or
the
Rhine,
the
argument
holds
equally
good.
We
have
one
species
common
to
the three
rivers,
and
several
spe
cies
peculiar
to
each
which
could
never
have migrated
(if
migration
took
place)
in
such
a
manner
as to
assume
this
present
combination.
But
if,
on
the
contrary,
we
suppose
that
all
the
species
originated
in
the
rivers
where
they
occur,
then
we
have
again
a multiple
origin
of that
species
which
is
common
to
the
three, for
it
were
wonderful
if
that
one
alone
had
migrated
when
they
were
all
so
closely
allied."
—
Agassiz,
in
"Edin.
New
Phil.
Journ."
vol.
xlix.
p.
12.
14
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
To
my
multiple
origin,
communication
and
direct
derivation
is
essential.
The
species
is
com
pounded
of
many
influences
brought
together
through
many
individuals,
and
distilled
by
Nature
into
one
species
;
and,
being
once
established,
it
may
roam
and
spread
wherever
it
finds
the
conditions
of
life
not
materially
different
from
those
of
its
original
centre.
I
may
add
that
I
do
not
imagine
that
time
has
anything
to
do
with
the
change
or
creation
of
species,
further
than
as
it
gives
greater
opportunity
for
the
occurrence
of
change.
Species
may
vibrate
backwards
and
forwards
between
two
differently
situated
districts
in
the
same
country,
and
at
each
vibration
give
off
new
forms,
while
the
portion
of
the
old
which
have
not
moved
still
sub
sist,
and
the
longer
time
there
is
for
this
to
go
on
of
course
the
greater
number
of
species
will
the
country
contain.
It
is
thus
not
solely
because
Africa
is
a
tropical,
and
in
many
parts
a
productive
land,
that
the
number
of
its
species
is
great,
nor
is
the
paucity
of
species
in
Siberia
wholly
due
to
the
ungenial
nature
of
its
soil
and
climate.
The
one
owes
its
preponderance
over
the
other
also
partly
to
the
comparatively
long
period
which
has
elapsed
since
it
became
dry
land,
and
the
other
its
deficiency
partly
to
the
short
time
which
has
elapsed
since
it
emerged
from
below
the
waters.
For
practical
purposes,
however,
my
opinion
regarding
the
origin
of
species
merely
requires
the
coincident
pre-existence
in
time
and
place
of
some
other
species
from
which
it
may
have
been
derived
;
it
may
have
been
derived,
as
I suppose,
through
the
effect
of
change
letting
loose
an
innate
power
of
variation,
or,
as
Mr.
Darwin
supposes,
by
selection.
It
may
have
been
by
descent
from
one
individual
in
whom
the
change
has
been
effected,
or,
as
I
now
believe,
by
the
impress
of
change
being
extended
over
all
the
individuals
similarly
situated.
I
am
not
greatly
concerned
to
explain
-
the
exact
mode
of
operation
of
the
laws
evolving
new
species.
What
I
cannot
do
without,
however,
is
the
assumption
that
there
is
some
law having
such
effect,
and
that
de
scent
is
the
only
possible
explanation
of
relationship
and
distribution.
15
CHAPTER
II.
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES,
Continued
MODES
OF
DISPERSAL
OF
SPECIES.
The
mode
In
which,
and
the extent
to
which,
species
become
dispersed,
is
another
point
which
must
be
settled
at
starting.
The
principal
question
on
which
a
difference
of
opinion
exists
is
the
value
to
be
attached
to
accidental
or
occasional
dispersal
as
a
means
of
distribution.
Taking
for
example
the
case
of
Oceanic
Islands,
there
are
two
ways
in
which
their
faunas
and
floras
may
be
accounted
for.
One
—
that
advocated
by
the
late
Professor
Edward
Forbes
—
by
supposing
that
at
some
period,
more
or
less
distant,
the
islands
had
been
united
to
the
nearest
land,
to
whose
faunas
and
floras
their
own
was
most
akin.
The
other,
which
is
that
adopted
by
Mr.
Darwin
for
most
of
the
cases
which
occur,
that
they
had
been
colonized
by
chance
visitants,
or
what
may
be
called
the
flotsam
and
jetsam
of
the
ocean.
For
the
purpose
of
testing
the
feasibility
of
his
hypothesis,
Mr.
Darwin
tried
many
ingenious
experiments
as
to
the
length
of
time
for
which
seeds
can
float
in
the
sea
without
losing
their
vitality.
He
reckoned
how
fast
currents
carry
them
on
their
way.
He
also
showed
the
many
different
means
by
which
they
may
be
transported
—
as
in
earth
about
the
roots
of
drift
timber,
or
adhering
to
the
beaks
or
claws
of
birds,
by
icebergs,
and
by
means
even
of
fresh-water
fish
swallowing
seeds,
and
then
being
themselves
swallowed
by
birds
of prey.
Edmund
Burke
objected
to
the
instances
of
some
of
his
political
opponents,
that
"their
examples
for
common
cases
were
all
taken
from
the
exceptions
of
most
urgent
necessity."
The
same
objection
applies
to
Mr.
Darwin's
illustrations.
It
is
not
to
be
denied
that
they
are
all
possible,
but
they
are
also
all
of
an
exceptional
nature,
and
some
of
them
very
improbable,
as,
for
example,
.
the
transport
of
seeds
by
means
of
icebergs,
or
by
birds
of
prey
swallowing
the
stomachs
of
vegetable-feeding
fish.
Where
the
icebergs
leave
their
parent
glacier
there
are
few
seeds
of
any
kind,
and
fewer
still
that
would
suit
the
climate
of
milder
regions.
As
to
the
birds
of
prey,
their
digestion
is
so
notoriously
rapid,
that
unless
the
bird
set
off
express
immediately
after
its
meal,
and
the
islands
were
not
far
off,
there
would
be
small
chance
of
anything
it
had
swallowed
ever
reaching
their
shores.
The
reader
will
remember
numerous
other
instances
of
the
actual
diffusion
of
plants
and
animals
in
a
similar
way
given
by
Sir
C.
Lyell
;
*
and
Mr.
Darwin,
while
he
adds
a
few
others,
has
no
doubt
a
multitude
more
in
his
armoury.
Notwithstanding
this,
I
can
come
to
no
other
conclusion
than
that
colonization
or
occasional
dispersal
is
insufficient
to
account
for
the
character
of
the
faunas
and
floras
of
Oceanic
Islands
;
and
I
believe
that
the
normal
mode
in
which
islands
have
been
peopled,
has
been
by
direct
continuity
with
the
land
at
some
former
period,
or
by
contiguity
so
close
as
to
be
equivalent
to
junction
;
and
that
the
exceptions
to
this,
such
as
St.
Helena,
have been
excessively
rare.
That
a
slight
intermixture
due
to
Mr.
Darwin's
*
Lykll,
"
Principles
of
Geology."
1st
Edition.
Vol.
II. p.
1G,
and
seq.
1832.
16
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
colonization
occurs
in
many
(probably
in
all)
I
am
ready
to
admit
;
and
from
instances
to
bo
afterwards
noticed,
I
am
disposed
to
reckon
the
proportions
of
such
intermixtures
in
the
flora,
in
the
most
favourable
circumstances,
at
not
more
than
two
per
cent.
In
the
fauna
I
think
it
must
be
much
As
the
question
is
a
most
important
one
in
relation
to
geographical
distribution,
and
Mr.
Darwin's
view
strikes
at
the
root
of a
great
portion
of
the
propositions
which
I
shall
have
to
submit
to
the
reader
in
this
work,
I
must
consider
his
arguments
in
some
detail.
"
Edward
Forbes
(says
he)
insisted
that
all
the
islands
in
the
Atlantic
must
recently
have
been
connected
with
Europe
or
Africa,
and
Europe
likewise
with
America.
Other
authors
have
thus
hypo-
thetically
bridged
over
every
ocean,
and
have
united
almost
every
island
to
some
mainland.
If,
indeed,
the
arguments
used
by
Forbes
are
to
be
trusted,
it
must
be
admitted
that
scarcely
a
single
island
exists
which
has
not
recently
been
united
to
some
continent.
This
view
cuts
the
Gordian
knot
of
the
dispersal
of
the
same
species
to
the
most
distant
points,
and
removes
many
a
difficulty.
But
to
the
best
of
my
judgment
we
are
not
authorized
in
admitting
such
enormous
geographical
changes
within
the
period
of existing
species.
It
seems
to
me
that
we
have
abundant
evidence
of
great
oscil
lations
of
level
in
our
continents,
but
not
of
such
vast
changes
in
their
position
and
extension
as to
have
united
them
within
the
recent
period
to
each
other,
and
to
the
several
intervening
Oceanic
Islands.
I
freely
admit
the
former
existence
of
many
islands
now
buried
beneath
the
sea,
which
may
have
served
as
halting-places
for
plants,
and
for
many
animals
during
their
migration.
In
the
coral-
producing
oceans
such
sunken
islands
are
now
marked
by
rings
of
coral
or
atolls
standing
over
them.
Whenever
it
is
fully
admitted,
as
I
believe
it
will
some
day
be,
that
each
species
has
proceeded
from
a
single
birth-place,
and
when,
in
the
course
of
time,
we
know
something
definite
about
the
means
of
distribution,
we
shall
be
enabled
to
speculate
with
security
on
the
former
extension
of
the
land.
But
I
do
not
believe
tnat
it
will
ever
be
proved
that
within
the
recent
period
continents
which
are
now
quite
separate
have
been
continuously,
or
almost
continuously,
united
with
each
other,
and
with
the
many
existing
Oceanic
Islands.
Several
facts
in
distribution
—
such
as
the
great
difference
in
the
marine
Faunas
on
the
opposite
side
of
almost
every
continent
—
the
close
relation
of
the
tertiary
inhabitants
of
several
lands,
and
even
seas,
to their
present
inhabitants
—
a
certain
degree
of
relation
(as
we
shall
hereafter
see)
between
the
distribution
of
mammals
and
the
depth
of
the
sea
—
these,
and
other
such
facts,
seem
to
me
opposed
to
the
admission
of
such
prodigious
geological
revolutions
within
the
recent
period
as
are
necessitated
on
the
view
advanced
by
Forbes,
and
admitted
by
his
many
followers.
The
nature
and
relative
proportions
of
the
inhabitants
of
Oceanic
Islands
likewise
seem
to
me
opposed
to
the
belief
of
their
former
continuity
with
continents."
And
in
another
place
he
thus
sums
up
:
"
All
the
foregoing
remarks
on
the
inhabitants
of
Oceanic
Islands
—
namely,
the
scarcity
of
kinds,
—
the
richness
in
endemic
forms
in particular
classes,
or
sections
of
classes,
—
the
absence
of
whole
groups,
as
of
batra-
chians
and
of
terrestrial
mammals,
notwithstanding
the
presence
of
aerial
bats,
—
the
singular
proportions
of
certain
orders
of
plants,
herbaceous
forms
having
been
developed
into
trees,
&c.
—
seem
to
me
to
accord
better
with
the
view
of
occasional
means
of
transport
having
been
largely
efficient
in
the
long
course
of
time,
than
with
the
view
of
all
our
Oceanic
Islands
having
been
formerly
connected
by
con
tinuous
land with
the
nearest
continent
:
for,
on
this
latter
view,
the
migration
would
probably
have
been
more
complete
:
and
if
modification
be
admitted,
all
the
forms
of
life
would
have
been
more
equally
modified,
in
accordance
with
the
paramount
importance
of
the
relation
of
organism
to
organism."*
*
Darwin,
op.
cit.
p.
427.
DISPERSAL
OF
SPECIES.
17
One
of
the
great
delights
in
dealing
with
Mr.
Darwin
is
the
perfect
fairness
with
which he
states
every
point
connected
with
his
case.
The
unconscious
bias,
from
which
few
men
escape,
seems
to
be
wanting
in
his
constitution.
He
alwaj's
tells
the
facts
which
make
against
him
as
fully
and
fairly
as
those
which
are
in
his
favour.
And
while
we
may
feel
unable
at
the
moment
to
make
head
against
the
current
of
ingenious
suggestions,
illustrations,
and
possibilities,
with
which
he
hurries
us
along,
he
always
gives
us
the
real
facts
to
anchor
by,
so
that
we
can,
when
we
think
proper,
pull
up
and
form
our
own
judgment.
Now,
on
this
topic
he
has
given
us
some
remarkable
instances
opposed
to
his
hypothesis.
He
mentions
various
islands
only
separated
from
others
or
the
main
land
by
a
narrow
channel
where
the
species
are
wholly
different.
He
refers to
the
Straits
of
Macassar
as
separating
two
widely
distinct
Mammalian
Faunas.
Such
a separation
was
first
sug
gested
by
Miiller,
and
is
laid
down
on
his
authority
in
Berghaus'
"Physical
Atlas."*
He
(Miiller)
ran
the
line
of
division
up
the
east side
of
Celebes,
whereas
Mr.
Earl
and Mr.
Wallace
(more
particularly
the
latter)
have
since
shown
that
it
lies
to
the
west
of
that
island
;
and
instead of
cutting
the
Island
of
Timor
in
two,
as
was
supposed
by
Miiller
to
be
the
case,
passes
up
the
narrow
straits
(only
a
few
miles
wide),
between
the
islands
of
Bali
and
Lombock.
Mr.
Wallace
also
notices
that
"
Java
possesses
numerous
birds
which
never
pass
over
to
Sumatra,
though
they
are
separated
by
a
strait
only
fifteen
miles wide,
and
with
islands
in
mid-channel."
f
Of
course
this
can
only
apply
to
non-migratorial
birds,
and
I
have
already
suggested
a
cause
why
even
birds
may
often
be kept
within
the
limits
of
their
original
bounds.
If
they
go
beyond
them
in
small
numbers
they
die
off.
If
they
go
and
increase
in
numbers,
the
new
conditions
of
life
affect
their
constitution,
set
in
action
the
principle
of
change,
and
they
become
transformed
into
new
species.
Again,
Mr.
Darwin
says,
in
speaking
of
the
Galapagos
Archipelago,
"
The
really
surprising
fact
in
this
case,
and
in
a
lesser
degree
in
some
analogous
instances,
is
that
the
new
species
formed
in
the
separate
islands
have
not
quickly
spread
to
the
other
islands.
But
the
islands,
though
in
sight
of
each
other,
are
separated
by
deep
arms
of
the
sea,
in
most
cases
wider
than
the
British
Channel
;
and
there
is
no
reason
to
suppose
that
they
have
at
any
former
period
been
continuously
united
J
...
Many
even
of
the
birds,
though
so
well
adapted
for
flying
from
island
to
island,
are
distinct."
At
the
Hawaian
Islands
each
separate
island
has,
in
a
general
way,
its
own
set
of
land
shells.
||
At
the
Sandwich
Islands
the
same
thing
occurs,§
and
even
the
fishes
of
different
islands
are
said
by
Agassiz
to
be
distinct
from
each
other.^f
Other
instances
might
be
given
of
islands
which
are
favourably
situated
for
receiving
immigrants,
being
inhabited
by
plants
and
animals
different
from
those
of
the
neighbouring
coasts,
although
still
bearing
the
far-off
impress
of
a
common
origin.
But
no
stronger
instance of
the
power
of
a
small
barrier
in
retaining
species
could
be
cited
than
that
of
the
straits
between
the
Continent
and
our
own
island.
The
faunas
and
floras
both
of
*
Berghaus,
"
Physikalischen
Atlas."
1845.
endemic
peculiarity
of
the
species of
each
individual
island
t
Wallace,
on
"
The
Physical
Geography
of
the
Malay
tells
of
subsequent
separation
and
change
wrought
in
each
Archipelago,"
in
Proceedings
of
Royal
Geographical
Society,
probably
at
the
same
time,
by
the
alteration
of
climate
June,
1863.
(Separate
copy,
p.
12.)
from
continental
or
terrestrial,
to
isolated
and
oceanic.
J
The
character
and
the
species
of
the
different
islands
§
Dr.
Pickering,
in
"
Proceedings
of
American
Aca-
would
lead
me
to
a
different
conclusion.
The
American
demy
of
Arts
and
Sciences,"
vol.
iv.
p.
193.
I860,
type
of
the
whole group
speaks
primarily
of
connexion
||
Dr.
A.
A.
Gould,
in "
Proceed.
Amer.
Acad.
Arts
with
the
continent.
The
family
facies
of
the
group
inler
and
Sciences,"
vol.
iv.
p.
19').
1860.
se,
speaks
of
a
period
when
the
whole
islands
were
so-
IT
Prof.
Agassiz,
in
"
Proceed.
Amer.
Acad.
Arts
aud
parated
from
America,
but
united
to
each
other.
The
Sciences,"
vol.
iv.
p.
195.
I860.
T)
18
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
it
and
of
the
neighbouring
continent
have
been
now
for
a
considerable
time
minutely
known
;
and
although
all
the
species
in
Britain
are
also
found
on
the
Continent,
there
are
many
species
in
the
latter
which
are
not
found
in
Britain.
The
length
of
time
for
which
authentic
data
have
existed
is
no
doubt
but
a
brief
moment
compared
to
the
lapse
of
ages
which
Mr.
Darwin
requires
for
his
colonization
;
but
the
thousand
facilities
for
introduction
which
are
daily
furnished
by
the
constant
intercourse
between
England
and
the
Continent
may
be
allowed
in
some
respect
to
compensate
for
the
briefness
of
our
chronicle,
and
we
may
fairly
argue
from
what
has
taken
place
during
that
time
as
if
it
represented
a
much
longer
period.
And
what
does
it
show
?
Putting
aside
the
introduction
of
plants
brought
by commerce
or
in
ballast,
and
which
almost
invariably
disappear
in
the
course
of
a
few
years,
how
few
colonists
can
Britain
claim
from
the
Continent
during
the
past
century.
More
than
that,
the
difficulty
which
a colony
(much
more
a
single
colonist)
must
encounter
in
establishing
itself
on
a
foreign
shore
may
be
estimated
from
the
fact
that
any
attempts
which
have
been
made
to
introduce
and
naturalize
species
from
the
other
side
of
the
Channel,
have
always
failed.
The
difficulty
which
we
experience
whenever
we
attempt
to
transport
animals
from
more
distant
lands
into
other
countries,
even
if
we
secure
for
them
as
nearly
as
can
be
the
same
conditions
as
those
in
which
they used
to
live,
is
another
instance of
the
same
kind.
The
same
thing
may
be
observed
everywhere.
Sir
Charles
Lyell
says of
America,
"
Many
European
plants
are
making
their
way
here,
such
as
the
wild
camomile
and
the
thorn
apple
(Datura
Stramonium)
;
and
it
is
a
curious
fact,
which
I
afterwards
learned
from
Dr.
Dale
Owen,
that
when
such
foreigners
are
first
naturalised
they
overrun
the
country
with
amazing
rapidity
and
are
quite
a
nuisance.
But
they
soon
grow
scarce,
and
after
eight
or
ten
years
can
hardly
be
met
with."*
The
overrunning
phase
seems
to
be
the
stage
to
which
New
Zealand
has
arrived
at
the
present
time
;
an
immense
irruption
of
European
weeds
has
been
made
in
these
islands,
and
it
will
doubtless
disappear
there
in
a
few
years,
as
has
been
the
case in
America.
But
much
less
important
obstacles
than
straits
or
passages
of
the
sea
act
as
effectual
barriers
against
distribution.
Rivers
also
sometimes
form
effective
barriers,
although
I
believe
that
in
most
instances
where
they
so act
the
phenomenon
has
been
originally
occasioned
by
a
former
different
arrangement
of
land
and
sea,
and
the
obstacle
then
occasioned
by
a
strait
or
sea
been
kept
up
by
the
river
now
flowing
in
their
course.
This
I
believe
to
be
the
case
with
the
Amazon
and
Orinoko,
which
furnish
many
instances
in
point
;
for
example,
Mr.
Wallace
mentions
that
"
on
the
north
side
of
the
Amazon,
and
east
of
the
Rio
Negro,
are
found
the following
three
species
of
monkeys
:
—
Ateles
paniscus,
Brachyurus
Satanas,
and
Jacchus
bicolor.
These
are
all
found
close
up
to
the
margins
of
the
Rio
Negro
and
Amazon,
but
never
on
the
opposite
banks
of
either
river."
Again,
a
species
of
Pithecia
is
found
on
the
west
side
of
the
Rio
Negro
for
several
hundred
miles
from
its
mouth
up
to
the
River
Curicuriari,
but
never
on
the
east side
;
neither
is it
known
on
the
south
side
of
the
Upper
Amazon,
where
it
is
replaced
by
an
allied
species,
the
P.
irrorata
(P.
hirsuta
Spix.),
which,
though
abundant
there,
is
never
found
on
the
north
bank.
He
mentions,
also,
that
on
the
south
side
of
the
Lower
Amazon,
in
the
neighbourhood
of
Para,
are
found
two
monkeys,
Mycetes
Beelzebub
and
Jacchus
tamarin,
which
do
not
pass
the
river
to
the
north.
Mr.
Bates
bears
similar
testimony.
He
informs
me
that
it
is
the
universal
and
spontaneous
*
Ltell's
"
Second
Visit
to
the
United
States,"
ii.
270,
1850.
DISPERSAL
OF
SPECIES.
19
statement
of
native
hunters,
that
the
river
does
limit
ranges,
and
out
of
many
other
instances
gives
the
case
of
two
remarkable
species
of
monkey,
Brachyurus
c.vlvus
and
B.
rubicundtts,
which
are
found
abundantly
in
Ygapo
Forest,
north
of
the
Upper
Amazons
west
of
Japura,
and
although
there are
hundreds
of
miles
of
the
same
sort
of
forest
on
the
south
bank,
no
instance
is
known
of
either
of
these
monkeys
having
been
seen
there.
Mr.
Darwin
mentions
that
the
Bizcacha
has
never
been
seen
to
the
eastward
of
the
River
Uruguay.
"Yet
in
this
province
there
are
plains
which
appear
admirably
adapted
to
its
habits.
The
Uruguay
has
formed
an
insuperable
obstacle
to
its
migration,
although
the
broad
barrier
of
the
Parana
has
been
passed,
and
the
Bizcacha
is
common
in
Entre
Rios,
the
provinco
between
these
great
rivers."*
Even
birds
are
subject
to
the
same
law,
although
it
cannot
be
expected
that
rivers
should
often
limit their
ranges.
Mr.
Wallace
mentions
several
instances,
some
of
which,
as
the
birds
are
of
a
kind
whose
flight
is
short,
are
not
so
remarkable,
but
others are
not
open
to
that
objection
;
for
example,
—
"
The
fine
blue
Macaw
(Macrocercus
Maximilianus)
inhabits
the
borders
of
the
hilly
country
south
of
the
Amazon,
from
the
sea-coast
probably
up
to
the
Madera.
Below
Santarem
it is
sometimes
found
close
up
to
the
banks
of
the
Amazon,
but
is
said
never
to cross
that
river.
Its
head-quarters
are
the
upper
waters
of
the
Tocantins
Xingu
and
Tapagoz
rivers.
"
Another
instance of a
bird
not
crossing
the
Amazon
is
the
beautiful
Curl-crested
Aracari
(Ptero-
glossus
Beauharnasii),
which
is
found
on
the
south
side
of
the
Upper
Amazon,
opposite
the
Rio
Negro,
and
at
Coari
and
Ega,
but has
never
been
seen
on
the
north
side.
The
green
Jacamar
of
Guiana,
also
(Galbula
viridis),
occurs
all
along
the
north
bank
of
the
Amazon,
but
is
not
found
on
the
south,
where
it
is
replaced
by
the
G.
cyanocollis
and
G.
maculicauda,
both
of
which
occur
in
the
neighbourhood
of
Para."
f
Other
facts
to
the
same
effect
are
mentioned
by
Mr.
Wallace
and
Mr.
Bates
regarding
insects
and
the
lower
animals.
Similar
instances
can be
given
from
the
Niger,
the
Lena,
and
other great
rivers.
But
enough
has
been
said
to
show
that
the
fact
is
not
exceptional.
These
are
cases
showing
that
under
the
most
favourable
and
inviting
circumstances,
colonization,
immigration,
or
occasional
visitation,
has
not
taken
place.
If
it
has
failed
in
these,
with
what
logic
can
we
be
asked
to
admit
its
being
the
rule
under
less
favoured
circumstances
?
In
like
manner
mountains,
deserts,
woods,
and
plains,
all
act as
barriers
of separation or
bridges
of
communication,
according
as
they
are
fitted
or
not
for
the
occupancy
of
the
animal.
On
the
other
hand,
where
the
sea
between
neighbouring
lands
is
bridged
over
in
winter
by
ice,
it
often,
although
not
always,
ceases
to
be
a
barrier.
In
Captain
M'Clintock's
journal,
various
incidental
notices
occur,
showing
that a
general
migration
of
the
polar
animals
over
the
ice
takes
place
on
the
breaking
up
of
winter.J
*
Darwin,
"Journal
of
Researches."
Second
edition,
be
some
land
in
the
north-east
or
east.
May
9th.
—
1845,
p.
124.
Delightful
weather;
tufts
of
moss
and
the tops
of
t
Wallace,
Alfred,
"
Narrative
of
Travels
on
the
Ama-
stones
are
gradually
peeping
up
through
the
snow,
and
zon
and
Rio
Negro."
London,
1853.
animals
begin
to
appear.
I
picked
up
two
catcrpil-
X
The
following
are
examples
of
this.
"April
21st,
lars
to-day.
Fox-tracks
are
very
numerous;
the
ma-
temperature
8°.
Whilst
crossing
a
bay,
and
about
a
jority
of
these
tracks
are
crossing
to
the
north-westward,
mile
off
the
land,
we
passed
four separate
tracks
of
probably
following
the
ptarmigan.
Lemmings
are
abun-
lemmings,
travelling
in
for
the
land.
If
these
little
crea-
dant,
and
these
wonderful
little
creatures,
which
consti-
turcs
are
migrating
across
the
ice,
there
would
seem
to
tutc
the
chief
support
of
foxes,
ravens,
wolves,
owls,
and
20
l'RELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
Still
on
the whole,
I
agree
with
those
who
think
that
the
effect
of
harriers
in
preventing
the
spread
of
species
has
been
undervalued,
and
that
a
much
slighter
obstacle
than
is
generally
supposed
to
be
necessary,
is
sufficient
to
preserve
neighbouring
faunas
from
intermixture.
The
above
are
negative
arguments
against
the
peopling
of
oceanic
islands
by
occasional
visitants.
Tho
reasons
in
favour
of
this
having
been
effected
through
former
continuity
of
land
are
more
po
sitive.
One
of
these
is
the
nature
of
the
affinity
which
can
be
traced
between
the
inhabitants
of
such
islands
and
of
the
main
coast.
It
is
not
a
near
affinity,
but
faint
and
far
off;
and
this
is
just
what
we
should
expect.
If
the
island
were
formerly
united
to
the
mainland,
it
must
have
started
with
the
same
inhabitants
as
it,
and
under
the
influence
of
the
change
which
must
have
occurred
in
the
conditions
or
climate
of
both
or
either
through
isolation,
they
must
have
gradually
diverged
from
each
other
by
the
successive
development
of
new
species.
Their
affinity
is
still
indisputable,
although
it
has
gradually
become
distant,
and
in
the
case
of
the
island
(which
has
had
its
oppor
tunities
of
communication
with
the
outer
world
very
much
restricted)
peculiar
and
endemic,
while
the
mainland,
not
so
restricted,
is
more
expanded
in
its
character.
If,
on
the
other
hand,
the
island
had
derived
its
inhabitants
from
colonization,
they
must
necessarily
be
more
recent
than
the
separa
tion,
and
the
immigration
must
have gone on
continuously
through
all
succeeding
times,
so
that instead
of
our
finding
a
homogeneous
endemic
fauna
and
flora,
we
should
have
contributions
of
all
dates,
and
from
various
countries
;
for
it is
to
be
remembered
that
currents
and
winds
may,
nay
must,
have
sometimes
changed,
in
consequence
of
alterations
on
the
relative
distribution
of
land
and
water,
in
the
course
of
uncounted
ages
;
and
instead
of
having
everything
from
the
nearest
land
we
might
have
a
morsel
from
one
country
and
a
morsel
from
another,
as
we
certainly
should
have
fragments
of
all
ages
down
to
the
most
recent
—
a
state
of
matters
essentially
inconsistent
both
with
the
reality,
and
with
what
is
understood
by
the
term
endemic.
The
richness
of
oceanic
islands
in
endemic
forms,
therefore,
seems
a
strong
argument
in
favour
of
Forbes'
view
and
against
Mr.
Darwin's.
It
seems
to
be
as
necessary
a
result
of
isolation,
as
restricted
and
confined
(what
may
be
called
endemic)
views
used
to
be
of
the
country
life
of
the
untravelled
Thane.
When
Mr.
Darwin
says,
that
had
the
forms
of
life
been
derived
as
supposed
by
Forbes,
they
would
all
"
have
been
more
equally
modified
in
accordance
with
the
paramount
import
ance
of
the
relation
of
organism
to
organism,"
I
am
not
sure
that I
understand
him.
He
cannot
mean
that
some
paramount
influence
modifies
the
development
of
new
species
and
forms
into
certain
relations
with each
other
?
for
that
would
be
nearly
equivalent
to
the
old
theory
of
the
forms
of
life
being
dependent
on
the
physical
conditions
under
which
they
are
produced
—
a
theory
which
is
repugnant
to
the
whole
spirit
of
Mr.
Darwin's
hypothesis
;
and
is
repudiated
by
himself
as
"
a
deeply-seated
error."
It
may
be
so.
Still
I
have
a
strong
suspicion
that
we
are
in
the
infancy
of
our
knowledge
of
physical
conditions,
and
how
they
operate.*
The
whole
length
which
I
have
yet
gone
in
ascribing
effect
to
physical
condition
is
to
attribute
some
influence
to
the
mere
fact
of
exposure
to
a
change
in
condition.
It
stimulates
or
sets
a
even
every
species
of
gull,
are as
active
tourists
as
the
less
than
to
the
abundant
exercise
and
unloaded
mind,
larger
animals,
crossing
these
wide
straits
in
all
directions."
that
ho
owes
the
draughts
of
health
which
he
drinks
in
—
See
Captain
M'ClintocL's
Diary
in
Proc.
Dublin
Nat.
when
striding
over
our
Highland
muirs, or
pacing
along
Hist.
Univ.
Assoc,
in
N.it.
Hist.
Rev.
April,
1856,
p.
40.
our
salt
sea
beaches.
The
"
change
of
air,"
constantly
*
If
the
reader
will
refer
to
his
own
sensations,
I
think
recommended
by
physicians,
is
nothing
but
a
change
of
he
will
admit
that,
although
these conditions
are
very
physical
condition
:
and
shall
we
be
told
that
this
has
no
subtle,
they
are
also
very
powerful.
It
is
to
them,
not
influence
on
the
animal
frame
1
DISPERSAL
OF
SPECIES.
21
■working
the
organic
impulses
which
produce
organic
changes.
It
is,
I
imagine,
analogous
to
the
physiological
phenomena
which
occur
in
our
own
bodies
in
health
and
sickness,
especially
as
seen
in
the
weak
and
aged.
So
long
as
we
go on
in
our
regular
daily
course
of
life,
we
enjoy
our
usual
health.
Some
trifle
occurs
to
disturb
this
regularity.
We
say
we
are
upset
by
it.
We
are
jolted
off
the
rail
;
the doctor
tries
to
get
us
back
into
the
old
track,
but
the
impulse
of
change
has
been
set
a
going,
and
the
system
instead
of
returning
into
its
old
groove
sets
off
in
a
different
direction,
vires
acquirit
eundo,
and
when
he
asks
for
us
to-morrow
we
are
grave
men.
It
may
be
that
particular
conditions
produce
particular
effects,
as
darkness,
absence
of
eyes
;
but
the
subject
is
one
on
which
we
are in
darkness
and
unable
to
see.
No
matter
what
the
nature
of
the
physical
condition
may
be,
if
Dr.
Forschammer
is
correct
in
allotting
distinct
physical
properties
to
six
teen
different
regions
of
the
ocean,
it
is
not
improbable
that
material
differences
may
exist
without
our
being
able
to
detect
them.
Mr.
Darwin
relies
on
other
facts
characteristic
of
oceanic
islands,
more
especially
of
those
which
have
subsided.
These
facts
all
fall
under
the
same
category,
and
involve
the
same
principle.
They
are:
—
The
nature
and
relative
proportion
of
inhabitants
in
oceanic
islands;
the
existence
of
some
families
to
the
exclusion
of others
(bats
to
the
exclusion
of
batrachians
and
terrestrial
mammals,
&c.)
;
the
scarcity
of
kinds
of
animals
generally
;
and
the
preponderance
of
arboreal
over
herbaceous
forms
of
plants.*
Now,
if
we
think
for
a
moment
of
the
course
of events
which
must
necessarily
have
taken
place
on
the
subsidence
of
the
land
of
which
these
islands
formed
part,
there
seems
nothing
in
the
above
facts
to
justify
the
idea of
colonization,
or
inconsistent
with
that
of
former
continuity.
The
reader
will
find
the
probable
course
of
events
following
upon
subsidence
speculated
on
a
little
more
in
detail
in
a
subsequent
chapter
on
the
Distribution of
Man. Here
it
will
be
sufficient
to say,
that
as
the
land
became
submerged,
such
animals
as
existed
would
for
the
most
part
be
drowned
or
starved,
unless
where
they betook
themselves
to
the
highest
peaks,
which
remained
longest
above
the
waves.
If
man
or
carnivorous
animals
were
amongst
them,
their
extinction
would
only
be
the
more
rapid.
If
none
but
herbivorous
animals
took
refuge
there,
the
food
would
be
insufficient
for
numbers,
and
they
would
drop
off
by
inanition.
It
seems
also
very
doubtful
whether
the
peaks
which
we
now
see in
the
centre
of
the
atolls,
were
in
existence
when
the
spot
on which
they
stand
was
first
submerged.
They
are
all
of
volcanic
origin,
and
may
have
arisen
after
the
land
was
drowned.
The
coral
atolls
may
havo
originally
started
from
slight
elevations
on
the
surface
of
a
flat
continent,
and
man
may
have
been
able
to
maintain
his
place
on
these
half-dry
reefs,
which
terrestrial
animals
—
excepting
always
bats
and
birds
—
could
not.
Under
such
circumstances
it is
obvious
that
it
would
be
an
inexplicable
anomaly
were
we
to
find
no
"
scarcity
of
animals
generally."
It
is
equally
obvious
that
all
other
animals
which
could
neither
fly
nor
swim
must
be
absent.
And,
as
is
remarked
by
Mr.
Darwin
himself,
batrachia
must
follow
in
the
same
category,
for
they
cannot
live
or
propagate
in
salt
water.
Therefore
their
fate
would
be
as
much
sealed
as
that of
any
other
class
of
animals.
Mr.
Darwin
claims
the
bats
as
specially
supporting
his
view.
He
says,
"
No
terrestrial
mammal
can
bo
transported
across
a
wide
space
of
sea,
but
bats
can
fly
across."
But
they
at
least
are
the
mammals
most
fitted
for
preserving
their
lives
so
long
as
any
resting-place
at
all
remained.
The
presence
of
land-shells
on
these
islands
is
acknowledged
by
Mr.
Darwin
as
a
special
difficulty
in
his
view
of
the
case,
as
they
can
neither
fly
nor
swim
across
a
part
of
the
ocean,
and
neither
they
nor
their
eggs
can
live
in
salt
*
Darwin,
op.
cit.
p.
427.
22
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
water;
—
according
to
Forbes'
theory
their
presence
offers
no
difficulty
at
all,
so
long
as
any
portion
of
the
land
remained
above
the
water.
The
preponderance
of
arboreal
over
herbaceous
vegetation
again,
is
a
peculiarity
shared
by
other lands
which
are
not
oceanic
—
North
America,
Japan,
Hong
Kong.
But
I
am
ready
to
admit
that
the
dissemination
of
such
plants
may
have
been
to
a
certain
extent
due
to
accidental
or
occasional
dispersion,
in
which,
however,
man
was
probably
the
chief
agent.
I
do
not
so
much
dispute
the
fact
of
occasional
colonization
having
taken
place
(especially
among
plants),
as
I
object
to
the
attempt
to
refer
everything
to
that
cause.
If
I
am
correct
in
holding
that
the
transformation
of
old
species
into
new
is
usually
(if
not
always)
effected
through
the
medium
of
large
numbers
of
individuals,
chance
colonists,
being
of
course
solitary
or
few
in
number,
would
not
undergo
this
change
until
their
numbers
had
suffi
ciently
multiplied.
I
would,
therefore,
infer
wherever
individuals
belonging
to
the
same
identical
species
occur
in
different
lands
(always
excepting
polar
districts
and
those
where
the
physical
condition
is
uniform),
that
their
presence
is
probably
due
to
colonization;
and
where
the
species
are
representative
that
there
is
a
presumption
that
the
land
in
which
they
occur
must
at
some
former
period
have
been
connected
with
that
of
the
typical
species.
23
CHAPTER
III.
GEOGRAPHY
OF
THE
GLOBE
SINCE
THE
SECONDARY
EPOCH
SUBSIDENCE
IN
SOUTHERN
AND
ELEVATION
IN
NORTHERN
HEMISPHERE
CORAL
REEFS
BANDS
OF
ELEVATION
AND
DEPRESSION.
It
will
save
the reader
as
well
as
myself
much
subsequent
digression
if
I
lay
before
him
at
the
outset
a
general
view
of
what
I
conceive
to
have
been
the
past
geography
of
the
globe
during
the
successive
epochs
which
have
elapsed
since
mammals
first
appeared,
or
rather,
were
first
established
—
in
other
words,
since
the
close
of
the
secondary
epoch.
My
theory,
that
change
in
the
forms
of
organic
life
is
the
result
of
alteration
on
the
physical
conditions
of
the
earth,
requires
that
some
important
change
on
the
condition
of
the
globe
should
have
occurred
at
the
close
of
the
secondary
and
commencement
of
the
tertiary
epoch
;
for
at
that
time
there
was
a
great
start
given
to
the
development
of
species,
and
new
forms
and
new
types
came
then
into
being.
What
the
change
consisted
in
we
do
not
know
;
but
it
may
have
been
some
great
change
in
the
relative
proportions
of
land
and
water
:
a
change
from
a
world
almost
covered
with water
to
one
with
less
sea
and
more
dry
land.
The
fact
that
no
remains
of
land-animals
have
been
found
during
the
cretaceous
epoch,
and
very few
of
terrestrial
plants,
while
soon
afterwards
they
become
plentiful,
suggests
the
possibility
of
this
having
been
the
nature
of
the
change.
Whatever
it
was,
however,
the
fact
seems
certain
that
a
great
change
did
then
occur,
and,
inter
alia,
that
terrestrial
life
for
the
first
time
assumed an
important
place
among
created
beings.
The
first
stage
was
the
eocene
epoch.
Remains
of
this
period
occur
in
Europe,
Asia,
and
America
;
also
in
North
Africa
;
but
none
have
been
found
in
Africa
south
of
the
Sahara,
nor
in
Australia.
Of
Australia,
Mr.
Jukes
says,
"
Above
the
palaeozoic
series
there
is
an
absolute
gap,
a
total
deficiency
of
all
other
stratified
rocks
whatsoever,
so
far
as
is
at
present
known,
except
those
be
longing
to
a
tertiary
formation
which,
from
the
very
recent aspect of
its
fossils
and
their
resem
blance
to
existing
forms
I
believe
to
be
a
very
modern
one."*
Some
of
the
views
entertained
at
the
time
Mr.
Jukes
wrote
have
since
been
modified,
but
it
remains
uncontroverted
that
a
portion
of
Australia
was
above
the
sea
in
the
secondary
and
eocene
epochs,
and
has
continued
always
above
it
until
now.
As
the
characters
of
the
early
eocene
flora
and
fauna
of
Europe
bear
great
resemblance
to
those
still
existing
in
Australia,
geologists
have
concluded
that
these
two
countries
were
formerly
in
some
way
united,
and
that
a continuous
stretch
of
dry
land
existed
between
them.
It
has
been
supposed
that
never
having
since
been
wholly
submerged,
Australia
hud
preserved
the
general
type
of
this
eocene
life
down
to
the
present
day
;
and
although
Professor
M'Coy
has
latterly
taken
exception
to
the
correctness
of
this
in
its
full
extent,
the
comparative
lists
of plants
found
in
the
eocene
deposits
of
Europe
contrasted
with
those
now
living
in Australia,
given
by
*
Jukes,
"Sketch
of
the
Physical
Structure
of
Australia,"
London,
1850,
p.
89.
24
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
Professor
Unger
in his
"
New
Holland
in
Europe,"*
puts
it
wholly
beyond
dispute.
He
has
there
enumerated
173
plants
discovered
in
the
eocene
beds
of
Europe
analogous
to
species
now
living
in
New
Holland
or in
the
southern
hemisphere.
In
his
interesting
paper
on
this
subject,
Professor
Unger
also
points
out
that
the
representatives
of
a
certain
proportion
of
the
eocene
plants
are
now
found
in
China
and
other
parts
of
Asia,
and
the
analogues
of
a
third
portion
in
North
America.
He
might
have
added
that
another
proportion
occurs
in
the
Indo-
Malayan
region,
for
Mr.
Bowerbank
has
described
no
fewer
than
thirteen
fruits
of
palms
from
the
eocene
beds
in
the
Island
of
Sheppy,
all
of
the
recent
type,
now
found
only
in
India,
and
in
the
Moluccas
and
Philippine
Islands.
The
conclusion
to
which
Professor
Unger
arrives
from
these
premises
is
that
Europe
was
not
a
centre
of
creation,
but
that
it
received
the
impress
of
the
peculiarities
of three
continents
;
and
he
supposes
that
it
did
so
by
means
of
a
land
communication
existing
between
Australia
and
Europe,
through
Asia,
by
way
of
the
Moluccas,
and
by
one
from
America
across
the
Atlantic.
Of
course,
it
is
part
of
his
hypothesis
that
at
that
time
the
climate
of
all
these
countries
was
the
same.
Professor
Unger's
explanation
is
open
to
the
objection
that
he
assumes,
without
the
smallest
warrant,
that
the
floras
of
Australia,
of
Asia,
and
of
America,
were
each
of
the
same
character
in
the
eocene
epoch
as
they
are
now.
Europe
is
the
only
country
with
whose
flora
in
the
eocene
epoch
we
are
at
all
acquainted.
With
that of
Australia
we
shall
probably
never
be
acquainted,
because
it
apparently
has
no
eocene
formations.
The
eocene
fossils
hitherto
found
in
America
are
extensive,
but
entirely
marine,
and
consequently
our
knowledge
of
the
fossil
flora
of that
epoch
there,
is
nil,
and
we
know
as
little
of
the
eocene
flora
of
Asia.
The
character,
therefore,
of
the
existing
vegetation
in
the
only
country
(Europe)
with
whose
flora
during
the
eocene
epoch
we
are
acquainted,
is
different
from
that
which
then
grew
in
it,
and
therefore,
so
far
as
we
can
draw
any
conclusions
from
that
solitary
fact,
they
should
certainly
not
be
that
the
eocene
flora
of
all
the
other
countries
was
the
same
as
their
existing
flora.
There
arc
grounds
for
making
an
exception
in
favour
of
Australia
whose
present
flora
is
so
largely
analogous
to
the
European
eocene
flora.
The
very
extent
of
the
analogy
is
in
itself
an argu
ment
for
doing
so,
but
there
are
no
grounds
for
supposing
this
either
for
America
or Asia,
of
whose
elements
only
a
small
proportion
appears
in
the
eocene
flora
of
Europe.
The
more
generally
adopted
view
accords
better
with
facts,
viz.
that
(whether
as
a
consequence
of
the
more
uniform
heat
which
then
extended
over
the
whole
globe
or
not)
organic
life
during
the
secondary
and
eocene
epoch
was
more
homogeneous
than
it
became
afterwards,
or
is
now.
The
elements
out
of
which
the
American,
Asiatic,
Indo-Malayan,
and
Australian
floras
have
sprung,
were
doubtless
intermingled
then
not
only
in
Europe,
but
in
America,
in
Asia,
in
the
Tropics,
and
Australia
;
but
since
then,
through
the
changes
arising
from
altered
conditions
of
life,
the
uniformity
has
been
broken
up,
and
the
present
distribution
of
species
established.
There
can
be
no
doubt
that
land
communication
between
Australia
must
then
have
existed,
and
the
route
suggested
by
Professor
Unger
seems
as likely as
any
other.
At
the
same
time,
it
must
be
remembered
that
the
present
arrangement
of
the
flora
or
fauna
of
any
part of
the
northern
hemisphere
is
not
the
slightest
criterion
of
what
it
was
in
the
eocene
epoch,
because
the
whole
of
the
old
relations
of
species
there
must
have
been
completely
overturned
by
the
clearance
of
life
which
the
glacial
epoch
brought
about.
*
Unger,
Dr.
F.
"
Ncu
Holland
in
Europa,"
and
Translation
in
Seeman's
"
Journal
of
Botany," Feb.
1865,
p.
39.
SUBMERGENCES.
25
The
progress
of
life
during
the eocene
epoch seems
to
have
experienced
no
sudden
or
material
change.
Mammalian
life
went
on
gradually
from
the
Marsupials
to
the
Palaeotheroid animals,
and
onwards
to
the
ruminants
;
and
the
flora
passed
from
the
Australian
to
the
miocene,
or
North
American
type.
These
changes
were
apparently
brought
about
by
gradual
mutation
in
the
arrange
ment
and
distribution
of
land
and
water,
possibly
a
gradual
reduction
in
the
temperature
of
the
globe
;
but
no
violent
or
abrupt
alteration
of
any
kind
seems
to
have
occurred.
So
far
as
we
can
trace
these
new
modifications
in
the
distribution
of
land
and
water,
the
main
feature
seems
to
have
been
a transference of
dry
land
from
the
Southern
to
the
Northern
Hemisphere
:
that
is,
the
submergence
of
land
in
the
one,
and
its
emergence
in
the
other.
Great
alternations
have
taken
place,
and
are
constantly
taking
place
in
tbis
respect,
everywhere.
What
is
now
above water
was
formerly
below
it,
and
vice
verad,
and
in
each
hemisphere
there are portions
intermixed
with
each
other,
the
one
of
which
is
rising
and
the
other
sinking.
And
we
can
see
that
both
operations
are
carried
on
at
the
same
time,
and
that
the
one
is
usually
in
compensation
of
the
other
;
although
both
are
intermingled,
sometimes
a
general
sinking
with
partial
risings.
The
most
important
of
such
submergences
seems
to
have
been
the
subsidence
of
the
vast
space
in
the
South
Pacific
Ocean,
now
beaconed
by
the
Oceanic
Coral
Islets
which
are
scattered
through
it,
both
east
and
west
of
the
Indian
Archipelago
and
Australia.
It
is
now
universally
admitted
that
these
coral
islets
are
the
relics
of a
submerged
land
which
had
formerly
existed
as
a
great
continent
;
and
the
relations
of
the
faunas
and
floras
of
South
America
to
New
Zealand
and
Australia
on
the
one
hand,
and
to
Africa
on
the
other, as
well
as
some
relations
between
South-
West
Australia
and
South
Africa,
almost
compel
us
to
admit
that
as
complete
a
circlet
of
land
formerly
crowned
the
southern
temperate
regions
as
now
does
the
northern.
The
fact
that
these
Oceanic
Islets
are
vestiges
of
a
great
continent
was
first
proved
by
Mr.
Darwin.
He
showed
that
fringing
reefs,
—
that
is,
reefs
growing
close
to
the
land,
—
are
an
evidence
that
the
land
is
either
stationary or
slowly
rising,
at
least
that
the
reefs
have
been
formed
when
the
land
has
been
rising;
that
atolls
and
barrier
reefs,
that
is,
reefs
not
clinging
to
the
shore,
but
separated
from
the
land
by
a
space
of
water,
show
that
the
land
has
been
subsiding,
or that
a
subsidence
was
taking
place
whilst
they
were
formed
;
and
from
this
mute
evidence
he
was
enabled
to
compile
the
map
of
elevation
and
subsidence
by
which
I
have
pro
fited.
To
give
the
evidence
in
support
of
this,
would
be
to
repeat
Mr.
Darwin's
beautiful
train
of
reasoning
on
the
subject
in
his
"
Journal
of
a
Naturalist."
The
scientific
reader
is
already
familiar
with
it,
and
it
would
be
injudicious
kindness
to
attempt
to
save
those
who
are
not
the
plea
sure
of
reading
one
of
the
most
delightful
works
in
the
English
language.
His
argument
is
chiefly,
if
not
entirely,
drawn
from
the
coral
reefs
in
these
seas,
and
from
the
fact
that
while
they
are
composed
of
coral,
standing
on
foundations
of
great,
generally,
unfathomable
depth,
they
are
yet
constructed
by
animals
requiring
a
foundation
to
start
from
and
that
foundation not
to
be
at
a
greater
depth
than
twenty
or
thirty
fathoms.
The
same
fact
carries
the period
of
submergence
back
into
the
abyss
of
time,
when
the
elevations
in
the
other
hemisphere
took
place,
for
it
proves
the
slow
rate
and
consequent
long
duration
of
the
period
during
which
the
subsidence
has
been
taking
place.
Unless
the
depression
had
been
gradual,
the
coral
architects
would
not
have
had
time
to
build
up
their
towers
and
buttresses
as
the
land
sank.
No
personal
inspection
is
in
our
power
here,
but
if
we
give
the
reins
to
our
imagination
and
try
to
guess
at
the
scene
which
would
meet
our
eyes
were
a
sudden
uprising
equal
to
the
previous
depression
to
take
place
we
might
find
something
like
this
to
be
the
result.
Such
an
26
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
event
would
bring
all
the
foundations
of
these
reefs
to
the
surface,
each
bearing
its
narrow,
lofty,
perpendicular-cliffed
coral
tower,
circled
with
precipices
such
as
it
has
not
entered
into
the
mind
of
man
to
conceive,
whose
height
is
not
to
be
reckoned
by
feet,
but
by
miles
;
where
the
light
of
day
would
scarcely
penetrate
to
the
bottom
of
the
deep
channels
between
those
which
stood
near
each
other
;
and
with
the top
of
each,
all
on
one
level,
like
mighty
shot-towers
or
bastilles.
Each
has
no
doubt
been
formed
as
the
elevations
on which
they
stand
successively
sank
beneath
the
sea.
Some,
no
doubt,
may
be
founded
on
ordinary
hills
or
even
lofty
mountains,
when
we
should
have,
on
a
colossal
scale,
a
curious
resemblance
to
the
round
pillars
or
towers
on
hill-tops,
with
which
it
is
the
fashion of
Englishmen
in
their
different
counties
to
preserve
the
memory
of
their
great
men.
Some
indeed
have
thought,
that
the
atolls
and
reefs
might
be
the
indications
of
the
highest
peaks
of
ranges
of
mountains.
But
this
idea
seems
inconsistent
with
their
position
as
well
as
their
composition.
Their
general
distribution
indicates
rather
the
beaconing
of
each
elevation,
small
or
great,
as
it
successively
sunk
beneath
the
level
of
the
ocean.
Mr.
Darwin
objects
to
the
idea
on
the
ground
that
oceanic
islands,
where
rock
is
found,
are
almost
universally
composed
of
volcanic
minerals.
If
they
had
originally
existed
as
mountain
ranges
on
the
land,
some
at
least
of
the
islands
would
have
been
formed
like
other
mountain
summits
of
granite,
metamorphic
schists,
old
fossiliferous,
or
other
such
rocks,
instead
of
consisting
of
mere
piles
of
volcanic
matter.*
The
irregular
distribution
of
many
of
the
atolls
and
reefs,
moreover,
is
opposed
to
the
idea
of
their
being
parts
of
mountain
ranges,
and
the
long
lines
of others
may
be
better
reconciled
with
barrier
reefs
along
the
lines
of
coast
than
chains
of
mountains,
when
the
subsidence
began.
Every
little
eminence
a
few
feet
high
would
furnish
as
good
a
foundation
and
starting-point
for
the
coral
architects
as
the
serrated
peaks
of
the
loftiest
mountains.
The
facts
proved
by
Mr.
Darwin,
however,
all
relate to
the
past.
It
is
quite
consistent
with
them
that
the
subsidence
which
they
prove
may
now
have
ceased,
and
that
as
contended
for
by
M.
de
Eoohas,
an
elcvatory
movement
may
have
commenced.
We
know
that there
has
been an
eleva-
tory
movement
subsequent
to
the
depression,
both
on
the
shores
of
Africa
and
in
India,
and
the
Indian
Archipelago.
M.
de
Rochas
maintains
that
no
coral
island
can
have been
raised
above
the
water
by
the
agency
to
which
their
rise
is
usually
ascribed,
viz.
by
a
deposit
from
the
waves
dash
ing
over
the
reef,
and
that
the
only
means
by
which
they
can
have
appeared
is
by
an
upheaval,
pushing
them
up
from
below.
He
has
inspected
coral
islands
in
various
parts
of
the
globe,
and
finds
the
surface
free
from
the
attrition
and
fractures
which
ought
to
result
from
the
throwing
over
them
of
pebbles
and
sand
by
the
waves
;
and
he
also
finds
the
coral
in
many
places
where
no
upheaval
has
raised
it
above
the
surface,
remaining
in
precisely
the
same
position
in
which
it
was
observed
long
ago,
with
no
accumulation
of
debris
at
its
surface.
It
does not
concern
us
much
to
determine
which
is
the
true
explanation.
The
fact
of
subsidences
and
elevations
having
taken
place
at
certain
places
and
in
a
certain
order,
is
what
we
chiefly
require
to
make
sure
of.
We
have
no
data
to
determine
with
anything
like
accuracy
to
what
extent
these
subsidences
have
taken
place.
We
cannot
even
tell
in
some
which
are
believed
to
be
rising,
whether
they
have
only
just
begun
to
do
so,
or
if
they
have
for
a
long
time
changed
from
subsidence
to
elevation.
It
would
seem
as
if
nothing
could
be
easier
than
to
do
this,
because
the
raised
cliffs
of
coral
along
the
sea-shore
should
speak
for
themselves.
But
Mr.
Darwin
has
shown,
that
in
the natural
course
of
things
it
is
not
probable
that
coral
reefs
elevated
by
a
gradual
rise
of
the
laud
would
often
be
*
Darwin-s
;1
Origin
of
Species,"
3rd
edit.,
p.
388.
GEOLOGICAL
MUTATIONS. 27
preserved
so
as
to
prove
that
they
ever
existed.
It
is
only
so
long
as
the
coral
is
fresh
that
it
is
hard
and
impenetrable
;
when
raised
above
or
below
the
proper
depth
which
suits
the
par-
ticular
species,
the
coral
polype
dies,
and
if
exposed
to
the
air
the
coral
rots,
and
if
then
exposed
to
the
wash
of
the
sea
is
swept
away.
He
himself
narrates
his
experience
of the
rotting
of
the
coral,
but
on
the
other
hand
he
also
speaks
of
having
heard
of
two
coral
islands
which
had
been
elevated
thirty or
forty
feet
above
the
sea
and showed
a
face
of
perpendicular
coral
cliffs
to
the
sea
:
these,
however,
had
not
been
examined
by
any
naturalist.*
If I
am
not
mistaken,
objections
have
been
taken
by
some
authors
to
the
hypothesis
of
a
sub
merged
continent,
on
the
ground
that
it
might
disturb
the
equilibrium
of
tho
earth.
There
is
no
doubt
that
on
this
point
the
arrangements,
instead
of
being
of
a
compensatory
nature,
are
directly
the
reverse.
A
mass
of
material
like
the
mountain-ranges
protruded
to
one
side
further
from
the
fulcrum
(the
centre
of
the
earth)
than
the
rest
of
its
crust,
must
have
a
tendency
to
make
the
earth
lop-sided,
and
a
depression
on
the opposite
side
di
awing
the
weight
nearer
to
the
fulcrum,
and
thereby
diminishing
its
force,
instead
of
being
a
compensatory
movement,
would
only
add
to
the
disturbance.
It
is
for
astronomers
and
physicists
to
determine
whether
there
is
anything
in
the
objection.
I
may,
however,
remark,
that
the
parts
where
there
is
the
greatest
subsidence
may
not
be
opposed
to
those
where
there
is
the
greatest
rise
:
that
subsidence
and
elevation
often
take
place
side
by
side,
and
that
the
whole
alteration
on
the
equilibrium
even
at
the
greatest,
is
probably
too
trifling
to
have
any
effect
on
such
a large
body
as
the
earth.
As
to
the
date
when
this
continent
or
these
continents
existed,
and
when
they
became
submerged,
we
have
more
than
one
indication
which
may
assist
us
in
coming
to
a
conclusion.
In
the
first
place,
it is
a
generally
acknowledged
principle
that
important
geological
revolutions
are
slow
and
deliberate,
and
extend
over
a
long
period
of
time
;
that
the
crust
of
the
earth
is
not
perpetually
bobbing
up
and
down
;
and
that
the
oscillations
which
occur
in
every
part
of
the
globe
are
mere
minor
accidents,
as
it
were
incidental
to
the
progress of
the
great
movement,
and
not
the
great
movement
itself.
They
may
be
compared
to
the
slightly
tremulous
movement
of a
man's
hand
when
he
heaves
his
food
to
head
:
the
real
movement
is
the
raising
of
his
hand
;
its
vibration
is
the
incidental.
One
phase
of
these
geological
mutations
is
the
alternation
of
bands
of
elevation
and
depression.
It
was,
I
think,
Mr.
Darwin
who
suggested
this
idea,
and
at
any
rate
it
was was
his
discoveries
relating
to
the
physical
and
geological
history
of
coral
reefs,
which
brought
it
into
favour.
It
is
matter
of
fact
that
the
elevation
and
corresponding
depression
in
the
two
bands
generally
lie
along
side
of
each
other.
The
Andes
of
South
America
is
a
band
of
elevation;
to
the
west
of
that
range
there
is
a
depression
of
immense
depth,
almost
without
islands
or
reefs
;
westward
of
that
gulf
there
is
a
vast
area
of
coral
atolls
and
reefs,
which,
as
a
whole,
have
been,
and
perhaps
still
are,
sinking,
while
through
it
extends
a
band
of
rising
land,
distinguished
by
numerous
volcanoes.
The
North
Atlantic
is
a
band
of
depression,
Europe
a
recent
band
of
elevation.
'Where
active
vol
canoes
are
in operation,
the
land
is
usually
rising
;
and
these
generally
lie
in
bands
which
often
end
in
reaching
to
the
dignity
of
mountain
chains.
Such
is
the
band
which
extends
from
the
New
Hebrides
through
New
Guinea,
Borneo,
Java
and
Sumatra.
It
seems a
necessary
con
sequence
of
the
elevation
of
dry
land
in
the
northern
hemisphere,
that
a
corresponding
de
pression
should
have
taken
place
somewhere
else.
The
elevation
of,
at
least,
all
the
land
which
*
Darwin's
"
Coral
Formations."
28
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
is
marked
as
tertiary
in
Map
3,
and
as
seems
more
than
probable
of
a
great
continent
in
the
Atlantic,
must
have
left
a
vacuity
in
the
interior
of
the
earth,
and
withdrawn
a
support
from
the
crust
which
stretched
over
it.
That
crust
is
both
solid
and
clastic,
but
we
know,
from
what
takes
place
on
the
withdrawal
of
props
in
coal-mines,
that
the
strata
forming
it
arc
unable
to
support
themselves
by
cohesion
;
and
it
stands
to
reason,
that
the
crust
of
the
earth,
although
so
much
thicker
than
any
strata
existing
above
the
beds
of
coal,
being
of
correspondingly
greater
extent,
will
be
as
little
able
to
do
so.
The
greater
thickness
will
be
compensated
by
the
greater
extent
without
support.
The
supposed
subsidence
in
the
Pacific
Ocean
extends
over
thousands
of
miles,
and
an
unsupported
roof
that
would
cohere
for
such
an
extent,
must
be
made
of
other
materials
than
those
of
any
minerals
or
rocks
yet
known.
The
elevation
of
the
land
in
the
northern
hemisphere
must,
therefore,
have
entailed
a
corresponding
amount
of
subsidence
elsewhere,
and
as
there
is
no
"
elsewhere
"
under
water
of
corresponding
dimensions
but
the
Southern
hemisphere,
it
must
have
been
in
the
Southern
Seas
that
the
subsidence
took
place.
The
elevation
and
subsidence
being
compensatory
must
have
also
been
nearly
simultaneous,
not
quite,
indeed,
for
the
elevation
being
the
cause
of
the
depression
must
have been
first
in
order
of
time.
The
elevation
we
know
has
been
subsequent
to
the
commencement
of
the
tertiary period.
The
depression
therefore
must
have
been
a
little
nearer
to
our
own
time.
The
sinking
of
the
bottom
of
the
Southern
Ocean
has
probably
been
in
operation
long
before
the
present
rising
of
the
Javan
band
of
volcanoes,
and
the
latter
belongs
to
a
different
chapter
in
its
history,
and
is,
perhaps,
more
of
the
nature
of
an
episode
than
an
integral
part of
one
operation.
The
former
may
be
a
chapter
nearly
past,
the
latter
the
commencement
of
a
new
one.
Applying
this
view
to
the
occurrences
since
the
eocene
epoch,
we
have
at
least
one
great
result,
the
subsidence
of
the
Southern
hemisphere,
and
the
elevation
of
the
Northern
:
perhaps
accomplished
by
alternate elevation
and
depression
of
portions of
each.
If
the
depression
in
the
south
was,
as I
suppose,
general
over
a
considerable
part
of that
hemisphere
at
one
time,
we
may
fix
the
date
of
the
subsidence
of
a
large
part of
it.
The
geology
of
South
Africa
and
the
zoology
of
Madagascar
enable
us
to
do
this.
Africa,
south
of
the
Sahara,
has
probably
remained
stationary
since
the
secondary
epoch,
at
least
has
not
been submerged.
"Judging
from
all
the
evidences
as
yet
collected,"
says
Sir
Roderick
Murchison,*
"
the
interior
of
South
Africa
has
remained
in
that
condition
"
(ter
restrial
and
lacustrine
only)
"since
the
period of
the
secondary
rocks
of
geologists."
A
nar
row
belt
of
tertiary
formations
along
the
eastern
coast,
from
the
Cape
to
the
Zambesi,
and
along
the
south-west
coast
near
Cape
Negro,
alone
attests
a
trifling
rise
and
extension
of
surface
;
Sir
Roderick
adds,
"In
truth,
therefore,
the
inner
portion
of
Southern
Africa
is
in
this
respect
geologically
unique
in
the
long
conservation
of
ancient
terrestrial
conditions.
This
inference
is
further
supported
by
the
concomitant
absence
throughout
the
larger
portion
of
all
this
vast
area,
»-.
e.
south
of
the
equator,
of
any
of
those
volcanic
rocks
which
are
so
often
associated
with
oscillations
of
the
terra
firma."
To
this
continent
Madagascar
was
at
one
time
united,
when
it
received
the
original
elements
of
its
fauna
and
flora.
These
are
of
a type
subsequent
to
the
eocene
date,
and
akin
to
modern
species.
Before
the
separation,
therefore,
the
mioccne
epoch
must
have
commenced.
How
was
the
separation
caused?
Most
probably
not
by
the
sinking
of the
channel
between
them,
but
by
the
general
*
See
his
opening
address
to
the
Geographical
Society
in
1864.
i7o ieo
tso 140
130
no
no
ioo
90
0
SO
40 30
zo
10
-
10
ZO
30
40
SO
60
70
SO
HO
100
IJO
120
ISO
140
ISO
W
/70
iR
H
0
E
60
W
.VI
40 SO
tif
70
SO 30
tOO
110 110
OO
140
ISO
100
HO
Pn-S-.foo
'ImiTKdiJia
GEOLOGICAL
MUTATIONS.
29
sinking
of
all
around.
The
fringe
of
tertiary
beds
on
the
opposite
coast
of
Africa
must
have been
deposited
subsequently
to
the
submergence,
and,
therefore,
the
coast
of
South
Africa
(and
as
the
fringe
extends
on
both
east
and
west
shores,
the
whole
of
South
Africa,
and
Madagascar
with
it)
must
have
suffered,
first,
a
depression
sufficient
to
allow
of
these
tertiary
beds
being
deposited,
and
then
a
subsequent
elevation
so as
to
bring
these
beds
to
view.
These
tertiaries
are
referred
to
the
upper
miocene
epoch
;
the
subsidence,
therefore,
must
have
taken
place
not
later
than
the
middle
of
that
epoch.
The
extent
of
land
then
submerged,
we
cannot
specify
;
but
we
may
safely
infer
that
a
great
con
tinent
stretched
across
between
Africa
and
India.
The
numerous
shoals
in
the
Indian
Ocean
is
one
indication
of
this,
but
a
much
more
important
one
is
the
fact
of
the
fauna
of
India
and
Africa,
belonging,
with few
exceptions,
to
the
same
families,
and
these
families
which
are
peculiar
to
those
two
districts.
So
far
as
regards
Mammals,
abundant
illustrations
in
support
of
this
will
be
found throughout
the following
pages,
passim.
This
Africano-Indian
continent
was
bounded
on
the
north
by
the
Saharan
Sea,
and
by
the
sea
which
appears
from
the
nummulitic
eocene
beds
in
Arabia,
Persia,
Beloochistan,
and
more
modern
tertiaries
in
the
north
of
India,
to
have
then
covered
these
countries.
On
still
stronger
grounds
the
existence
of
a
large
tract
of
land,
where
the
North
Atlantic
now
rolls,
has
been
inferred.
This
is
what
is
known
as
the
Miocene
Atlantis.
:;0
CHAPTER
IV.
PAST
GEOGRAPHY
OF
THE
GLOBE
continued
—
MIOCENE
ATLANTIS
—
GLACIAL
EPOCH.
Under
the
influence
of the
mutations
in
the
geography
of
the
globe
which
continued
slowly
to
ho
carried
on
during
the
eocene
and
miocene
epochs,
the
faunas
and
floras
which
had
been
nearly
uniform
over
the
whole
globe,
now
began
to
break
up
into
regional
provinces.
The
old
flora
in
which
the
Australian
forms
predominated
was
extirpated
in
the
northern
hemisphere,
and
henceforward
confined
to
Australia,
from
which,
in
like
manner,
were
eliminated
the
elements
which
were
not
suited
to
the
climate
required
for
the
other
types,
descended
from
those
of
the
eocene
period.
Each
country
retained
(more
or
less
altered
according
to
the
extent
and
nature
of
the
change
of
condition)
the
portion
of
the
original
eocene
flora
which
suited
it
best,
and
from
that
starting-
point
the
different
provinces
of
organic
life
have
all
gradually
assumed
their
present
places.
At
the
commencement,
however,
the
provinces
were
different
from
what
they
afterwards
became.
It
has
been
well ascertained
that,
in
the
miocene
epoch,
both
the
flora
and
fauna
of
North
America
(although
the
latter
in
a
less
degree)
were
closely
allied to
those
of
Europe
at
the
same
time
;
and
that,
while
the
miocene
flora
of
Europe
has
undergone
an
entire
change,
that
of
North
America
has
not,
but
retains
to
a
certain
extent the
character
of that
which
flourished
there
in
the
miocene
age.
Our
information
upon
these
points
in
that
age
is
fuller
than
upon
them
in
the
eocene.
The
upper
miocene
fossiliferous
beds
at
(Eningen,
in
the
valley
of
the
Rhine,
between
Constance
and
Schaffhauscn,
have
supplied
a
mass
of
material
which
has
enabled
Professor
Heer
of
Zurich
to
construct
a
miocene
flora
of
Switzerland,*
containing
no
less
than
900
plants
(which
Professor
Oliver
would
reduce
to
800f),
while
his
researches
have
led
him
to
the
conclusion
that of
phaeno-
gamous
plants
alone
there
must
have
been
3000
miocene
species,
a
much
richer
and
more
varied
flora
than
Switzerland
now
possesses
;
and
the
remarkable
fact
is,
that a large
number
of
these
be
long
to
North
American
genera.
M.
Gaston
de
Saporta,
in
a
more
recent
paper
on
the
plants
found
in
the
tertiary
strata
of
the
South
of
France,*
has
added
considerably
to
the
number;
and
the
united
result
has
been
to
establish
beyond
question
that a
very
striking
resemblance,
and
in
some
cases
even
identity,
exists
between
the
flora
of
the
miocene
epoch
in
Europe and
the
present
vege
tation
of California
and
the
Southern
States
of
North
America.
The
miocene
beds
of
Vancouver's
Island
and
North-west
America
fortunately
supply
similarly
ample
material,
which
has
been
investigated
by M.
Lesquereux,
and
he
has
satisfactorily
established
that
the
miocene
flora
of
that
district
is
extremely
similar
to
that
still
in
existence
there,
some
of
the
species,
such
as
* "
Flora
Tertiaria
Helvctiae,"
by
Prof.
Oswald
Heeh.
J
G.
De
Sapokta,
in
"
Annaks
des
Sciences
Natur.''
Wintcrtnur,
1805-59.
.
1862.
t
Oliver
in
"Nat.
Hist.
Rev."
1802,
p.
149.
MIOCENE
ATLANTIS.
31
the
Sequoia
sempervirens
having
apparently
continued
in
existence
from
the
mioccnc
times
until
now.
The
relative
preponderance
of
type
in
the
European
miocene
flora
at
that
epoch
was,
first,
that of
North
America,
especially
the
southern
part
of
the
United
States,
as
Louisiana,
Florida,
Georgia,
and
the
Carolinas
;
second,
of
Europe,
particularly
the
Mediterranean
district
;
third,
of
Asia
;
fourth,
of
Africa
;
and
fifth,
of
Australia.
The
Australian
types
had
been
diminishing
in
numbers
as
we
ascend
from
the
oolite
and
the
lower
eocene
to
the
upper
miocene.
The
American
element
is
especially
remarkable
in
the
number
of
evergreen
oaks,
maples,
planes,
poplars,
liquid-
amber,
Robinias,
Sequoias,
and
Taedas,
that
is,
pines
with
leaves in
clusters
of
three.
The
con
clusions
drawn
from
insects,
of
which
no
less
than
1322
fossil
tertiary
species,
or
supposed
species,
have
been found
in
Switzerland,
correspond
in
the
main
with
the
conclusions
derived
from
plants.
These
facts
suggested
to
Unger
and
Goppert
the
speculation
which
is
known
as
the
"
Atlantis
theory,"
or
the
"
Miocene
Atlantis,"
viz.
that
the
present
basin
of
the
Atlantic
was
occupied
by
land,
over
which
the
miocene
plants
could
pass
freely,
and
this
hypothesis
has
been
enlarged
and
advocated
with
great
ability
by
Heer
and
other
eminent
men.
To
use
the
words
of
Sir
Charles
Lyell
:
"
The
existence
of
a
continuous
land
communication
between
Eastern
America
and
Western
Europe
in
the
pliocene
period,
by
means
of
which
many
plants
migrated
before
the
glacial
epoch,
from
one
region
to
the
other,
was
also
suggested
by
Mr.
Darwin,
in
his
Origin
of
Species;
and
Dr.
Leidy
has
observed
that
a
like
continuity
of
land
from
east
to
west
is
implied
by
the
identity
of
some
of
the
extinct
pliocene
mammalia
of
the
Niobrara
Valley
in
Nebraska
with
those of
a
corresponding
geological
age
in
Europe."
The
fact
that
it
is
the
Eastern
or
Atlantic
side
of
America,
or that
which
is
nearest
to
Europe,
which
presents
the
greatest
number
of
vegetable
forms
analogous
to
the
miocene
flora,
would
be
an
additional
argument
in
favour
of
the
Atlantis,
if
the
present
distribution
of
species
and
their
relative
proportion
in
America
gave
any
clue
to
those
in
the
miocene
age,
but
if,
as
I
imagine,
they
do
not,
the
hypothesis
must
stand
upon
more
general
grounds.
On
the
other
hand,
Dr.
Asa
Gray,
Professor
Oliver,
and
others,
following
up
a
hint
thrown
out
by
Bentham,
have
argued
that
it
is
more
probable
that
the
plants,
instead
of
reaching
Europe
by
the
shortest
route
over
an
imaginary
Atlantis,
migrated
in
an
opposite
direction,
and
took
a
course
four
times
as
long
across
America
and
the
whole
of
Asia.
It
rather
appears
to
me,
however,
that
their
hypothesis
does
not
apply
so
much
to
the
miocene
epoch
as
to
a
subsequent
period.
When
the
glacial
epoch
was
at
its
height,
ice
covered
the
whole
of
North
America,
as
far
south
as
the
north
of
Georgia
and
Texas
(see
Map
4)
(that,
as
is
proved
by
the
tertiary
deposits
to
the
south
of
them,
being
the
then
southern
termination
of
the
North
American
continent),
and
the
ice
there
ran
into
the
sea
in
mighty
glaciers.
In
its
progress
south
it
must,
of
course,
have
driven
every
plant
or
animal
before
it,
making
a clean
sweep
of
all
life
wherever
it
came
;
and
wherever
it
rested,
covering
the
land
as
it
did, for
thousands
and
thou
sands
of
years
(whether
intermittently
or
not),
it
must
have
left
the
surface
a
tabula
rasa
for
the
reception of
new
impressions.
Where
there
was
an
extension
of
land
before
it,
as
in
the
south-west
corner
of
North
America,
the plants
and
animals
would
take
refuge
in
it.
Where
there
was
no
extension
of
land,
and
the
glacier
ice
terminated
in
the
sea,
of
course
every
living
thing
would
be
annihilated.
In
Europe,
on
the
other
hand,
although
the
drift
or
glacial
ice
did
not
reach
so
far
south
as
32
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
in
America,
nor,
perhaps,
the
general
mass
of
glaciers
run
into
the
Mediterranean
Sea,
we
shall
find,
if
we
inquire
a
little,
that
it
was
in
a
still
worse
case
than
North
America.
The
latter
had
an
outlet
;
but
we
shall
presently
see
that
Europe
had
none.
Let
the reader
figure
on
a
map
the extent
of
the
land
in
Europe
covered
by
the
glacial
ice
(shown
in
Map
4).
Then
let
him
lay
down
its
tertiary
and
quaternary
beds
(shown
in
Map
3).
They,
of
course,
represent
at
least
some
of
the
water
previous
to
that
period
—
they
are
the
site
of
the
seas
in
which
these
beds
were
deposited.
Next,
let
him
remember
that
at
that
epoch
itself
the
general
level
of
Europe and
Asia
was
considerably
lower
than
it
is
now.
The
Sahara
was
united
with
the
Mediterranean
and
the
Black
Sea,
and
the
Black
Sea with
the
Caspian.*
Sir
Roderick
Murchison
and
M.
de
Verneuil
consider
that
another
sea
as
large
as
the
Mediter
ranean,
and
several
hundred
feet
in
depth,
existed
about
the
south
of
the
Caspian
during
the
pliocene
epoch
(that
is,
the
commencement
of
the
glacial
epoch),
j
It
is,
therefore,
no
very
uurea
sonable
surmise
that
the
level
of
Europe
from
the
longitude
of
the
western
termination
of
the
Sahara
to
the
longitude
of
the
Caspian
Sea,
was
100
fathoms
lower
than
it is
now.
If
the
reader
will
add
from
Map
2
the
portions of
Europe,
which
in
that case
would
be
under
water,
to
the
other
two
(the
limits
of
glacial
action
and
tertiary
deposits),
he
will
find
that
Europe
has
but
all
disap
peared.
In
addition
to
this,
however,
the
sandy
plains
in
the
centre
of
Germany
stretching
with
interruptions
from
the
Danube
to
the
Baltic,
show
every
appearance
of
having
been
recently
under
water.
If
we
reckon
them
also
as
submerged
at
that
epoch,
then
Europe,
east
of
the
Atlantic,
will
be
practically
almost
blotted
out
from
the
map.
If
that
be
so
(as
so
it
seems
to be),
scarcely
any
life
at
all
can
have
survived
the
glacial
epoch
in
Europe.
Whether
at
that
time
the
communication
with
Asia
was
also
cut
off
is
doubtful,
but
is
not
of
much
consequence,
as
a
communication
after
the
glacial
epoch
was
certainly
opened
between
them.
Still,
to
complete
our
knowledge
of
the
state
of
facts
during
the
miocene
epoch,
we
may
note,
regarding
the
then
boundaries
of
Europe,
that
we
are
sure that
it
was
absolutely
cut
off
on
the
south
by
the
Sahara,
on
the
south-east
by
sea,
which
then
covered
Arabia
and
Persia,
and
by
the
Aralo-Caspian
seas
above-mentioned
;
and
the
interesting
fact
to
which
we
shall
presently
come,
that
seals
of
the
same
species
as
those
now
living
in
the
Arctic
Seas,
occur
both
in
the
Caspian
and
Lake
Baikal,
renders
it
almost
certain
that
a
communication
existed
between
the
Caspian
and
the
Arctic
Seas
;
so
that
Europe,
previous
to
the
glacial
epooh,
was
probably
a
group
of
islands
isolated
from
Asia,
and
from
Africa
—
whether
or
not
from
America
we
shall
presently
see.
*
"
I
was
particularly
struck
by
the
fact,
that
several
given
by
Sir
Roderick
Murchison
and
M.
de
Verneuil
to
of
my
fossil
shells
from
the
Sahara,
in
the
superficial
de-
the
limestone
and
associated
sandy
beds,
of
brackish
posit,
proved
specifically
identical
with
fresh-water
ter-
water
origin,
which
have been
traced
over
a
very
ei-
tiary
fossils
given
me
by
my
friend,
Captain
Spratt,
and
tensive
area,
surrounding
the
Caspian
Azof
and
Aral
Seas,
obtained
by
him
in
the
fresh-water
deposits
of
the
Black
and
parts
of
the
northern
and
western
coasts
of
the
Black
Sea."
—
Tristram's
Sahara,
p.
370.
Sea.
The
limestone
rises
occasionally
to
the
height
of
"
M.
Escher
von dur
Luith
himself,
together
with
several
hundred
feet
above
the
sea,
and
is
supposed
to
MM.
Desor
and
Martius,
have
found
marine
shells,
espe-
indicate
the
former
existence
of
a
vast
inland
sheet
of
cially
the
common
Cockle,
Condium
Edide,
scattered
far
brackish
water,
as
large
as
the
Mediterranean,
or
larger."
and
wide,
from
west
to
east,
over
the
desert
(Sahara)
;
"
The
proportion
of
recent
species,
agreeing
with
the
while
the
shells
of
these,
and
other
living
species,
have
fauna
of
the
Caspian,
is
so considerable, as
to
leave
no
also
been
found
in
boring
Artesian
wells,
at
the
depth
of
doubt
in
the
minds
of
the
geologists
above
cited,
that
this
many
feet
below
the
surface."
—
Lyell's
Elements
of
Geo-
rock,
also
called
by
them
the
'
Steppe
Limestone,'
belongs
logy,
6th
edit.
I860,
p.
175.
to
the
pliocene
period."
—
Lyell,
op.
cit.
p.
209.
t
"
Aralo-Caspian
formations.
—
This
name
has
been
MIOCENE
ATLANTIS.
33
In
America,
on
the
other
hand,
where
the
flora
was
not
annihilated
it
must
have
been
driven
into
its
south-west
corner
;
and
the
space
there
into
which
it
must
have
been
circumscribed
was
much
smaller
than
it is
now,
for
the
north-east of
Mexico
was
also
then
under
water
as
well
as
Texas,
as
is
proved
by
the
tertiary
deposits
now
covering
these
districts.
Thus
it
seems
plain
that
all
reason
ing
from
the
present
distribution
of plants or animals,
or
their
relative
preponderance
on
this
or
that
side
of
the
continent,
must
be
inapplicable
to
the
state
of
things
which
existed
prior
to
the
glacial
epoch,
and
therefore
can
only
have
an
indirect
bearing
on
the
miocene
Atlantis.
That
question
must
be
decided
on
other
grounds
altogether.
The
objections
to
the
hypothesis
are
thus
stated
by
Sir
Charles
Lyell
:
—
"
If
the
evidence
in
the
botanical
scale
were
equally
balanced
in
favour
of
these
two
opposite
theories,
a
geologist
would
not
hesitate
to
prefer
that
of
Dr.
Asa
Gray
as
demanding
an
incomparably
smaller
amount
of
change
in
physical
geography
since
the
close
of
the
miocene
period.
It
is
true
that
since
the
beginning
of
that era
there
have
been
vast
alterations
in
the
level
of
the
Alps
and
contiguous
regions,
and
in
the
Mediterranean,
especially
the
iEgean
Sea.
And
there
has
been,
perhaps,
as
the
late
Edward
Forbes
contended,
an
extension
westward
of
European
and
North
African
land,
even
in
the
pliocene
period.
If,
instead of
assigning
an
almost
historical
date
to
a
continental
condition
of
the
area
between
Africa
and
the
Southern
States
of
North
America,
such
as
might
realize
the
story
of
the
Atlantis
spoken
of
by
the
Egyptian
priests
to
Plato,*
we
could
look
back
through
the
whole
interval
which
separates
us
from
the
eocene
or
cretaceous
periods,
we
might
then,
indeed,
freely
grant,
as
geologists,
any
amount
of
change
that
may
be
required
in
the
position
of
land
and
sea.
"
It
is
the
enormous
depth
and
width
of
the
Atlantic
which
makes
us
shrink
from
the
hypothesis
of
a
migration
of
plants,
fitted
for
a
sub-tropical
climate
in
the
upper
miocene
period,
from
America
to
Europe,
by
a
direct
course
from
west
to
east."
*
Professor
Unger
gives
the
following
account
of
the
organization,
and
possessed a
great
intellectual
and
stra-
tradition
here
referred
to
:
tegic
power.
As
the
goddess
loves
war
as
much
as
wisdom,'
"
The
early
history
of
man
is
still
wrapt
in
obscurity,
he
continued,
'
she
selected a
country
which
would
produce
It
is,
therefore,
the
more
surprising
to
meet
with
a
tradi-
men
closely
resembling
herself.
Under
such
laws
and
tion
of the
highest
importance
with
respect
to
that
geolo-
excellent
political
institutions
did
your
nation
then
live,
gical
period,
and
containing
as
it
were
a
confirmation of
exceeding
all
others
in
virtue,
as
was
fit
for
a
people
dc-
the
former
connexion
of
Europe
with
America,
though
wc
scended
from
the
gods,
and
educated
by
them,
should
have
thought
that
this
connexion
had
ceased
long
"
'
Many
of
the
great
deeds
of
your
nation
preserved
in
before
man's
appearance
on
earth.
This
curious
tradition
our
writings
cause
surprise.
But
one
of
them
exceeds
all
is
found
in
Plato's
dialogue
entitled
'Timams.'
Here
direct
others
in
magnitude
and
splendour.
It
is
recorded
how
mention
is
made
of
a
great
island
of
Atlantis,
situated
-your
country
once
opposed
a
power
which
with
great
ar-
beyond
the
Pillars
of
Hercules,
and
the
seat
of
a
powerful
rogance
pushed
its
way
into
Europe
and
Asia
from
the
nation.
A
priest
of
Sais
made
this
singular
communica-
Atlantic
Ocean,
for
in
those
days
that
sea
was
navigable,
tion
to Solon,
who
had
gone
to
Egypt
to
become
acquainted
Beyond
the
entrance,
which
you
call
the
Pillars
of
Hercules,
with
the
wisdom
of
that
caste.
It
is
mix«d
with
a
great
there
was
an
island larger
than
Libya
and
Asia
together,
deal
that
must
appear
unhistorical,
and
it
puzzles
us
to
From
it
navigators
passed
to
the
other
islands,
and from
know
how
an
Egyptian
priest
could
have
come
by
this
tra-
them
to
the
opposite
continent,
which
surrounded
that
dition,
or
how
Plato
could
arrive
at
so
singular
a
concep-
ocean.
tion.
Let
us
hear
Plato
himself:
—
'
After
the
said
priest
"
'
For
the
sea,
situated
inside
that
strait
of
which
we
has
pointed
out
that
Egypt
is
the
only
country
where
speak,
appears
to
be
a
sea
with
a
narrow
entrance,
but
the
traces
of
the
oldest
history
of
man
could
be
preserved,
he
other
would
justly
be
termed
an
ocean,
and
the
adjacent
informs
Solon
that
Greece,
and
especially
Athens,
had
a
land
a
continent.
On
this
extensive
Atlantic
island
there
very
ancient
history,
which,
however,
had
been
lost
there,
was
a
powerful
and
singular
kingdom,
whose
dominion
ex-
he
draws
his
attention
to
the
fact
that
that
country
was
tended not
only
over
the
whole
island,
but
over
many
settled
earlier
even than
Sais
by
the
goddess
Neith.
other
islands
and
parts
of
the
continent.
It
ruled,
also,
Athens
enjoyed
at
remoto
times
a
well-regulated
political
over
Libya
as
far
as
Egypt,
and
over
Europe
as
far
as
r
34
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
"
The
ideal
map
given
by
Heer
of
the
Atlantis represents a
continent
as
large
as
Europe
pre
cisely
in
that
portion
of
the
Atlantic
Ocean which
is
now
the
broadest
and
deepest,
viz.,
from
two
to
three
miles
in
its
deepest
portions."*
Notwithstanding
this,
the
facts
appear
to
me
clearly
to
show
that
during
the
miocene
epoch
there
must
have
been
a
land
communication
between
Europe
and
America.
It
is
well
ascertained
that
the
floras
of
America
and
Europe
were
the
same
in
the
miocene
age,
and
that
the
miocene
type
still
continues
in
America, but
not
in
Europe.
At
the
same
time,
and
notwithstanding
the
bearing
of
these
facts
in
favour
of
an
Atlantis,
it
is
not
impossible
that
a
"
north-west
pass
age,"
sufficient
for
the
purpose
of
intercommunication
may
have
existed,
although
not
directly
across
the
Atlantic
;
it
may
have been
by
Greenland
;
it
would
only
require
a
very
trifling
change
in
the
level
of
the
land
to
establish
a
communication
between
America
and
Europe
by
the
North
Pole.
We
must
remember
that
the
Polar
climate
at
the
time
was
genial.
Frost
and
snow
were
unknown,
and
the
northern
district
of
Iceland,
and
several
parts
of the
Arctic
lands,
such
as
Disco
Island,
on
the
west
coast
of
Greenland,
lat.
70°
N.,
although
at
the
present
time
entirely
without
trees,
were
densely
wooded
in
the
tertiary
period.
Fragments
of
trees
are
preserved
in
the
lignite
or
"
Surturbrand
"
of
Iceland,
and
as
they
are
still
covered
with
bark
they cannot
have
reached
it
as
drift-wood.
This
vegetation
agrees
with
that
which
in
the
miocene
epoch
covered
the
whole
European
continent,
and
a
portion
of
the
species
composing
it
have
their
analogues
in
North
America."
That
route
was
amply
sufficient
to
supply
America,
without
another
across
the
Atlantic
;
and,
therefore,
had
we
only
to
consider
the
miocene
epoch,
I
should
join
the
ranks
of
the
oppo
nents
of
the
theory,
simply
on
the
ground
that
it
was
unnecessary.
But
if
not a
necessity
before
the
glacial
epoch,
it
becomes
a
necessity
after
it.
The
Polar
climate
was
then
no
longer
as
mild
as
that of
Madeira,
nothing
temperate
could
pass
by
the
Polar
route,
and
yet
many
instances
occur
of
the
same
species
being
found
both
in
Europe
and
North
America,
which
must
have
found
their
way
from
the
one
to
the
other,
subsequent
to
the
glacial
epoch
;
and
if
such
a
communi
cation
existed
after
the
glacial
epoch,
it
is
an
unavoidable
corollary,
that
it
also
existed
pre
vious
to
that
epoch,
viz.
in
the
miocene
times,
when
the
extent
of
dry
land
was
increasing
in
stead
of
diminishing,
as
was
the
case
after
the
cold
had
begun
to
retire.
If
such
an
extension
of
land
between
Europe
and
Asia
formerly
existed,
where
was
it
placed
and
what
were
its
limits
?
The
first
position
which
has
claims
to
be
considered
is
in
the
line
Tyrrhenia.
This
kingdom,
with
the
whole
of
its
forces
Atlantis
sank
into
the
ocean.
This
is
the reason
why,
at
united,
tried
to
subjugate,
in
one
campaign,
your
and
our
present,
that
sea
is
difficult
to
pass
and
explore,
the
deep
country,
and
all
the
districts
inside
the
straits.
At
that
mud
which
the
island
formed
in
sinking
being
an
obstacle
time,
O
Solon,
your
nation
shone
out
from
all
others
by
to
navigation.'
bravery
and
power.
Taking
the
lead
by
courage
and
in
"Thus
far
the curious
passage
in
'
Timreus,'
a
satisfac-
the
arts
of
war,
be
it
as
leaders
of
the
Hellenes,
be
it
neces-
tory
explanation
of
which
historians,
philologists,
and
sarily
isolated
by
the
withdrawal
of
the
allies,
it
was
placed
naturalists,
have
hitherto
attempted
in
vain.
That
this
in
great
danger,
but
it
defeated the
attacking
army,
and
tradition
is
entirely
imaginary
would
be
bold
to
assume,
erected
triumphal
monuments.
It
also
prevented
those
since
we
have
shown
that
its
most
important
substratum
who
had
as
yet
preserved
their
independence
from becom-
is
sound,
and
that
at
one
time
a
continent
did
exist
in
the
ing
subjugated,
and
generously
freed
all
the
others
living
Atlantic
Ocean."
—
XJ-SGVSKjVersunkene Insel
Atlantis.
Wien,
inside
the
Pillars
of
Hercules.
But,
when
at
a
later
period
I860.
Copied
from
Translation
in
"
Socman's
Journal
of
severe
earthquakes
and
great
iloods
took
place,
the
whole
Botany." January,
1865,
p.
23.
of
your
united
army
was
swallowed
up
during
one
evil
day
*
"
Elements
of
Geology,"
by
Sir
Charles
Ltell.
and
one
evil
night,
and
at
the
same
time
the
island
of
London,
1865,
pp.
265-272.
no
160
ISO
140 130
IZO
HO
IOO
90
so 60
SO
40 30
so
too
no
m
1&•
t#j
iso
i6o
no
Wgk
MIOCENE
ATLANTIS.
35
of
the
Sargasso
Sea
or
Gulf
weed
in
the
middle
of
the
Atlantic
;
and,
as
the
claim
founded
on
the
existence
of
that
weed
applies
not
only
to
this
case,
hut
may
have
to
ho
considered
in
other
parts
of
the world,
it
may
be
desirable
to
state
once
for
all
in
some
detail
the
grounds
on
which
his
hypothesis
is
founded.
They
are
contained
in
the
following
note
by
Edward
Forbes
in
his
paper on
"
The
Geological
Relations
of
the
Existing
Fauna
and
Flora
of
the
British
Isles
:
"
—
"
The
following
extract
from
the
writings
of
one
of
the
first
of
living
Algologists
(Prof.
Harvey)
will
show
that there are
botanical
grounds
for
my
speculation
respecting
the
Gulf
weed.
'
Authors
who
have
written
on
this
Funis,
have
much
disputed
both
regarding
its
origin,
and
whether
it
continues
to
grow
whilst
floating
about.
Nothing
at
all
bearing
on
the
former
question
has
yet
been
discovered;
for,
though
species
of
Sargassum
abound
along
the
shores
of
tropical
coun
tries,
none
exactly
corresponds
with
S.
baccferum.
That
the
ancestors
of
the
present
bank
have
originally
migrated
from
some
fixed
station
is
probable
;
but
further
than
probability
we
can
say
nothing.
That
it
continues
to
flourish
in
its
present
situation
is
most
certain.
Whoever
has
picked
it
up
at
sea
and
examined
it
with
any
common
attention,
must
have
perceived
not
only
that
the
plants
were
in
vigorous
life,
but
that
new
fronds
were
continually
pushing
out
from
the
old,
the
limit
being
most
clearly
defined
by
the
colour,
which
in
the
old
frond
is
foxy-brown
;
in
the
young
shoots,
pale,
transparent
olive.
But
how
is
it
propagated,
for
it
never
produces
fructification
?
It
appears
to
me
that
it is
by
breakage.
The
old
frond,
which
is
exceedingly
brittle,
is
broken
by
accident,
and
the
branches
continuing
to
live,
push
out
young
shoots
from
all
sides.
Many
minute
pieces
that I
have
examined
were
as
vigorous
as
those
of
larger
size,
but
they
were
certainly
not
seedlings,
and
appeared
to
me
to
be
broken
branches,
all
having
a
piece of
old
frond
from
which
the
young
shoots
sprung.
As
the
plant
increases
in
size
it
takes
something
of
a
globular
figure,
from
the
branches
issuing
in
all
directions
as
from
a
centre.
On
our
own
shores
we
have
two
species
analogous
to
S.
bacciferum
in
their
mode
of
growth,
namely,
Fiicus
Mackayi
and
the
variety
B.
sub-ecostata
of
Fucus
tcsiculosus
(F.
Balticus,
Ag.)
Neither
of these
has
ever
yet
been
found
attached,
though
they
often
occur
in
immense
strata
;
the
one
on
the
muddy
sea-shore,
the
other
in
salt
marshes,
in
which
situations
respectively
they
continue
to
grow
and
flourish
;
and
it
is
remarkable
that
neither
has
ever
yet
been found
in
fructification,
in
which
respect
also
they
strikingly
coincide
with
S.
bacciferum.
And
if
it
be
hereafter
shown
that
F.
Mackayi
is
merely
F. nodosus
altered
by
growing
under
peculiar
circumstances,
may
it
not
be
inferred
that
Sargassum
bacciferum,
which
differs
about
as
much
from
Sargassum
vulgare
as
Fucus
Mackayi
does
from
Fucus
nodosus,
is
merely
a
pelagic
variety of that
variable
plant
?
'
—
Harvey,
Manual
ofthe
British
Algm
(1841.)
Introduction,
pp.
16, 17.
"
My
friend
and
colleague,
Dr.
Joseph
Hooker,
who
has
had
great
opportunities
of
studying
the
Gulf
weed,
believes
with
Dr.
Harvey,
that
the
Sargassum
bacciferum
is
an
abnormal
condition
of
S.
vulgare.
Now
as
the
latter
is
essentially
a
coast-line
plant,
growing
on
rocks
with
a
very
limited
vertical
range,
I
propose
to
account
for
its
abnormal
condition
as
Sargassum
bacciferum
in
the
Gulf
weed
bank,
on
the
supposition
of
the
submergence
ofthe
ancient
line
of
coast
on
which
it
originated."*
The
idea
here
may
either
be,
that
the
weed
has
spread
from
the
ancient
submerged
line
of
coast
over
the
whole
of
the
rest
of
its
bounds,
or
that
the
limits
or
outer
margin
of the
Sargassum
mark
the
ancient
original
coast-line,
and
that
the
whole
of
the
space
within
these
limits
has
been
filled
up
with
Sargassum
by
its
having
by
successive
subsidences
all
passed
through
the
phase-
of
coast-line.
* Ed. Forbes,
on
the
Geological
Relations
of
the
exist-
the
Geological
Survey
of
Great
Britain
and
of
the
Museum
ing
Fauna
and
Flora
of
the
British
Isles
in
"
Memoirs
of of
Economic
Geology."
London,
1846.
Vol.
i.
p.
349.
36
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
There
is
no
impossibility
in
this,
nor even
any
very
great
improbability
;
but
thero
is
an
explanation
of
its
dispersion
and
distribution
(it
bailiff
once
there
in
some
j1art
of
the
area),
which
seems
to
meet
the
facts
equally
well
by
the
phenomena
in
daily
operation,
and
if
there
be
a
sufficient
cause
already
at
hand,
it
would
be
unphilosophical
to
abandon
it,
and
refer
the
result
to
another
whose
former
existence
is
only
a
supposition.
The
phenomena
which
furnish
such
an
explanation
are
the
currents
which
surround
the
Gulf
weed
bed,
and
the
explanation
is
that
the
Sargasso
is
thrown
into
and
kept
in
its
present
position
by
the
eddy
or
whirl
caused
by
their
revolution
on
every
side
of
it.
Humboldt,
I
think,
was
the
first
.
to
notice
that
it
occupied
the
eddy,
and
Maury
states
the
theory
broadly,
that
the
Sargasso
Seas
are
composed
of
drift
matter,
which
cannot
escape
or
accompany
the
current
which
brings
it,
in
consequence
of
its
being
met by
another
current.
"
The
water
that
is
drifting
north
on
the
outside
of
the
Gulf
stream
turns
with
the
Gulf
stream
to
the
east
also.
It
cannot
reach
the
high
latitudes,
for
it
cannot
cross
the
Gulf
stream.
Two
streams
of
water
cannot
cross
each
other,
unless
one
dip
down
and
under-run
the
other
;
and
if
this
drift
water
do
dip
down,
as
it
may,
it
cannot
carry
with
it
its
floating
matter,
which,
like
its
weeds,
is
too
light
to
sink.
They,
therefore,
are cut
off
from
a passage
into
higher
latitudes.
According
to
this
view
there
ought
to
be
a
Sargasso
sea
somewhere
in
the
sort
of
middle
ground
between
the
grand
equatorial
flow
and
reflow,
which
is
performed
by
the
waters
of
all
the
great
oceans.
The
place
where
the
drift
matter
of
each
sea
would
naturally
collect
would
be
in
this sort
of
pool,
into
which
every
current,
as
it
goes
from
the
equator,
and
again
as
it
returns,
would
slough
off
its
drift
matter.
The
forces
of
diurnal
rotation
would
require
this
collection
of
drift
to
be
in
the
northern
hemisphere,
on
the
right
hand
side
of
the
current,
and
in
the
southern
to
be
on
the
left.
Thus,
with
the
"
Gulf
Stream
"
of
the
Atlantic,
and
the
"
Black
Stream
"
of
the
Pacific,
their
Sargassos
are
on
the
right,
as
they
are
also
on
the
right
of
the
returning
and
cooler
currents
on
the
eastern
side
of
each
one
of those
northern
oceans.
So,
also
with
the
Mozambique
current,
which
runs
south
along
the
east
coast
of
Africa
from
the
Indian
Ocean,
and
with
the
cooler
current
setting
to
the
north
on
the
Australian
side
of
the
same
sea.
Between
these
there
is
a
Sargasso
on
the
left,
for
it is
in
the
southern
hemisphere.
Again,
there
is
in
the
South
Pacific
a
flow
of
equatorial
waters
to
the
Antarctic
on
the
east
of
Australia,
and
of
Antarctic
waters
(Humboldt's
current)
to
the
north,
along
the
western
shores
of
South
America
;
and,
according
to
this
principle,
there
ought
to
be
another
Sargasso
somewhere
between
New
Zealand
and
the
coast
of
Chili.
To
test
the
correctness
of
this
view,
I
requested
Lieut.
Warley
to
overhaul
our
sea
journals
for
notices
of
kelp
and
drift
matter
on
the
passage
from
Australia
to
Cape
Horn
and
the
Chiucha
Islands.
He
did
so,
and
found
it
abounding
in
small
patches,
with
'many
birds
about,'
between
the
parallels
of
40°
and
50°
south,
and
the
meridian
of
140°
and
178°
west.
This
Sargasso
is
directly
south
of
the
Georgian
Islands,
and
is
perhaps
less
abundantly
supplied
with
drift
matter,
less
distinct
in
outline,
and
less
permanent
in
position
than
any
one
of
the
others."*
It
thus
appears
that
instead
of
three,
as
stated
in
the
former
editions
of
Lieut.
Maury's
"Physical
Geography
of
tho
Sea,"
there
are
really
five
Sargassos,
and
it is
from
his
maps
that
I
have
laid
them
down
as
shown
on
Map
5*.
Now
the
objection
to
Maury's
explanation
taken
by
itself
is,
that
the
Sargasso,
at
least
in
the
Atlantic,
is
composed
of
only
one
ingredient,
the
Sargassum
bacciferum
;
whilst
any
collection
of
true
drift
would
necessarily
be
composed
of a
heterogeneous
accumulation
of
all
sorts
of
things.
If
*
Maury,
"
Physical
Geography
of
the
Sea,"
1860,
p.
50.
MIOCENE
ATLANTIS.
37
the
Sargassum
were
once
there,
there
would
be
no
difficulty
in
admitting
that
the
effect
of
the
streams
or
currents
would
be
to
keep
it
fenced
in
within
their
limits.
And
it
would
not
be
necessary
for
this
that
it
should
have
originally
occupied
the
whole
of
the
space
which
it
now
does.
Once
within
it,
although
originally
occupying
only
a
small
corner,
it
might
have
spread
all
over
it
(the
conditions
of
the
ocean
being
there
everywhere
similar),
but
could
not
pass
the
boundaries
of these
currents.
I
therefore
think
that
to
obtain
a
true
explanation
of
the
Sargasso
Seas
we
require
both
Forbes
and
Humboldt's
theories
;
Forbes'
to
explain
the
original
appearance
of
the
weed,
Humboldt's
its
present
limits.
If
we
admit
this,
it
follows
that
Gulf
weed
in
the
Atlantic
indicates
the
submergence
of
land
somewhere
in
that
ocean
;
but
it
does
not
indicate
where
the
submergence
took
place.
It
may
not
have
been
within
it
at
all.
It
may
have
been
in
the
course
of
some
of
the
surrounding
currents,
and
the
weed
which
sprung
from
it
may
have
been
caught
up
and
carried
along
by
it
until
tossed
into
the
eddy,
there
to
spread over
the
whole
tranquil
space.
The
fact,
however,
of
the
restriction
of
species
within
their
original
bounds,
leads
me
to
believe
that
the
starting-point
or
specific
centre
of
this
species,
or
this
form
of
the
Sargassum
vidgarr,
if
it
be
not
a
distinct
species,
and
consequently
the
point
of
the
disappearance
of
an
ancient
coast
of
submerged
land,
must
have
probably
been
within
the
bounds
of
the
Atlantic
Sargasso.
It
may
not
have
been
the
miocene
Atlantis
;
that
is,
the
route
of
communication
between
Europe
and
North
America
;
but
for
all
that
the
weed
may
mark
in
whole
or
in
part
the
site
of
submerged
land.
If
not
on
the
site
of
the
Gulf-
weed
where
else
can
the
Atlantis
have
been
?
Heer
and
Unger,
while
they
do
not
adopt
Forbes'
idea,
place
it,
as
already
said,
across
the
widest
and
deepest
part
of
the
North
Atlantic,
somewhat
to
the
north
of
the
Sargasso.
I
think
it
must
have
been
still
more
to
the
north
;
certainly
it
kept
its
last
hold
well
to
the
north,
for
all
the
species
very
closely
allied,
or
common
to
both
Europe
and
America,
are
northern
types;
not
species
which
might
have
crossed
from
Andalusia
or
Algeria,
to
Florida,
nor
of
so
extreme
a
polar
character
that
they
could
have
crossed
by
Greenland
in
its
present
climate,
but
such
as
might
have done
so
by
Labrador
or
Nova
Scotia.
I
imagine
there
must
have been
a
great
extension
of
land
on
the
European
side
of
the
Atlantic,
reaching
beyond
the
Azores,
uniting
Spain
and
Ireland,
and
stretching
westward
by
Newfoundland
and
its
banks
to
Nova
Scotia
and
Labrador
on
the
one
hand,
and
northwards
to
Greenland
and
Spitzbergen
on
the
other.
It
is
not
to
be
doubted
that
this
arrangement
of
land
and
water
must
have
greatly
contributed
to
the
occurrence
of
the
glacial
epoch.
It
is
also
probable
that
the
termination
of
that
epoch
was
due
in
part,
if
not
entirely,
to
the
sinking
of a
large
part
of
this
preponderance
of
land,
but
that
it
had
not
wholly
disappeared
by
the
time
the
cold of
the
glacial
epoch
was
in
the
wane.
If
it
were
so,
and
the
connexion
between
Greenland
and
Europe
still
subsisted,
that
would
much
increase
the
probability
that
the
connexion
with
America
also
subsisted
to
a
greater
or
less
ex
tent
for
some
time.
Let
us
see
what
there
is
to
be
said in
favour
of
this
view.
It
is
not
difficult
to
show
that
such
a
connexion
did
continue
between
Greenland
and
Europe.
In
the
first
place,
Greenland
has
a
fauna
and
flora
which
are
not
its
own.
'Whence
has
it
received
them
?
Singularly
enough
they
bear
more
than
one
impress.
The
mammalian
fauna
and
the
ornis
is
American.
The
flora
and
entomology
is
European
;
and
these
different
phases
of
organic
life
represent
a
different
distribution
of
land
and
water
when
they
were
established.
Of
course
when
organic
life
began
to
replace
the
inanimate
desolation
left
by
the
glacial
epoch
38
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
over
all
Greenland,
plants
would
come
first,
then
insects,
and
afterwards
birds
and
mammals.
Until
vegetation
clothed
the
land,
animal
life
must
have
been
absent.
There
was
nothing
for
it
on
which
to
subsist.
I
have
said
that
the
flora
is
American.
This
has
been
amply
shown
by
Dr.
Hooker
in
his
valuable
paper
on
the
distribution
of
Arctic
plants.
He
has
also
shown
that
it is
peculiar
in
the
paucity
of
the
number
of
its
species,
compared
with
other
equally
Arctic
lands
;
it
con
taining
actually
fewer
species
of
European
plants,
than
have
found
their
way-eastwards
from
Lapland,
by
Asia
into
western
and
eastern
Arctic
America.*
He
conceives
that
this
is
all
explained
by
Mr.
Darwin's
hypothesis,
—
"First,
that
the
existing
Scandinavian
flora
is
of
great
antiquity
;
and
that
previous
to
the
glacial
epoch,
it
was
more
uni
formly
distributed
over
the
Polar
zone
than
it
is
now.
Secondly,
that
during
the
advent
of the
glacial
period
the
Scandinavian
vegetation
was
driven
southwards
in
every
longitude
;
and
even
across
the
tropics into
the
south
temperate
zone.
And
that
on
the
succeeding
warmth
of
the
present
epoch,
those
species
that
survived
both,
ascended
the
mountains
of
the
warmer
zones,
and
also
returned
northwards
accompanied
by
aborigines
of
the
countries
they
had
invaded
during
their
southern
migration."*
He
savs,
"
If
it
be
granted
that
the
Polar
area
was
once
occupied
by
the
Scandinavian
flora,
and
that
the
cold of
the
glacial
epoch
did
drive
this
vegetation
southwards,
it is
evident
that
the
Greenland
individuals,
from
being
confined
to
a
peninsula,
would
be
exposed
to
very
different
conditions
to
those of
the
great
continents.
In
Greenland
many
species
would,
as
it
were,
be
driven
into
the
sea,
—
that
is,
exterminated
;
and
the
survivors
would
be
confined
to
the
southern
portion
of
the
peninsula.
And
not
being
there,
brought
into
competition
with
other
types,
there
could
be
no
struggle
for
life
amongst
their
progeny
;
and,
consequently,
no
selection
of
better
adapted
varieties.
On
the
return
of
heat
these
survivors
would
simply
travel
northwards
unaccompanied
by
the
plants
of
any
other
country,
"f
The
first
point
in
the
above
propositions
which
I
should
wish
to
notice,
is
the
assumed
existence
of
a
boreal
flora
before
the
commencement
of
the
glacial
epoch.
This
is
a
point
which
is
always
taken
for
granted.
The
usual
conception
of
the
matter
is
that
stated
above
by
Dr.
Hooker.
'Were
the
question
under
consideration
solely
what
was
the
course
of
action
to
which
these
northern
types
were
sub
mitted
during
and
after
the
glacial
epoch,
of
course the
exact
period
when
they
first
made
their
appearance
would
be
of
little
consequence.
But
it
is
different
with
me
here.
The
ques
tion
is
one
of
vital
importance
to
my
theory,
and
I
cannot
afford
to
pass
it
as
a
matter
of
indifference.
If
the
origin
of
species
is
in
any
respect
due
to
change
of
condition
of
life,
then
at
the
glacial
epoch,
if
ever,
great
alterations
must
have
taken
place.
The
southern
migra
tion
of
species
from
the
north,
their
subsequent
return,
and
the
lingering
behind
of
some
on
high
mountains,
no
one
disputes
;
but
they
arc
facts
belonging
to
one
category,
while
the
original
ap
pearance
of
these
northern
types
are
facts
belonging
to
another.
It
is
essential
for
me
to
dispute
the
proposition
that
these
arctic
types
existed
previous
to
the
glacial
epoch.
If
that
were
true,
my
theory
would
be
worthless,
and
I
must
give
it
up.
But
the
proposition
is
not
true.
Not
a
single
arctic
or
boreal
species
of
either
plant
or
animal
has
ever
been
discovered
in
any
stratum
of
older
date
than
the
glacial
epoch.
It
was
the
cold of
that
epoch
which
produced
them
all.
How
soon
it
was
Hooker,
in
"
Trans.
Linn.
Soc„"
xxiii.
p.
253.
+
Hooker,
op.
cit.
pp.
254
and
258.
THE
GLACIAL
EPOCH. 39
after
the
appearance
of
the
cold that
the
species
were
changed
from
their
southern type
into
northern
forms
we
cannot
tell.
My
view
is
that
it
would
be
soon
;
but
doubtless,
as
the
cold
increased
and
advanced
southwards,
fresh
boreal
species
would
be
developed
by
the
increase
of
the
power
of
the
instrument
of
change,
and
doubtless
also
on
its
decrease
as
well
as
its
increase
the
same
result
would
follow.
But
what
I
maintain
is,
that
until
the
cold
began,
boreal
species
there
were
none.
I
speak
not
only
of
plants,
but
of
shells,
mammals,
and
every
created
thing.
Some
botanists
speak
of
the
plants
returning
in
the
same
line
of
longitude
after
the
retreat
of
the
glacial
epoch
as
they
had
advanced
before
it.
If
my
view
is
correct,
this
of
course
is
impossible.
Neither
can
I
adopt
Dr.
Hooker's
view
of
the
course
of
action
of
the
glacial
cold in
Greenland,
and
its
probable
effect
upon
"
the
survivors,"
for
two
reasons,
the
one
that
Greenland
in
all
pro
bability
had
not
then
its
present
configuration,
but
was
united
to
Europe
;
the
other,
that,
supposing
it
not
to
have
been
so,
then
I
cannot
conceive
to
be
possible
that
there
should
have been
any
survivors.
It
seems
a
physical
impossibility
that
any
germ
of
life
could
have
survived
the
envelopc-
ment
of
the
soil
for
thousands
of
years,
with
a
thick
coating
of
ice,
which
was
certainly
the
con
dition
of
the
whole
northern
.hemisphere
to
a
far
more
southerly
latitude
than
Greenland.
When
the
glacial
epoch
arrived
and
advanced
southwards,
it
must
have
operated
in
two
ways
—
it
must
either
have
killed,
or
transformed
into
something
else,
all
those
species
of
plants
and
animals
which
were
subjected
to
its
influence.
It
is
also
possible
that
it
may
have
driven
before
it,
at
a
respectful
distance,
all
those
which
escaped
its
influence,
and
which
migrated
southward,
carrying
their
climate
with
them
;
but
as
a
uniform
climate
had
until
then
subsisted
at
least
as
far
south
as
Greece,
as
is
proved
by
the
fossil
flora
of
Eubcea,
it is
not necessary
for
Our
argument
to
decide
whether
the
old
miocene
flora
still
subsisted
in
the
southern
parts of
Europe
in
virtue
of
that*
having
been
the
general
and
established
flora
of
the
country,
or
if,
under
the
altered
conditions
of
climate,
it
was
now
confined
to
those
parts
where
the
temperature
and
other
conditions of
life
suited
it.
To
this
it is
doubtless
due
that
certain
miocene
genera,
such
as
Clethra,
Bystropogon,
Cedronella,
and
Oreodaphne,
still
subsist
in
the
flora
of
Madeira
and
Porto
Santo,
and
of
the
Canaries
and
the
Azores,
as
well
as
in
North
America.
In
either
view
there
would,
both
in
the
Old
World
and
the
New,
be
a
double
band
of
species
;
the
most
southerly
consisting
of
the
old
species
which
lived
before
the
glacial
epoch
;
and
next,
a
more
northerly
band
fringing
the
line
of
ice,
consisting
of
what
we
now
call
Alpine
and
Boreal
plants
and
animals,
and
which
were
developed
out
of
the
old
species
under
the
influence
of
the
novel
sensation of
cold.
But
although
Dr.
Hooker's
explanation
of
the
facts
is
not
satisfactory
to
me,
I
readily
accept
his
facts
themselves,
and
they
show
that,
as
already
said,
the
type
of
the
flora
of
Greenland
is
European
;
and
if
all
life
existing
in
Greenland
previous
to
the
glacial
epoch
was
then
exterminated,
it
follows
from
their
presence
there
now
that
it
must
have
been
connected
with
Europe
subse
quently
to
that
epoch,
for
a
sufficient
time
to
allow
it
to
be
refurnished
with
European
plants
and
insects.
It
is
a
necessity,
not
a
matter
of
probability.
Next,
as
Iceland,
Greenland,
and
Spitzbergen,*
all
three
possess
nearly
the
same
flora,
and
that
flora
European,
they
must
either
have been
united
to
each
other
and
to
Europe
in
one
line,
or
united
by
different
necks
of
land
to
the
Continent
;
which
latter
supposition,
although
not
im-
*
There
are
some
peculiarities
in
that
of
Spitzbcrgen
to
which
I
shall
presently
advert.
40
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
possible,
is
inconsistent
with
the
close
similarity
of
the
floras
of
these
lands,
with
the
configura
tion
of
the
bed
of
the
neighbouring
sea,
and
with
other
facts
having
a
like
bearing.
The
European
character
of
the
plants
and
insects
of
Greenland,
Iceland,
and
Spitzbergen,
is
sufficient
evidence
that
they
must
have
been
connected
with
Europe
in
some
way,
but
that
alone
throws
but
little
light
on
the
point
of
connexion.
It
may
have
been
by
Norway,
by
Nova
Zembla,
or
by
Britain.
The
following
considerations
show
that
it
must
have
been
by
the
latter
:
—
No
tree
now
grows
in
Orkney
or
Shetland;
the
only
ligneous
things
that
do
grow
are
the
Betula
alba
and
the
common
juniper,
both
merely
existing
as
shrubs
;
but
at six
feet
beneath
a
peat-bog,
trees,
branches,
leaves,
and
cones,
ascribed
to
the
silver
fir,
have
been
found
—
one
tree
in
particular
of
six
feet
in
circumference
and
forty
feet
in
height,*
being
recorded
by
Mr.
Edmon-
ston
as
having
been
found
in
peat
in
Shetland.
When
did
these
trees
grow,
and
what
was
the
climate
of
Britain
then
?
Was
it
really
milder
then
than now,
as
we
should
be
inclined
to
expect,
from
the
fact
of these
trees
being
found
in
Shetland,
where
they
will
not
now
grow
?
As
to
the
date
of
their
growth
there,
there
can
be
very
little
doubt
that
it
was
subsequent
to
the
glacial
epoch.
The
grinding
of
the
ice
of
that
time
would
sweep
away
every
trace
of
peat-bogs
from
the
surface
of
the
land.
Were
a
Swiss
glacier
to
meet
a
peat-bog
in
its
course,
it
would
soon
plough
it
up,
and
scarify
the
ground
to
the
very
bone
below.
It
is
plain,
therefore,
that
the
tree
must
have
grown
and
died,
and
the
peat
been
deposited,
subse
quent
to
the
glacial
epoch.
Now
one
of
two
things
must
have
taken
place
since
it
grew
;
either
the
general
climate
of
the
Northern
hemisphere
must
have
undergone
a
change,
and
that
change
must
have
been from
warmer
to
colder,
or
the
individual
climate
of
Shetland
must
have done
so
by
an
alteration
in
its
configura
tion
and
physical
condition.
But
the
growth
of
these
silver
firs (if
silver
firs
they be
and
not
spruces,
a
point
on
which
the
record
is
not
absolutely
clear)
could
not
be
due
to
any
material
change
in
the
general
climate
of
the
whole
country
:
for
their
remains
arc
found
in
the
peat,
in
company
with
those of
the
Scotch
pine
and
spruce
fir,
and
as
these
are
the
same
trees
that
now
grow
in
the
corresponding
isothermal
line
on
the
Continent,
no
general
alteration
from
warmer
to
colder
can
well
have
taken
place
over
the
whole
hemisphere
;
and
as
it
is
only
on
the
Continent
or
in
lands
not
exposed
to
the
sea
that
they
thrive
in
that
latitude,
it
may
be
inferred
that
at
the
time they
grew
there
the
Shetlands
were
either
not
islands,
or
not
such
small
islands.
But
the
Shetland
Islands
rise
nearly
precipitously
from
a
wide
submarine
plain
seventy-four
fathoms
deep,
which
extends
from
these
islands
to
within
no
great
distance
of
the
coast
of
Norway.
Their
form,
therefore,
shows
that
any
increase
on
their
size
could
only
be
obtained
by
such
an
eleva
tion
as
would
unite
them
to
the
Continent,
from
Denmark
southwards
;
and
there
is
little
doubt
that that
must
have
been
the
position
of
matters
when
the
trees
in
question
grew
on
these
islands.
Along
the
west
coast
of
Norway
a
deep
channel
extends
in
continuation
of that of
the
Baltic.
That
sea
then
must
have
trended
away
up by
the
west
coast
of
Norway,
and
Britain
must
have
been
joined
on
to
the
present
Continent
from
the
Shetlands
to
the
north
of
Denmark,
all
south
of
a
line
drawn
between
them
being
much
less
than
seventy-four
fathoms
in
depth.
The
Rhine
and
the
Elbe,
so
soon
as
by
the
subsequent
rise
of
the
land
they
came
into
existence,
probably
emptied
themselves
into
the
Baltic.
*
Edmonston,
iu
"
Annals
of
Natural
History,"
1841,
vii.
295,
and
Edmonston
in
"
Phytologist,"
i.
430.
THE
GLACIAL
EPOCH.
41
There
remains
the
difficult
question
whether
the
embouchure
of
the
Baltic
opened
into
the
Atlantic
between
Iceland
and
the
British
Islands,
or
between
Spitzbergen
and
Finmark
;
in
other
words,
whether
Greenland
was
united
to
Europe
by
Norway,
or
by
Britain.
As
Iceland,
Greenland,
and
Spitzbergen,
were
united,
the
Baltic
must
have
reached
the
sea
by
one
or
other
of
the
above
passages.
I
have
tried
to
make
out
something
from
a
comparison
of
the
phaenogamic
flora
of
Great
Britain,
and
of
the
Scandinavian
Peninsula,
with
that of
Greenland.
I
thought
that
it
might
show
traces
of
its
former
connexion
by
an
undue
preponderance
of
any
peculiarity
existing
in
the
one
flora
or
the
other
;
but
they
have
turned
out
so
equally
balanced,
that
no
inference,
one
way
or
the
other,
could
be
drawn
from
the
contrast.*
It
is
therefore
very
much
a
matter
of
imagination
which
supposition
we
adopt.
I
prefer
the
union
with
Britain
for
the
following
fancies,
I
can
scarcely
call
them
reasons.
1.
It
carries
on
the
land
in
the
same
line
in
which
what
we
see
of
it
is
already
directed.
2.
There
are a
number
of
stepping-stones
on
the
way
which
may
be
supposed
to
indicate
the
topmost
summits,
and
the
course
of
the
sunken
land
;
and
3.
It
allows
the
prolongation
of
the
Baltic
to
pursue
its
course
to
the
open
sea
in
a
straight
line
instead of
turning
it
off
a
second
time
at
right
angles.
The
proof
that
Greenland
was
united
to
Europe
subsequently
to
the
glacial
epoch,
is
thus
clear
enough.
That
the
communication
between
Europe
and
America
also
subsisted
for
a short
time,
although
probably
imperfect
and
interrupted,
seems
also
pretty
plain;
it is
more
difficult
to
judge
whether
that
communication
still
subsisted
after
the
separation
between
these
lands
took
place.
The
fact
that
Iceland
is
wholly
destitute
of
aboriginal
mammals,
except
perhaps
what
may
prove
to
be
an
American
Lemming,
and
that
those
of
Greenland
and
Spitzbergen
are
not
of
the
European,
but
American
type,
shows
that
the
connexion
between
Europe
-and
them,
while
it
endured
long
enough
to
allow
them
to
be
peopled
by
European
plants
and
European
insects,
was
severed
before
mammals
followed
on
their
trace.
The
connexion
with
both
continents
may
then
have
been
severed,
for
although
the
mammals
in
Greenland
are
of
the
American
type,
they
are
very
few,
and
all
of
a
class
that
might
have
migrated
across
any
moderate
distance
of
ice
;
and
Spitzbergen
and
Iceland
may
have
continued
united
to
Greenland
after
both
were
disunited
from
the
rest
of
Europe.
In
any
view
it
is
only
the
now
submerged
north-western
portion
of
miooene
Europe,
which
still
subsisted
during
and
after
the
glacial
epoch.
Its
south-western
part
cannot
have
done
so,
or
we
should
have
had
a
flora
in
Europe
more
nearly
resembling
that
of
North
America.
Some
remains
of
it,
however,
still
survive,
to
show
that
the
miocene
flora
escaped,
where
it
was beyond
the
influence
of
the
cold.
I
may
remark,
par
parent
htee,
here,
that
it
would
be
difficult
to
find
two
lands
better
adapted
for
illustrations
of
Mr.
Darwin's
views
of
colonization
by
flotsam
and
jetsam
than
Spitzbergen
and
*
I
took
the
Greenland
flora
from
the
tables
in
Hooker's
siderably
greater
than
those
in Britain,
the
numbers
being
essay
above
mentioned
;
the
Scandinavian
from
Frie's
1708
Scandinavian
plants
against
1239
British,
conse-
"
Summa
Vegetabilium
Scandinavire,"
and
the
British
from
quently
the
former
might
be expected
to
possess
the
Bentham's
"Hand
Book"
(as
steering
a
just
medium
be-
largest
actual
number
of
species
;
tried
according
to
that
tween
the
extreme
opinions
regarding
species
on
both
ratio,
the
proportion
of
Greenland
plants
to
the
whole
of
sides),
and
this
comparison
gives
232
Greenland
species
the
Scandinavian
is
a
little
more
than
a
seventh
(about
as
found
in
the
Scandinavian
Peninsula,
and
only
1Cj7
in
7.J),
while
that
of
Britain
is
also
a
little
more
than
a
Britain,
but
this
apparent
preponderance
in
favour
of
seventh
(about
7J),
showing
that
the
difference
is
teo
Scandinavia
is
neutralised
by
the
fact
that
the
number
of
slight
to
allow
us
to
draw
any
conclusions
from
it
either
species
inhabiting
the
Scandinavian
Peninsula
is
con-
one
way
or
other.
G
12
FRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
Iceland,
both
large
islands,
the
one
with
a
flora
limited
to
ninety-three
species,
the
other
apparently
without
an
indigenous
mammal.
In
the
former,
the
most
remarkable
fact
in
favour
of
the
view
is
that
Spitzbergen
appears
to
have
two,
if
not
three,
floras
represented
on
its
shores,
—
literally
its
shores,
—
because
the
interior
is
a
pile
of
snow
and
ice
where
nothing can
live.*
The
flora
of
the
west
coast
has
been
chiefly
borrowed
from
Greenland
;
that
on
the
north
coast
has
a
considerable
flavour
of
the
Melville
and
Parry
Islands
species,
there being,
besides
half
a
dozen
species
peculiar
to
Mel
ville
Island,
no
less
.
than
58
out
of
the
83
composing
the
flora
of
that
island
found
in
Spitz
bergen,
and
chiefly
on
its
north
coast,
and
about
53
out
of
124
species
from
Eastern
Asia.
It
is
not
said
whether
these
latter
are
chiefly
found
on
the
eastern
coast
or
not.
If
it
should
prove
so,
we
should
then
have
each
coast
with
a
predominance
of
species
from
the
country
lying
opposite
it,
which
certainly
would
look
something
like
colonization
by
immigration
by
some
such
means.
On
the
other
hand.
Mammals,
such
as
the
Reindeer
and
Hare,
could
have
come
neither
by
flotsam
nor
jetsam.
It
is
possible
that
they
might
have
crossed
the
ice,
particularly
if
much
land
lies
between
Spitzbergen
and
Melville
Island
;
but former
contiguity
or
continuity
of
land
seems
the
more
probable
explanation.
As
to
Iceland,
its
flora
does
not
seem
to
have
any
of these
peculiarities,
and
besides,
although
only
amounting
to
445
phanerogamous
species,
it
is
still
greatly
too
large
to
allow
of
our
supposing
it
all
to
have
come
over
sea.
Before
leaving
these
frozen
regions
I
may
remark
that
their
floras
furnish
confirmation
of
the
justice
of
my
view
of
the
origin
of
species
on
one
point,
viz.,
that
without
change
of
condition
no
new
species
can be
produced.
There
can
hardly
be
any
condition
more
constant
than
continual
cold
;
and
we
find
in
conformity
with
what
we
might
expect
from
such
a
character,
that
the
species
which
are
frigid
in
their
constitution
exist
without
change
in
Greenland,
the
Alps,
the
Him-
malayahs
and
Andes,
while
those
of
more
temperate
character
have
disappeared
in
some
localities
and become
changed
in
others,
—
the
change
probably
being
due
to
interventions
of
more
moderate
climate.
The
Greenland
and
Spitzbergen
species
are
all
of
an
arctic
character,
and
have
come
back
with
and
kept
pace
with
the
cold,
consequently
we
should
not expect
to
obtain
any
change
or
development
of
new
species
out
of
them,
and
so
it
is.
With
the
exception
of
a
single
insig
nificant
new
grass
(Catabrosa
Vilfotoea)
in
Spitzbergen,
not a
single
species
has
been
found
either
in
Spitzbergen
or
Greenland
which
was
not
already
known
as
occurring
elsewhere.
*
Malmgren
says,
"
The
summer's
heat
melts
the
snow
is
an
old
sea-shore,
and
that
Spitzbergen
is
gradually
and
fits
the
soil
for
its
scanty
vegetation
only
on
a
narrow
rising
above
the
sea.
This
narrow
ledge
of
so
compara-
strip
of
land,
which
stretches
along
the
coast
between
the
tively
recent
a
geological
age,
supports
the
great
proportion
sea
and
the
nearest
mountain
ridge.
The
mountains
of
the
vegetation
;
only
a
third
of
the
species
are
found
seldom
rise
precipitously
from
the
sea,
there
is
generally
on
the
north
coast at
a
greater
height
than
300
feet
above
such
a
narrow
terrace
of
about
one-eighth
to half
a
mile
the
sea."
According
to
his
view,
the
flora
of
Spitzbergen
in
width.
Its
composition
and
the
sub-fossil
whale-bones
must
consequently
also
be
comparatively
recent,
and
still
and
mollusca
contained
in
the
uppermost
bed
of
gravel,
continuing
to
increase.
—
See
Malmgren,
op.
cit.
Transla-
which
is
50
to
150
feet
above
the
sea,
show
that
this
ledge
tion
in
Seeman's
"
Journal
of
Botany,"
p.
173.
-13
CHAPTER
V.
PAST
GEOGRAPHY
OF
THE
GLOBE
Continued
GLACIAL
EPOCH.
Such
a
Miocene
Atlantis
as
that
above
defined
sufficiently
explains
the
common
distribution
of
plants
and
animals
in
Europe
and
America,
up
to
the
glacial
epoch.
'We
have
now
to
consider
how
and
by
what
channels
the
rehabilitation
and
distribution
of
these
lands
themselves
were
effected
subsequent
to
that
period.
I
have
rather
anticipated
this
in
regard
to
Greenland,
Iceland,
and
Spitzbergen.
But
tho
main
question
of
the
restoration
of
life
to
Europe and
America
still
remains.
Life
in
North
America
being
by
the
glacial
cold
driven
into
Mexico,
and
in
Europe
almost
entirely
extirpated,
and
the
communication
with
North
America
cut
off,
except
at
an
extreme
point
which
lay
at
the
greatest
distance
from
the
surviving
focus
of
life
in
each
country
respectively,
viz.
as
regards
America
in
the
extreme
north-east,
while
all
the
surviving
life
was
crowded
into
the
extreme
south-west
;
and
as
regards
Europe
in
the
extreme
north-west,
while
the
nearest
point
whence
life
could
be
drawn
was
probably
the
south-east
of
Asia
;
it
is
plain
that
neither
of
the
continents
could
help
the
other,
America
could
receive
European
colonists,
and Europe
American,
only
after
they
had
each
been
re-peopled
from
some
other
source.
In
the
first
place,
as
to
Europe,
it is
plain that
it
must
have
drawn
its
new
inhabitants
almost
entirely
from
Asia
;
the
Sahara
still
subsisted
as
a
sea,
although
perhaps
diminished
in
size,
and
cut
it
off
from
Africa
;
and
accordingly
no
trace
of
the
fauna
or
flora
of
Africa
proper
is
to
be
found
in
Europe.*
There
was,
therefore,
no
place
except
Asia
on which
it
could
draw
(any
slight
remnants
of
the
miocene
flora
which
are
still
to
be
found
in
Europe
were
doubtless
preserved
in
those
parts
of
the
South
of
Europe
which
existed
as
islands
beyond
the
reach
of
the
ice
of
the
glacial
epoch
;)
and,
in
accordance
with
this,
we
find
that
the
flora
and
fauna
of
Europe and
Asia
are
essentially
the
same.
It
is
to
be expected
that
in
such
an
immense
tract
of
country
climatal
variations
must
have
arisen
since
then
;
and
we
can
distinguish
three
sub-provinces
(which
may
be
called
respectively
the
Scandinavian,
the
Mediterranean,
and
the
East,
or
Mongolo-Siberian),
but
essentially
the
whole
of
Asia
north
of
the
line
of
the
Himmalayahs
and Europe
is
of
one
type.
When
we
come
to
trace
the
spread
of
particular
species
of
plants
and
animals,
I
have
been
surprised
to
find
how
happily
this
view
explains
many
seeming
anomalies,
which
have
puzzled
naturalists
to
account
for,
such
as
the
distribution
of
the
cedars
—
the
silver
firs
—
many
of
the
mammals,
and
in
fact
of
every
class
of
organic
life
in
Europe
and
Northern
Asia.
As
to
America
the
whole
of
its
pre-existing
flora
and
fauna
having
been
crowded
into
the
north
west
of
Mexico
and
Central
America,
that
is
the
source
from
which
it
must
have been
restored.
On
the
retreat
of
the
ice
the
flora,
of
course,
would
follow
it
step
by
step,
but
its
starting-point
being
west
of
the
dividing
ridge
or
backbone
of
America,
or,
what
is
probably
more
to
the
purpose,
west
of
the
tertiary sea
which
lay
in
the
line
of
the
Missouri
and
Mackenzie
Rivers,
and
thus
being
penned
in
between
the
Pacific
and
these
barriers,
it
would
flow
up
in
strength
into
Cali-
*
Any
instances,
such
as
the
lion
or
leopard,
which
pearancc.
See
remarks
on
the
distribution
of
the
lion
—
seem
inconsistent
with
this
statement,
are
only
so
in
ap-
postea.
44
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
fornia
and
Oregon,
and
only such
a
portion
of
it
as
might
be
ahle
to
cross
the
ridge
or
sea
would
succeed
in
making
good
its
footing
on
the
eastern
side
of
North
America.
I
conceive
that
the
Missouri
sea
must
have been
the
more
important
obstacle
of
the
two
;
because
the
place
where
that
sea
lay
is
to
this
day
the
limiting
boundary
between
various
species
inhabiting
the
country
to
the
cast
and
west
of
it.
That
sea,
however,
was
interrupted
near
the
south,
and
by
that
interruption
Eastern
America
doubtless
received
many
of
its
species.
The
sea
appears
to
have
run
up
straight
to
the
Arctic
Ocean
in
the
line
of
the
Mackenzie
River
;
but
I
have
a
strong
expectation
that
it
will
be
found,
when
the
regions
to
the
north
of
Vancouver's
Island
are
thoroughly
examined,
that
this
sea
had
another
communication
with
the
Pacific
perhaps
not
very
far
north
of
or
on
the
site
of
the
tertiary
beds
near
that
island,
which
acted
as
a
barrier
isolating
the
strip
of
land
which
lies
along
the
coast
of
the
Pacific
between
the
mountains
and
the
sea.
This
seems
probable
from
the
following
facts
in
the
distribution
of
Asiatic
plants
in
America,
or
of
American
types
in
Asia.
Professor
Gray
has
shown
that
the
relations
of
the
flora
of
Eastern
Asia
(as
more
particularly
expressed
by
that of
Japan)
with
that of
the
United
States,
east
of
the
Mississippi
arc
peculiarly
intimate.
This
is
evinced
by
the
great
number
of
congeneric,
closely
representative,
and
identical
6pecies in
the
two
floras.
Also
that
although
there
is
a
considerable
number
of
species
com
mon
to
the
western
side
of
the
American
continent
and
to
Japan,
yet
that
the
likeness
is
less
strong
between
their
floras
than
between
those
of
Eastern
North
America
and
Japan.
On
the
other
hand,
large
American
genera
(such
as
Eutatorium,
Aster,
Solidago,
Solanum)
are
represented
in
Asia
by
a
small
number
of
species,
which
diminish
or
disappear
as
we
approach
the
Atlantic
limits
of
Europe,
whilst
the
types
peculiar
to
the
extreme
west
of
Europe
are
wholly
deficient
in
America.
"
The
deficiency,"
says
Dr.
Gray,
"in
the
temperate
American
flora
of
forms
at
all
peculiar
to
Western
Europe
is
almost
complete,
and
is
most
strikingly
in
contrast
with
the
large
number
of
Eastern
American
forms
repeated
or
represented
in
Eastern
Asia."
Professor
Gray
thus
accounts
for
these
facts.
First,
he
adopts
the
theory
that
a
more
extended
homogeneous
and
uniform
distribution
of
plants
than
wc
now
have
existed
previous
to
the
glacial
epoch
;
that
during
the
continuance
of
that
epoch,
the
northern
types
migrated,
or
were
driven
southwards,
(although
he
does
not
seem
to
accept
the
idea
of
their
being
driven
so
com
pletely
out
of
the
country
as
I
have
supposed),
and
that,
on
the
retreat
of
the
ice
before
the
returning
warmth,
the
temperate
flora
which
had
survived
the
cold
returned
to
the
north,
fol
lowing
the
steps
of
the
ice
pari
passu
;
and,
what
he
considers
an
important
point,
that
they
must
have
advanced
further
north,
and
especially
north-westward,
than
they
now
do,
so
far,
indeed,
that
the
temperate
flora
of
North
America
and
Eastern
Asia
must
have
become
con
terminous.
He
then
supposes
that
an
epoch,
called
by
Dana
the
Fluvial
epoch,
followed
the
Glacial
epoch,
which,
from
whatever
cause,
was
of a
milder
character
than
our
present
climate,
as
he
thinks
is
proved
by
the
remains
of
species
of
Megatherium,
Mylodon,
Megalonyx,
Mas
todon,
and
the
Mammoth,
having
been
found
in
the
deposits
of that
period.
He
argues
that
all
the
facts
known
to
us,
even
to
the
limiting
of
the
drift,
show
that
the
configuration of
the
two
continents
was
nearly
the
same
then
as
now,
and
the
isothermal
lines
curved
as
now
(which,
so
far
as
regards
the
isothermal
lines,
the
reader
will
see to
be
correct
by
comparing
the
limits
of
the
glacial
action
in
Europe
and
America
shown
in
Map
4)
;
that
such
a
more
genial
climate
would
commingle
the
temperate
floras
of
the
two
continents
by
Bhering's
Straits,
or
perhaps
by
the
still
shorter
route
of a
tract
of
land
between
Kanitsckatka
and
the
Aleutian
Islands.
THE
TERRACE
EPOCH.
45
Still
following
Dana's
geological
views,
he
imagines
a
third
epoch
(the
Terrace
Epoch),
which
is
the
transition
between
his
fluvial
epoch
and
the
present
state
of
things,
during
which
he
supposes
that
the
interchange
of
migrations
by
which
the
preponderating
affinity
between
the
East
of
North
America
and
the
East
of
Asia
over
that of
Western
America
was
effected,
took
place
by,
and
in
virtue
of,
the
isothermal
lines.
To
use
his
own
words,
—
"
The
interchange
of
plants
between
the
East
of
North
America
and
Eastern
Asia
has
mainly
taken
place
in
high
northern
latitudes,
and
that
tho
isothermal
lines
have,
in
earlier
times,
turned
northward
on
our
eastern,
and
southward
on
our
north-western
coast,
as
they
now
do,
are
points
wdiich
go
far
towards
explaining
why
Eastern
North
America,
rather
than
Oregon
and
California,
has
been
mainly
concerned
in
it,
and
why
the
temperate
interchange,
even
with
Europe,
has
principally
taken
place
in
Asia."
I
am
a
little
sceptical
about
the
supposed
fluvial
epoch
;
and
its
climate
being
milder
than
that
of
the
present
day.
The
presence
of
the
Megatherium
might
be
worth
something
as
evidence
of
a
warm
climate,
seeing
that
the
typical
South
American
species
hived
in
a
warm
climate,
and
that
the
species
itself
lived
previous
to
the
glacial
epoch
;
but
the
company
of
the
Mammoth,
and
this
not
a
tropical
Mammoth,
but
the
woolly
fur-clothed
Elephas
primigenius,
adds
nothing
to
the
force
of
that
fact.
If
the
maxim
"
noscitur
a
xociis"
is
to
bo
applied,
its
association
with
the
species
of
Megatherium
and
Mylodon
in
question
would
be
fatal
to
the
idea
of
a
mild
climate.
For,
although
the
kindred
of
the
Megatheres
lived
in
a
warm
climate,
so
did
the
kindred
of
the
Mammoth
:
and
yet
we
are
as
sure
almost
as
we
can
be
of
anything
depending
on
palneontological
evidence
that
the
Siberian
Mammoth
(Elephas
primigenius)
was
an
animal
fitted
for
a
cold
climate.
More
over,
the
evidence
of
extinct
Megatheres
having
survived
the
glacial
epoch
is
not
altogether
beyond
suspicion.
Tho
reader
will
find
the
question
more
fully
discussed
when
w■e
come
to
the
Edentata.
If
they
did,
they
did
not
survive
it
long,
and
only
in
the
most
southern
and
warmest
parts
of
North
America.
The
argument
from
the
isothermal
lines
is
more
satisfactory.
There
is,
however,
one
purpose
to
which
it
is
applied
by
Professor
Gray
in
which
I
cannot
concur,
and
that
is,
to
explain
the
cause
why
species
which,
according
to
him,
have
crossed
from
Asia,
have
passed
by,
or
omitted
to enter,
north-west
America,
and
travelled
on
to
Eastern
America.
His
theory
explains
most
happily
and
ingeniously
how
species,
whose
habitat
is
in
Eastern
Asia
and
Eastern
America
at
as
low
a
latitude
as
50°
N.,
may
yet
have
been
able
to
cross
from
one
continent
to
the
other
at
a
latitude
of
upwards
of
60°,
but
having
once
crossed,
I
do
not
see
they
should
have
a
greater
range
of
latitude
in
east
than
west
America,
nor
why
the
species
should
be
absent
in
the
latter
altogether.
The
fact
is,
however,
that
they
have
not spread
into
north-west
America.
That
district
—
that
strip
of
land
lying
to
the
west
of
the
Rocky
Mountains
—
has
been
passed
by
the
plants,
whether
from
Asia
or
Eastern
America?
If
the
plants
really
touched
the
north
of
this
territory,
there
must
have
been
some
other
reason
for
their
going
past
it
than
the
difference
in
temperature.
There
must
have
been
a
barrier
there
which
they
could
not
pass
;
and
I
think
the
hypothesis
which
I
have
above
suggested,
that
at
that
time
there
was
a
strait
or
sea
to
the
north
of
Vancouver's
Island,
joining,
what
I
may
call
the
Missouri-Mackenzie
tertiary
sea,
is
the
true
explanation
of
the
phenomenon.
Such
a
barrier
would
hem
in
and
preserve
North-
West
America
as
a
com
paratively
isolated
region,
in
which,
as
Dr.
Hooker
points
out,
—
"we
have,
as
in
an
oceanic
island,
a
great
mixture
of
types
(Asiatic,
European,
East
and
West
American)
and
paucity
of
species."*
*
Hooker,
"On
the
Distribution
of
Arctic
Plants,"
in
Linnean
Society's
Transactions,
vol.
xxiii.,
p.
275.
1S61.
46
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
There
is,
however,
another
feature
in
the
distribution
of
vegetation
in
North
America,
which
has
been
used
as
an
argument
in
favour
of
the
miocene
Atlantis
without
regard
to
the
interruption
of
phenomena
which
must
have
been
occasioned
by
the
glacial
epoch
;
but
which,
if
it
was
worth
anything
as
an
argument
when
no
such
interruption
was
thought
of,
should
be
equally
good
for
an
Atlantis
after
it
;
and
that
is,
that
the
number
of
the
species
of plants
which
occur
in
Eastern
Asia
diminishes
as
we
proceed
westwards.
Mr.
M'Clelland
makes
an
observation
to
a
similar
effect
as
regards
the
animals
of
Assam
;
his
catalogue
of
them
displaying
an
interesting
balance
numerically
in
favour
of
the extension
of
species
from
the
eastward.*
As
to
plants,
out
of
1550,
which
is
the
number
of
Japanese
phaenogamous
species
known
up
to
this
time,
Dr.
Gray
has
pointed
out
that,
supposing
them
to
have
been
spread
in
the
direction
and
from
the
point
specified,
by
the
time they
reach
Europe
they
are
reduced
to
157
;
by
the
time
they
come
to
Eastern
North
America
they
only
number
134
;
and
when
they
get
so
far
as
Western
North
America
we
find
only
120
species.
The
inference
from
this,
of
course,
is
that there
was
a
highway
open
to
the
plants
all
the
way
round
the
world
from
Japan
to
California
;
and
that
as
they
got
further
and
further
on
their
journey,
species
kept
dropping
off
until,
when
they
reached
its
end,
only
120
species
remained
out
of
1550.
The
idea
is
plausible
at
first
sight,
but
a
little
consideration
will
serve
to
show
that
the
distribution
of
species
in
North
America
has
in
reality
nothing
to
do
with
that in
Europe
and
Asia,
but
that
they
are
the
results
of
two
totally
different
trains
of
action.
It
is
plain
that
if
they
were
part
of the
same
train
of
action,
they
must
bear
a
relative
proportion
to
each
other.
If
1550
species
are
reduced
to
157
in
journeying
to
Europe
—
say
7000
miles
—
they
ought
to
have
suffered
a
further
proportionate
decrease
by
the
time
they
have
reached
America,
and
a
still
greater
by
the
time
they
have
reached
California.
Does
that
rate
correspond
with
the
results
above
given
?
Here
they
are
compared
:
—
LOSS
PROPORTIONATE
ACTUAL
LOSS
OUT
OF
1550.
TO
THE
DISTANCES.
From
Japan
to
Central
Europe,
say
7000
miles
—
1393=one
in
every
five
miles
.
1393
From
Central
Europe
to
Newfoundland,
3000
miles,
23
600
From
Newfoundland
to
California,
.
4000
miles,
13
.
.
. . . .
800
In
other
words,
according
to
that
ratio
the
whole
should
have
been
extinguished
before
they
had
well
left
Europe
;
the
157
left
would
not
suffice
to
carry
them
across
the
Atlantic,
even
starting
from
the
west
coast
of
Ireland.
In
the
first
7000
miles,
the
missing
amounted
to
1363,
in
the
second only
to
36
;
a
result
too
extravagant
to
be
seriously
looked
at,
and
yet
not
even
so
bad
as
it
really
should
be,
because
no
allowance
has
been
made
for
the
increased
ratio
of
loss
which
we
should expect
to
be
consequent
on
increased
distance
from
home.
The
real
cause
of
the
similarity
of
the
floras
of
Eastern
Asia
and
America
is
probably
that
both
started
from
a
similar
basis.
In
the
miocene
time
one
flora
inhabited
Europe,
Asia,
and
America.
The
glacial
cold
all
but
destroyed
it
in
Europe,
but
in
North
America
it
found
a
refuge
in
the
south-west,
and
in
Asia
the
distribution
of
land
and
water
shows
that
its
refuge
there
must
have
been
mainly
in
the
south-east
—
not
in
the
Malayan
south-east,
which
was
cut
off
from
Northern
Asia
—
but
in
the
south-cast
of
Northern
Asia
;
in
other
words,
Japan
and
the
north
of
China.
The
floras
preserved
in
Asia
and
America
would,
of
course,
undergo
different
*
M'Clelland,
Catalogue
of
Animals
in
Assam
in
"
Annals
of
Natural
History."
THE
GLACIAL
EPOCII.
47
changes
as
they
spread
further
and
further
from
their starting-point,
but
in
both
those
left
at
their
starting-point
should
be
nearest
the
original
miocene
type
from
which
they
have
descended
without
undergoing
the
chances
of
change
of
form
incident
to
change
of
place.
As
regards
modified
species
which
may
have
found
their
way
from
Asia
to
America,
or,
vice
versa,
the
difference
in
their
proportion
in
East
and
West
America
is
to
be
sought
for
in
the
com
paratively
insular
position
of
the
latter,
.
fenced
off,
as
I
have
shown,
by
seas
to
the
west,
to
the
greater
part
of
the
east,
and
also
probably
to
the
north.
Hence
East
America,
although
furthest
from
Asia,
received
the
Asiatic
species
first,
and
West
America
only
received
them
by
regurgita
tion
from
the
East.
Before
leaving
the
consideration
of
the
effect
of
the
glacial
epoch,
I
should
wish
to
notice
an
ingenious,
cosmical
speculation,
in
relation
to
it,
which
has
recently
been
propounded.
That
epoch
plays
too
important
a
part
in
questions
relating
to
the
geographical
distribution
of plants
and
animals,
to
allow
us
to
disregard
as
extraneous
any
views
relating
to
it.
I
there
fore
make
no
apology
to
the
reader
for
detaining
him
for
a
few
minutes
while
we
look
into
this
hypothesis
and
endeavour
to
estimate
it
at
its
real
value.
The
speculation
to
which
I
refer
is
that
lately
made
by
Mr.
Croll*
in
which
he
ascribes
some
of
the
phenomena
of
the
glacial
epoch
to
the
disturbance
of
the
centre
of
gravity
of
the
earth.
That
gentleman
has
suggested
that
the
submergence
of
the
land
in
the
north
which
is
believed
to
have
followed
the
termination
of
the
glacial
epoch
may
have
been
due
to
a
disturbance
or
alteration
of
the
centre
of
gravity
of
the
earth,
consequent
on
the
enormous
weight
of
ice
accumulated
at
the
North
Pole
during
that
epoch.
Mr.
Jamiesonf
had
already
suggested
that
the
earth's
crust
may
have
yielded
under
the
weight
of
the
ice,
and
so
caused
the
submergence
;
but
Mr.
Croll,
while
he
also refers
the
result
to
the
weight
of
the
ice,
argues,
that instead of
the
earth
sinking,
the
water,
in
adjusting
itself
to
a
different
centre
of
gravity,
overflowed
part
of
the
land.
Mr.
Croll
says,
"
The
surface
of
the
ocean
always
adjusts
itself
in
relation to
the
earth's
centre
of
gravity,
no
matter
what
the
form
of
the
solid
mass
of
earth
may
happen
to
be.
Now
if
a
portion
of
the
water
of
the
ocean
be
converted
into
solid
ice,
and
placed,
for
example,
around
the
northern
polar
regions,
it
will
necessarily
change
the
position
of
the
earth's
centre
of
gravity.
The
centre
of
gravity
will
be
removed
a
little
to
the
north
of
its
former
position.
The
water
of
the
ocean
will
then
forsake
the
old
centre,
and
adjust
itself
in
relation
to
the
new.
The
surface
of
the
ocean
will,
therefore,
rise
towards
the
North
Pole,
and
fall
towards
the
South
;
in
other
words,
there
will
be
in
relation
to
the
sea-level
a
depression
of
the
land
on
the
northern
hemisphere,
and
an
elevation
on
the
southern.
The
extent
of
the
rise
of
the
ocean,
level,
or,
what
is
equally
the
same,
the extent
of
the
submergence,
will
be
in
proportion
to
the
weight
of
the
ice-sheet.
The
weight,
or
the
size,
of
the
ice-sheet
being
known,
we
can
determine
with
the
utmost
certainty
the
extent of
the
submergences
;
or
controverscly,
the
extent
of
the
submergence
being
known
we
can
determine
both
the
weight
and
the
size
of
the
ice-sheet.
It
is
singular
why
physicists
should
not
have
perceived
the
physical
impossibility
of
an
ice-sheet,
several
thousands
of
feet
in
thickness
being
placed
upon
the
northern
hemisphere,
still
retaining
its
former
level
in
relation to
this
land,
unless
the
ice-sheets
be
counterbalanced
by
one
of
equal
weight
placed
upon
the
southern
hemisphere.
But
this
leads
to
another
result.
The
submergence
of
the
land
during
the
glacial
epoch
leads
to
the
conclusion
that
the
glaciation
was
not
contem-
*
See
Letter
in
"Eeader,"
Aug.
1865.
t
Jameson,
in "
Quart.
Journ.
of
Geology,"
xviii.
170,
and
xix.
235.
48
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
poraneous
on both
hemispheres.
If
the
ice-sheet
had
covered
both
hemispheres,
the
earth's
centre
of
gravity,
and
consequently
the
ocean-level,
would
have
remained
unaffected.
The
submergence
of
the
land
is
therefore
another
confirmation
of
the
truth
of
the
theory,
which
attributes
the
glacial
epoch
to
excentricity
of
the
earth's
orbit
;
for,
as
you
are
aware,
if
the
glacial
epoch
had
been
due
to
the
excentricity,
the
glaciation
could
have
extended
to
only
one
hemisphere
at
a
time.
One
hemisphere
would
have
been
covered
with
snow
and
ice,
while
the
other
would
have
been
enjoying
a
perpetual
spring.
"
A
glacial
epoch
resulting
from
the
excentricity
of
the
earth's
orbit
would
extend
over
100,000
years.
But
owing
to
the
precession
of
the
equinoxes
and
the
revolution of
the
apsides
the
glaciation
would
be
transferred
from
the
one
hemisphere
to
the
other
every
10,000
years
or
so.
A
glacial
epoch
extending
over
100,000
years
would
therefore
be
broken
up
with
five
or
six
warm
periods.
A
warm
period
on
the
one
hemisphere
would
be
contemporaneous
with
a
cold
period
on
the
other.
Under
these
circumstances
we
ought
to
have
elevation
of
the
land
during
the
warm
periods,
and
submergence
during
the
cold.
The
land
ought
to
have
stood
higher
than
at
present
during
some
periods
of
the
glacial
epoch
as
well
as
lower.
This,
again,
is
in
agreement
with
geological
facts.
That
the
cold
of
the
glacial
epoch
was
not
continuous,
but
was
broken
up by
comparatively
warm
periods,
when
the
ice
to
a
considerable
extent
at
least
disappeared,
I
think
has
been
clearly
proved
by
Morlot,
Geikie,
and
others,
from
the
stratified
beds
of
sand
clay
and
gravel,
old
water
courses
and
striated
'
pavements
'
which
have
been
found
in
the
true
boulder
clay."
As
regard's
the
glacial
epoch
being
the
result
of
the
excentricity
of
the
earth's
orbit,
there
is
much
that
is
attractive
in
the
idea.
It
would
explain
many
puzzling
facts,
and
others
which
appear
inconsistent
with
it
might
be
explained
away
or
reconciled
to
it.
For
example,
it
may
be
said
if
that
is
a
true
explanation
the
glacial
epoch
should
return
periodically,
and
that
this
has
been
so
we
have
no
evidence.
But
the
heat
of
the
earth
until
the
glacial
epoch
may
have
been
sufficient
to
have
enabled
it
to
have
endured
the
cold
with
only
a
slight alteration
of
temperature,
sufficient
to
make
such
a
change
of
condition
as
I
require
for
the
development
of
new
species,
but nothing
so
great
as
to
produce
an
extinction
of
life
on
any
part
of
the
globe
:
of
course
it
would
be
less
and
less
felt
the
further
back
we
go
in
the
history of
the
earth.
There
are,
however,
some
facts
apparently
opposed
to
it,
which
I
do
not
at
present
see
any
means
of
explaining
away.
The
excentricity
of the
earth's
orbit
would
produce
its
effect
at
regular
periods,
always
the
same,
and
at
each
of these
periods
marks
of
its
presence
should
be
left
—
the
mark
of
its
presence
which
I
would
require
would
of
course
be
more
or
less
an
important
change
in
the
types
of
animal
and
vegetable
life.
These
we
have,
but
they
do
net
recur
at
the
right
times,
some
being
separated
by
longer
periods
than
others.
Then,
again,
the
necessary
assumption
that
the
cold
did
not
extend
to
both
hemispheres
at
the
same
time
seems
inconsistent
with
some
facts
which
we
shall
have
to
consider
as
we
go
along;
more
especially
the
close
affinity
of
the
Arctic
and
Antarctic
whalebone
whales,
whose
ancestors
could
never
have
passed
from
the
one
Polo
to
the
other,
unless
the
cold
extended
over
the
whole
earth
to
such
a
degree
as
to
render
the
equatorial
seas
tolerably
cold,
or
unless
the
constitution
of
these
whales
was
something
very
different
from
that
of
their
descendants.
Mr.
Croll
next
goes
on
to
speculate
on
the
thickness
and
weight
of
the
ice-sheet,
and
the
extent
of
the
effect
it
would
produce.
"It
has
been proved
by
Mr.
Jamieson
that in
6ome
parts
of
Scotland
the
ice-sheets
must
have
been
at
least
3000
feet
Uiick.
Agassiz
thinks
that
in
some
parts
of
North
America
its
THE
GLACIAL
EPOCH.
49
thickness
could
not
have
been
less
than
a mile
;
the
thickness
of
the
ice
in
Scandinavia
and
other
parts
of
northern
Europe
must
have
been
enormous."
He
therefore
assumes
that
it
was
7000
feet
thick
at
the
North
Pole,
diminishing
in thickness
towards
the
Equator,
according
to
a
law,
into
the
consideration
of
which
we
need
not
here
enter, so
that
the
upper
surface
of
the
sheet
should
curve
exactly
the
same
as
the
land
beneath,
and
ends
by
bringing
out
the
result
that
this
distribution
of
ice
would
have
the
effect
of
producing
a
total
submergence
of
1000
feet
at
the
North
Pole,
and
a
elevation
(emergence)
of
1000
feet
at
the
South
Pole,
and
of
course
a
lesser
accumulation
of
ice
would
produce
a
correspondingly
lesser
amount
of
submergence
and
emergence.
Now
this
hypothesis
depends
upon
several
assumptions
the
withdrawal
of
any
of
which
would
be
fatal
to
it.
There
must
have been
a
vast
accumulation
of
ice
in
the
northern
hemisphere,
and
it
must
have
been
thickest
towards
the
Pole
;
there
must
have
been
not
one
submergence
but
several
;
and
these
must
have
taken
place
during
the
continuance
of
the
glacial
epoch.
Now,
first
as
to
the
ice
;
is
there
any
reason
for
supposing
that
at
the
present
time
it
increases
in
thickness
as
we
approach
the
Pole
?
I
have
not
met
with
any
statement
to
that
effect
;
and
if
the
voyagers
who
have
penetrated
furthest
had
observed
any
indication
of
its
becoming
so
they
would
surely
have
mentioned
it.
But
both
from
their
sketches
and
descriptions
it
appears
that
the
ice
and
glaciers
continued
of
the
same
thickness
as
they
advanced
to
the
north.
Into
this
question,
the
dimensions
and
extent
of
mountain
glaciers,
such
as
those
of
the
Alps,
do
not
enter.
The
inferences
of
Venetz
and
Charpentier
as
to
the
immense
extent
of
these
may
be
perfectly correct
;
but
it
does
not
follow that
their
height
must
have
been
correspondingly
great.
They
are,
however,
exceptional
and
detached,
and
do
not
affect
the
case
of
the
general
mass
of
polar
ice.
Of
course
in
the
case
of
sea
ice
it
would
probably be
of
a
greater
depth
the
further
north
we
go
and
the
greater
the
cold
there
is
;
but
that
is
nothing
to
the
purpose,
for
ice
is
lighter
than
water,
and
an
addition
to
its
depth
would
not
add
to
its
weight.
It
is
only
by
accumulation
above
the
level
of
the
sea
that
additional
weight
could
be
produced.
As
no
one has
reached
the
Pole
we
cannot
tell
from
observation
what
is
the
case
there,
but
we
may
reason
from
analogy
as
to
what
should
be
found
there.
If
we
assume
that
the
cold
becomes
more
intense
the
nearer
we
approach
the
Pole,
it
by
no
means
follows
that there
should
be
more
ice
there.
All
the
ice
of
these
regions
comes
from
snow.
Snow
is
produced
by
warm
vapour-bearing
clouds
or
atmosphere
coming
in
contact
with
cold
air.
It
never
falls
when
the
thermometer
is
much
below
32°
Fahr.
The
vapour-laden
warm
air
which
has
risen
from
the
tropics
and
ascended
above
the
colder
temperate
atmosphere
on
meeting
the frozen
air
of
the
Arctic
regions,
deposits
its
vapour
in
the
shape
of
snow.
It
is,
therefore,
always
on
the
boundary,
of
the
eternal
ice
that
snow
will
be
deposited.
The
Pole
itself
should
be
clear
from
fogs,
or
vapour,
or
snow.
How
far
the
direct
heat
of
the
sun
might
have
some
effect
in
producing
them
during
the
short
summer we
cannot
tell
;
but
we
know
that
that
is
not
the
origin
of
the
snows
which
fall
elsewhere.
It
comes
from
the
source
already
mentioned.
Increase
of
snow
and
ice
should
therefore
be
always
at
the
outer
margin
of
the
polar
ice
;
when
there
is
no
yearly
increase
in
the
cold,
when
it is
standing
water
between
heat
and
cold,
there
will
be
little
increase
in
the
breadth
or
thickness
of
the
ice,
for
the
heat
of
summer
will
melt
away
the
increase
of
winter.
But
when
the
cold
is
on
the
increase,
as
when
the
glacial
epoch
came
on,
its
last
year's
gain
would
not
be
melted
away
indeed,
but
still
there
would
be
no
increase
of
snow
or
ice
in
the
interior,
it
would
be
always
at
the
outer
margin
that
the
increase
would
go
on
;
and
the
effect
of
increased
cold
would
be,
not
to
pile
up
more
ice
upon
that
which
already
H
50
PRELIMINARY
INQUIRIES.
existed,
but
to
advance
the
margin
towards
the
equator
;
and
all
that
the
margin
would
gain
in
increase
would
be
the
few
years'
accumulation
which
might
have
fallen
before
it
was
left
behind
in
the
interior
by
the
general
advance
of
the
margin
towards
the
tropics.
The
glacial
ice,
according
to
my
view
therefore,
never
was
thicker
than
it
is
now
in
Greenland
and
the
Polar
Seas.
Of
course,
if
I
am
wrong
in
my
reasoning
as to
the
deposit
of
snow
in
the
Polar
regions,
and
if
the
analogy
of
what
is
now
to
be
seen
in
the
Polar
regions,
can
be
disregarded
or
explained
away,
I
then
must
abandon
my
position
and
acknowledge
that
here
is
no
limiting
power
but
time
to
the
thickness
winch
the
sheet
ice
may
have
attained
during
the
glacial
epoch.
I
would
only
say
in
that
case,
that
I
am
astonished
at
the
moderation
of
Agassiz
and
his
followers
in
limiting
it
to
a
mile.
The
rate
at
which
the
glaciers
of
the
Alps
move
(from
several
inches
to
a
foot
or
two
in
the
twenty-four
hours)
indicates
a
rate
of
increase
at
the
upper
end
of
many
feet
during
the
year
;
for
although
they
are,
as
it
were,
the
outlets
of
large
lakes
of
ice,
and
consequently
their
rate
of
movement
is
no
guide
as
to
the
amount
of
snow
which
may
have
fallen
on
every
square
foot
:
still
considering
how much
is
lost
by
melting,
the
rate
of
movement
shows
that
the
increase
is
very
great
;
or, if
wc
merely
reckon
all
the
rain
that
falls
during
the
year
in
our
own
country,
which
would
then
of
course
all
be
snow,
and
estimate
the
depth
of
ice
as
equal
to
that of
the
rainfall
it
will
be
a
very
low
estimate
to
take
that
at
a
foot
in
the
year
;
and
if
we
then
take
Mr.
Croll's
reduced
datinn
of
only
10,000
years'
continuance
of
cold
without
a
break,
we
should
on
that
ratio
have
a
thickness
about
two
miles
in
height.
Or
if
the
alternative
proposition
of
no
breaks
of
warmth
be
adopted,
and
his
100,000
years
be
accepted
as
the
limit
of time,
the thickness
on
the
same
ratio
would
reach
twenty
miles
in
height.
Again,
as
to
the
repeated
or
alternate
submergencies
and
elevations
during
the
continuance
of
the
glacial
epoch,
this,
no
doubt,
may
have
been,
but
it
can
scarcely
be
called
more
than
a
conjecture.
All
that
can
bo
said
of
the
facts
to
which Mr.
Croll
alludes
as
in
some
degree
supporting
this
idea
is,
that
they
are
not
irreconcilable
with
it.
They
are
as
consistent
with
the
subsidence
(which
all
admit)
having
taken
place
subsequent
to
the
retreat
of
the
ice
as
during
its
sub
sistence.
The
evidence
of
subsidence,
such
as
that
of
beds
containing
shells
being
found
overlying
the
drift,
points
to
a
date
subsequent
to
the
cessation
of
the
chief
rigour
of
the
glacial
epoch,
and
some
of
them
indicate
the
laj)se
of
long
periods of
time
between
its
close
and
the
submer
gence.
The
old
watercourses
and
striated
pavements
found
by
Mr.
Geikie
in
the
drift,
speak
neither
for
nor
against
submergence,
but
are
so
far
in
favour
of
a
break
in
the
intensity
of
the
cold,
although
they
do
not
necessarily
prove
this.
They
may
have
arisen
while
the
ground
where
they
occur
formed
part
of
the
outer
margin
of
ice,
and
vibrated
between
advance
and
retreat.
In
our
own
times,
without
any
apparent
alteration
in
our
climate,
an
immense
barrier
of
ice,
which
had
surrounded
the
east
coast
of
Greenland
for
four
centuries,
broke
up
in
the
year
1816,
and
in
that
and
the
following
year
disappeared
from
the
coast.
Its
disruption
and
re-
growth
might
simulate
some
of
the
phenomena
referred
to
by
Mr.
Croll.
Lastly,
if
the
elevation
or
transference
of
mountain
chains
and
vast
continents
from
one
hemisphere
to
another,
failed
to
disturb
the centre
of
gravity
of
the
earth,
the
existence
of
such
a
quantity
of
ice
as
it
seems
reasonable
to
admit
the
existence
of,
could
have
had
still
less
influence
especially
if
the
balance
of
the
earth
were
preserved
by
both
Poles
being
refrigerated
at
the
same
time.
51
CHAPTER
VI.
MAMMALS
CLASSIFICATION
AND
MUTUAL
AFFINITIES.
Starting
with
the
principles
which
I
have
laid
down
in
the
previous
chapters,
and
by
which
I
mean
to
be
guided
throughout
the
remainder
of
this
work,
the
affinity
of
species
becomes
of
vital
importance
to
our
whole
inquiry
;
and
not
merely
the
simple
question,
whether
this
or
that
species
be
allied
or
not,
but
the
degree
of
affinity,
becomes
almost
as
necessary
to
be
known.
While
it
is
indisputable
that
two
different
species
starting
on
the
career
of
change
at
the
same
time,
and
from
the
same
terminus,
can
never
be
expected
to
make
equal
progress
in
their
journey,
as
one
will
certainly
outstrip
the
other,
still
it
is
equally
clear
that
when
they
do
not
start
simultaneously,
those
which
have
started
first
ought
to
have
the
advantage
on
the
whole.
Thus
we
can
hardly
escape
from
the
conclusion
that
when we
find
two
animals
both
apparently
derived
from
the
same
stock,
but one
more
removed
from
its
typical
character
than
the
other,
that
one
dates
its
connexion
with
it
from
the
more
distant
period
of
time.
The
reader
will see
how
important
such
indications
may
be
when
questions
arise
as
to
the
relative
antiquity
of
the
separation
of
different
lands,
or
their
alternate
separation
and
reunion.
No
work
can
deal
satisfactorily
with
geographical
distribution
which
does
not
take
a
large
account
of
questions
of
affinity.
A
few
words
upon
the
chief
difficulties
which
meet
us
in
our
attempts
to
classify
the
animal
kingdom,
and
more
particularly,
mammals,
will
therefore
be
a
fitting
preamble
to
the
details
on
which
we
are
about
to
enter.
Assuming
that
species
are
derived,
the
one
from
the
other,
the
most
perfect
system
of
classification
would
of
course
be
simply
a
genealogical
tree
showing
the
descent
of
each.
The
materials
for
making
such
a
tree
are,
however,
beyond
our
reach.
The
records
that
have
been
kept
in
the
pages
of
geological
strata,
are
imperfect
and
interrupted,
and
we
do
not
even
know
that
we
can
always
read
the
language
;
and
of
by
far
the
greater
portion
no
record
has
been
preserved
at
all.
All
that
we
can
do,
therefore,
is
by
the
study
of
the
anatomy
and
physiology
of
those
living
species to
which
we
have
access,
to
endeavour
to
ascertain
their
affinities,
and
to
make
up
a
fictitious
tree,
in
the
best
way
we
can
from
the
materials
we
possess.
The
genealogical
form
of
classification
has,
however,
this
disadvantage,
that
we
can
at
no
rate,
and
by no
possible
contrivance,
squeeze
it
into
a
linear
arrangement.
Each
species
requires
a separate
tree
for
itself.
Scarcely
one
of
all
the
thousands
of
species
inhabiting
the
globe
can
come
into
the
same
arrangement
with
another,
for
if
two
appeared
in
the
same
genealogy,
one
of
them
must
either
be
the
parent
or
descendant
of the
other,
and
the
cases in
which
there
is
the
least
reason
for
supposing
that
this
has
been
the
case
with
living
species,
are
few
in
the
extreme.
But
although
this
be
the
case
with
individual
species,
it is
not
necessarily
so
with
larger
groups
;
52
MAMMALS.
a
group
from
which
another
has
sprung
may
still
subsist
in
its
descendants
;
some
groups
may
be
very
old,
others
quite
modern,
always supposing
that
the
groups
really
do
exist
in
nature,
and
are
homogeneous,
and
may
be
treated
as
entities.
If
we
may
so
treat
them,
the
best
substitute
for
a
linear
arrangement
is
to
have
as
few
and
as
short,
separate,
and
independent
lines
of
classification
or
descent
as
possible.
But
may
we
look
upon
such
groups,
families,
or
orders,
as
separate
and
independent
existences
?
or,
like
genera,
are
they
merely
artificial
aids to
memory
and
arrangement.
It
appears
to
me
that
they
are in
many
respects
more
real
than
modern
genera.
In
the
first
place,
the
different
orders
(or,
to
prevent
all
dispute
as
to
what
an
order
really
is,
let
us
say
some
of
the
different
groups)
are
undoubtedly
veiy
homogeneous.
"
In
all
the
instances
of
approach
of
species
of
one
order
to
other
orders,"
says
Mr.
Waterhouse,
in
speaking
of
the
classification
of
the
different
orders
in
one
of
the
best
of
his
many
excellent
papers,
"
there
is
not
a
single case
which would
fairly
bear out
the
notion
that
these
orders
imperceptibly
blend
into
each
other.
There
is
always
a
tolerably
well
marked
line
between
them.
The
aberrant
Bpecies
are
readily
traced
back
as
it
were
into
their
own
groups,
and
when
they
evince
an
approach
to
other
circles
it
is
rather
to
the
order
than
to
any
particular
species
of
the
order."*
In
the
next
place,
a
species
is
something
separate
and
distinct,
which,
although
composed
of
many
items,
is
still
only
a
unit.
This,
I
think,
is
an
inevitable
corollary
to
the
hypothesis
that
new
species
come
into
existence
in
one
body
of
many
individuals.
If
we
could
believe
the
same
of
orders
we
should
be
relieved
from
some
of
the
most
difficult
questions
attending
the
origin
of
species.
In
mammals,
one
of
these
is
the
relation
which
subsists
between
certain
Marsupials
which
represent
in
that
order
equivalent
groups
of
placental
Mammals,
and
the
difficulty
arises
in
attempt
ing
to
ascertain
the
respective
origin
of
these
Dromios.
The
Marsupials
have
many
claims
to
be
considered
one
of
the
oldest,
if
not
the
oldest,
order
of
Mammals.
The
following
table
of
the
sequence
in
which
Mammals
have
appeared
on
the
earth,
shows
in
a
general
way
(without
taking
into
account
disputed
or
exceptional
cases)
their
relative
priority,
so
far
as
geology
has
been
able
to
determine
it.
Geological
Epochs.
Recent
Pliocene
M
iocene
Upper
Eocene
Orders
of
Mammals.
Man
(?)
Monkeys
—
Proboscoid
Pachyderms
(Elephants)
—
Edentata,
(Megatheria,
&c.)
Insectivora
(Shrews,
Sec.)
—
Rodents
(Rats,
&c1.
—
Ruminants
—
Whales
Lower
Eocene
Bats
—
Tapyroid
Pachyderms
—
Carnivora
Secondary
for
mations
Marsupials
*
Waterhouse,
On
The
Classification
of
the
Mammalia
in
"
Annals
of
Nat.
Hist."
Vol.
xii.
p.
399. 1843.
CLASSIFICATION.
53
This
is
not
worth
much,
the
record
being
so
very
imperfect,
from
the
greater
part
of
the
earth
being
now
under
water,
or
having
been
in
ancient
times
above
water,
and
hence
having
furnished
few
or
no
organic
remains.
But
such
as
it
is,
it
gives
us
the
Marsupials
(with
a
questionable
trace
of
Inscctivora)
as
the
first
Mammals
which
appeared
on
the
face
of
the
earth.
In
addition
to
the
geological
reasons
for
believing
in
their
early
appearance,
the
fact
of
their
structure
being
lowest
in
the
scale
of
Mammalian
life
is
an
important
fact,
for
although
there
is
no
doubt
that
steps
are
taken
by
nature
both
backwards
and
forwards,
as
well
as
to
the
right
and
to
the
left,
still
her
general
course
has
been
forwards,
—
her
motto
has
always
been
"Excelsior,"
—
and
the
chances
are
thus
in
favour
of
the
lowest
having
appeared
first.
The
admirable
system
of
classification
(admirable
from
the
point
of
view
of
organization)
founded
by
Professor
Owen,
chiefly,
although
by
no
means
wholly,
on
the
characters of
the
brain,*
seems
to
place
it
beyond
doubt
that
the
relative
position
of
the
Marsupials
is
at
the
bottom
of
the
list,
and
that
the
place of
the
Rodents
and
Insectivora
is
next
to
them.
At
any
rate
that
one
or
other
of these
three
is
oldest.
If
the
Marsupials
are
not
the
oldest,
then
the
choice
lies
between
the
Insectivora
and
the
Rodents,
the
claim
of
the
former
being
strongest
on
geological
grounds,
of
the
latter
on
structural,
and
both
(if
we
reckon
the
Bats
as
Insectivores)
as
being
the
only
placental
inhabitants
found
in
Australia
along
with
the
Marsupials
;
the
equivalent
relations
above
referred
to
being
also
much
stronger
with
them
than
with
any
other
order.
These
equivalent
groups
are of
two
kinds.
One
displays
relations
of
analogy
which
have been
thought
to
typify
different
orders
of
placentals
;
as,
for
example,
the
pedimanous
and
frugivorous
opossums
are
supposed
to
have
foreshadowed
the
pedimanous
frugivorous
monkeys
;
the
marsupial
.hyena
or
tiger
(Thylacinus)
our
common
carnivora
;
the
wombat,
the
rodents
;
the
kangaroo,
the
ruminants
;
the
koala,
the
phytophagous
sun-bear
;
the
phascogales,
the
shrews
;
the
Echidna
and
Myrmecobius,
the
ant-eater.
This
relation
shows
parallelism
of
internal
structure,
but
little
external
resemblance.
.The
cow
has
a
complicated
digestive
apparatus
;
so
has
the
kangaroo.
Both
are
her
bivorous;
herbivorous
animals
require
a
more
elaborate
apparatus
for
digestion
than
carnivorous
(which
have
a
great
part of
the
business
of
assimilation
from
vegetable
to
animal
tissues
already
done
to
their
hand),
therefore
both
are
supplied
with
suitable
machinery
for
the
purpose;
it
is
not the
same,
but
so
far
alike as
is
necessary.
So
with
their
dentition
;
in
both
it is
adapted
for
grinding
vegetable
matter,
but
it
is
not
the
same.
As
to
external
appearance,
on
the
other
hand,
they
are
totally
void
of
resemblance.
This
kind
of
analogy
is
more
of
the
nature
of
homology
than
of
close
affinity.
The
other
analogy
is
of a
different
character.
It
is
a
close
personal
resemblance
promising
abso
lute
identity
throughout,
but not
fulfilling
the
promise.
The
frontispiece
is
an
illustration
of
this
sort
of
resemblance.
It
is
a
representation
of
Antechinus
minutissimus
and
Mus
delicattjixs,
two
Australian
Mammals,
copied,
by
Mr.
Gould's
permission,
from
figures
in his
magnificent
work
on
the
Mammals
of
Australia.
The
one
belongs
to
the
order
of
marsupials,
the
other
does
not
;
the
one
has
rodent
dentition,
the
other
has not
;
and
yet,
as
the
reader
sees,
the
two
are
so
identical
in
outward
appearance,
that,
on
a
hasty
inspection
the
most
experienced
naturalist
might
be
deceived,
and
might
set
them
down
as
two
species
of
mice.
The
same
thing
happens
with
oilier
species
of
rodents;
—
the
flying
Marsupial
Petaurus
is
a
close
counterpart,
in
outward
appearance,
of
some
of
the
flying
squirrels.
One
or
two
of the
Phascooales,
or
Antechini,
resemble
*
Owen,
in
"
Proceedings
of
Linnean
Society,"
vol.
ii.
p.
i.
1857.
54
MAMMALS.
the
jerboa.
Peragalea
LAGoTIS
has
considerable
resemblance
to
a
hare,
and
carries
its
habits
as
well
as
its
cars
—
making
a
form
in
the
grass
like
it.
The
'Wombat
has
been
compared
to
the
beaver,
or
capybara
;
but
there
is
not
sufficient
actual
similarity
of
appearance
in
them
to
suit
the
purpose
for
which
I
refer
to
these
analogies.
Now
let
us
take
two
(the
two
most
striking,
of
course)
of these
resemblances,
—
two
will
answer
as
well
as
a
dozen.
Let
us
take
the
mice
and
the
flying
squirrels as
opposed
to
the
Anteciuni
and
Petauri.
All
inhabit
the
same
quarter
of
the
world
(New
Guinea
and
Australia),
and
have
special
ordinal
structure
—
that
is,
a
structure
which
is
found
in
the
whole
of
the
order
to
which
each
belongs,
and
which,
therefore,
may
be
assumed
to
bo
of
primary
importance
and
essential
in
character.
The
two
first
have
the
rodent
dentition,
and
not
the
marsupial
structure
;
the
two
last
have
the
marsupial
structure,
but
not
the
rodent
dentition.
Can
these
so
similar
species
have
descended
the
one
from
the
other
?
Any
one
looking
at
the
frontispiece
would
say
that
the
animals
there
represented
must
have done
so
;
that
such
close
external
resemblance
is
impossible
on
any
other
supposition.
Assume
it
to
be
so,
both with
the
mice
and
the
flying
squirrels,
for
if
it
be
so
with
the
one,
the
same
rule
must
hold
with
the
other
—
we
should
then
have
two
animals
independently
of
each
other,
making
the
same
change,
both
from
a
marsupial
structure
to
a
rodent,
or
from
a
Todent
to
a
marsupial.
This
is,
I
think,
impossible.
Nature
never
repeats
herself.
Had
it
been
that
the
one
changed
to
a
rodent,
and
the
other
to
something
else
—
that
might
be
—
but
both
from
the
same
and
to
the
same
is
opposed
to
all
that
we
know
either
of
the
laws
of
nature
or of
the
doctrines
of
chance.
Therefore,
so
far
as
the
question
is
the
origin
of
species
from
a
single
progenitor,
I
feel
con
strained
to
admit
that
it
cannot
be.
But
may
not
the
whole
order
of
marsupials,
or of
rodents;
or
a
part
of
the
order
embracing
those
instances
where
close
resemblance
exists,
have
received
in
one
body
the
impulse
of
change
from
marsupial
to
rodent,
or
from
rodent
to
marsupial,
as
I
think
there
is
reason
to
hold
is
the
case
in
whole
bodies
of
individuals
composing
a
species
?
That
is
an
explanation
which
appears
to
me
to
have
some
germ
of
truth.
But
the
difficulties
do
not
cease
here.
We
have
taken
the
two
orders,
Marsupials
and
Rodents,
as
in
pari
casu,
and
looked
at
the
question
of
the
derivation
of these
similar
species
from
one
or
other,
as
if
either
might
be
indifferently
the
oldest
;
but
one
or
other
must
be
the
elder
—
they
could
scarcely
be
twins,
—
or
triplets
if
we
take
in
the
Inscctivora.
But
might
they
not
be
the
children
of
different
parents
?
Is
it
absolutely
necessary
that
all
Mammals
should
spring
from
one
progenitor
or
parent
stock
?
May
they
not
have
sprung
from
different
stocks
—
the
bat
from
the
pterodactyles
;
the
duck-bill,
or
ornithorhynchus,
from
birds
;
the
whale
from
the
ichthyosaurus,
and
the
general
mass
of
Mammals
from
terrestrial
reptiles?
—
or
have
the
whole
four
classes
of
Yertebrata
(mammals,
birds,
reptiles,
and
fishes)
been
developed
into
being
successively
in
descent,
not
one
from
the
other,
but
from
some
ancestor
common
to
them
all
?
All
these
inquiries
are
involved
in
the
argument
whether
there
is
such
a
thing
as
an
order
:
and
if
so,
whether
more
than one
part
or
member
of
it
can
receive
simultaneously
the
same
new
impress,
as
appears
to
be
the
case
in
species.
If
this
were
possible,
then
I incline
to
think
that
it
may
have
been
the
mode
in
which
the
orders
of
Mammals
came
into
being
;
but
if
that
hypothesis
must
be
excluded,
then
wo
are
driven
to
the
conclusion
that
each
class,
order,
or
natural
group,
started
from
some
one
parent
species,
into
which
had
been
drawn,
as
into
one
focus,
all
the
different
rays
of
previous
form
which
were
afterwards
dispersed
among
the
equivalent
types
which
sprung
from
it.
MUTUAL
AFFINITIES.
55
If
we
must
take
this
as
the
course
of
Nature,
it
will
then
bo
most
in
accordance
with
the
preponderance
of
evidence
to
admit
the
Marsupials
to
be
the
parent
from
which
all
the
other
Mammals
have
descended.
The
Rodents
would
come
next
—
indeed,
we
are
not
without
some
grounds
for
considering
them
first.
But
this
would
not
affect
our
classification
materially.
If
they
came
first,
they
gave
off
the
Marsupial
as
a
side
branch,
which
has
gone
no
further
;
and
they then
went
on
to
the
development
of
the
other
orders.
If
they
did
not
come
first,
but
descended
from
the
Marsupials,
they
left
them
behind,
standing
still,
and
proceeded
as
in
the
other
case.
Whether
the
Monotremes
cannot
be
treated
as
an
exception,
being
scarcely
Marsupials,
and
be
regarded
as
the
direct
source
of
the
Edentates
(ant-eaters,
&c.)
is
another
question
involved
in
doubt.
From
the
Rodents
would
then
spring
two
antagonistic
organizations
—
the
carnivorous
and
the
herbivorous,
a
partition
of
a
bifold
principle
embodied
in
the
Rodent
itself
—
some
of
them
like
the
rat,
being
both
vegetable
and
flesh-
feeders.
The
Insectivores
under
our
supposed
case
would
be
the
first
of
the
flesh-feeders.
The
lower
monkeys,
Prosimije,
I
would,
with
M.
Gratiolet,
refer
directly
to
the
Insectivores.
From
them
also
I
would
draw
the
Carnivores
;
and
from
the
Carnivores,
the
monkeys
and
man.
Reverting
to
the
herbivorous
section
of
the
Rodents,
there
seems
more
direct
evidence
of
the
descent
of
the
Pachyderms
from
them
(as
through
the
Toxodon,
the
Capybara
or
Hyrax,)
than
is
accessible
for
most
other
groups.
From
the
Pachyderms
to
the
Ruminants
and
Sea
Cows
follows,
as
a
natural
step.
The
whales
are
generally
supposed
to
be
drawn
from
the
same
source,
but
their
location
is
attended
with
peculiar
difficulty.
In
all
this,
however,
there
is
a.
multitude
of
objections,
puzzles,
and
contradictions,
which
can
only
be
got
over
by
an
amount
of reconciling
and
explaining
away
which
appears
to
me
to
bo
quite
an
exception
to
the
usual
simplicity
of
truth.
This
remark,
however,
only
applies
to
the
orders
and
general
mass
of
typical
forms,
each
taken
as
a
whole.
When
we
come
to
deal
with
the
individual
species
of
the
different
groups,
their
affinities
to
each
other
are
generally
simple
and
clear
;
and
this
inclines
me
to
think
that
we
have
probably
reached
the
truth
in
the
one
case,
and
not
in
the
other.
In
the
meantime,
however,
feeling
no
confidence
in
any
plan
of
descent
which
I
can
suggest,
I
shall,
in
the
main,
follow
the
system
of
classification
of
Mammals
laid
down
by
Professor
Owen
;
merely
deviating
from
it
in
those
points
on
which
I
have
formed
a decided
opinion
of
my
own
in
opposition
to
his
conclusions,
although
derived
from
the
same
premises.
That
arrangement
proposed
by
Professor
Owen
will
be
found
in
the
Appendix,
along
with
those
of Cuvier,
Milne
Edwards,
and
other
eminent
naturalists.
The
modification
of
it,
which
I
have
adopted,
has
been
given
at
the
commencement
of
this
volume,
coupled
with
a
table
of
the
first
geological
formations
in
which
remains
of
the
different
orders
and
families
have
been
discovered.
Before
leaving
this
subject
I
would
wish
to
draw
the
reader's
attention
to
one
noteworthy
inference
to
be
drawn
from
the
course of
descent,
whichever
view
be
adopted
;
and
that
is,
the
excessive
rarity
of
any
important
change
in
the
form
or
structure
of
animal
life.
When
we
think
of
the
extraordinary
prolificness
of
nature,
of
the
vast
diversity
of
form
and
organization
scattered
all
over
the
globe,
we
are
apt
to
imagine
that
the
changes
must
have
been
frequent.
But
on
more
carefid
inquiry
we
see
that
at
the
utmost
only
three
or
four
important
changes
have
succeeded
each
other
in
any
one
direction
from
the
first
appearance
of
Mammals,
down
to
the
present
day.
Taking
all
the
orders
together,
and
including
the
small
changes
in
each,
their
number
is
beyond
reckoning
;
but,
looking
at
important
changes
of
type,
the
number
is
as
I
have
stated.
-><;
CHAPTER
VII.
DISTRIBUTION
OF
MAN
BLACK
AND
WHITE
RACES.
The
races
of
man
as
defined
in
most
of
our
works
on
Ethnology
are
six,
—
the
Caucasian,
the
Mongolian,
the
American,
the
Ethiopian,
the
Malayan,
and
the
Australasian.
To
these
many
add
a
seventh,
the
Papuan
or
Oceanic.
Although
this
division
maintains
its
place,
it
does
so
more
from
the
difficulty
of
finding
a
satisfactory
substitute,
than
from
any
general
assent
to
its
propositions.
It
appears
to
be
unsupported
by
any
argument
or
consideration
beyond
this,
that
in
each
of
the
countries
allotted
to
these
seven
sections,
certain
different
tribes
or
races
of
mankind
are
found
;
but
that
they
are
all
of
equal
value,
or
that
no
other
varieties
can
be
pointed
to
showing
as
marked
distinctions
between
them
as
some
of
the
above,
no
one
who
has
thought
on
the
subject
will
affirm.
For
example,
is
there
no
more
difference
between
a
Mongolian
and
an
Englishman
than
there
is
between
an
Englishman
and
a
Negro
?
Most
people
would
say
that
the
Mongolian
was
half-way
between
the
European
and
the
Negro.
I
shall,
I
think,
presently
show
that
he
i.«
greatly
less
than half-way
towards
the
Negro
;
but
assuming
for
the
nonce
that
he
is
half-way,
what
kind
of
system
of
arrangement
is
that,
which
places
the
race
which
stands
half-way
between
two
others
on
the
same
footing
and
equality
as
those
which
are
separated
the
whole
way
?
Or
if
races
showing
lesser
degrees
of
difference
are
to
be
associated
with,
and
placed
on
the
same
platform
as
those
more
widely
separated,
why
are
not
all
minor
sections
to
be
taken
into
account
too
?
It
seems
plain that
the
present
usual
scheme
of
classification
is
erroneous,
both
in
principle
and
in
application.
The
opinion
which
I
have formed
is,
that
there
arc
no
more
than
two
great
divisions
of
man
kind,
equal
in
value
and
marked
by
characteristics
of
equal
importance,
each
of
which
again
is
divisible
into
an
indefinite
multitude
of
smaller
sections.
Speaking
roughly,
these
two
great
races
may
be
distinguished
as
the
Blacks
and
the
Whites.
Map
6
will
show
the
territory
which
I
think
is
occupied
by
each,
and
the
following
is
the
line
of
reasoning
by
which
I
have
arrived
at
this
conclusion.
If
wo
begin
our
survey
at
the
North
Pole,
we
find
one
race
of
men
(the
Esquimaux)
inhabiting
the
first
habitable
land
all
around
it.
The
Esquimaux
in
Greenland,
the
Esquimaux
at Baffin's
Bay,
the
Esquimaux
at
Bhering's
Straits,
and
the
Esquimaux
in
the
North
of Asia, are
one
and
the
same.
In
this
respect,
the
facts
with
regard
to
man
correspond
with
those
of
other
organized
beings.
The
faunas
and
floras*
of
all
the
countries
around
the
Pole
are
nearly
the
same.
*
The
words
Fauna
and
Flora
are
now
naturalized
common
use,
especially
names
of
plants
;
and
I
take
the
English,
and
being
so
it
would
be
a
mistake
to
speak
of
opportunity,
once
for
all,
to
claim
the
right
to
treat
all
th?m
in
the
plural
as
Faunae
and
Flora.
The
same
re-
such
words
as
English,
and
to
give
them
English
plural
mark
applies
to
a
multitude
of
other
scientific
words
in
terminations
when
Rpeaking
of
them
in
that
number.
IjO
160
ISO 140
I3ti
rio
no
toe
so
st
m
m
so
«
ZO
10
MAP
VI
.
SHOWING
THE
DISTRIBUTION
OF
MAN.
White
reuse
.
Black
rare
.
i ; i
:
; I
WO
J.50
AK'
i.U■
1-U)
ill'
HV
LAM*
I
•
oaHHtrs
Ml
70
dO SO
40
30
?«
10
rO
JO
60
70
SO
jkl
100
110
120
1,10
140
ISO
IS)
170
o
c
X
H
N
\t,V
i0
»i 40
SO
60
70
So 90
no
no
ao
no
iso
mo no
n_.0.c
i
s.„
DISTRIBUTION
OF
MAN.
57
Taking
the
East
of
Bhering's
Straits,
and
passing
southwards
into
America,
we
see
the
Esqui
maux
imperceptibly
changed
into
the
North
American
Indians.
The
Chinooks,
and
other
northern
tribes
nearest
the
Esquimaux,
cannot be
distinguished
from
them
;
and
the
tribes
next
to
them
on
the
south
again
pass
insensibly
into
the
red-skinned
tribes
of
middle
North
America.
These
pass
into
the
digger
tribes
of
California,
which
have
in
their
turn
many
of
the
characteristics
of
the
tribes
of
Central
and
South
America,
and
all
attempts
to
elevate
the
tribes
of
South
American
Indians
into
separate
races,
have
long
since
been
abandoned.
In
short,
it is
now
universally
acknowledged,
that
the
whole
of
both
North
and
South
America,
from
the Arctic
Sea
to
Tierra
del
Fuego,
has
been
peopled
by
one
race.
The
physical
characters,
the
traditions,
the
linguistic
affinities
of
the
different
tribes,
white,
red,
yellow, copper,
and
brown
skins,
all
bear
one
stamp.
We
are
compelled,
therefore,
to
receive
them
as
one,
and
that
one
identical
with
the
inhabitants
of
the
Arctic
regions.
Returning
to
Bhering's
Straits
again,
and
turning
westward,
we
find
the
Esquimaux
amal
gamated
with
the
Samoiedes
and
Tunguseans
of
North
-
Eastern
Asia,
who
in
their
turn
pass
into
the
Mongolians
on
the
south
;
and
so
strong
is
the
affinity
of
the
Esquimaux
with
these
tribes,
that
not
long
since,
apropos
to
two
North
American
Esquimaux
who
visited
the
United
State*,
and
were
the
subject
of
examination
and
ethnological
speculation,
Dr.
Pickering,
whom
no
one
will
accuse
of
an
undue
tendency
to
diminish
the
number
of
races,
stated
that
there
could
not
be
a
doubt
that
they
were
Mongolian.*
If
the
American
Indian
is
an
Esquimaux,
and
the
Esquimaux
is
a
Mongolian,
the
Mongol
must
be
an
American
Indian
too.
Additional
confirmation
of
this
view
is
furnished
by
the
Mongol
features
cropping
up
in
other
unexpected
places
in
America
;
for
example,
in
Patagonia
and
Tierra
del
Fuego.f
But
to
proceed
further.
Does
anyone
propose
to
erect
the
Tartars
into
more
than
a
tribe
of
the
Mongolians
?
No
:
—
and
it
is
only
when,
in
passing
westward,
we
reach
the Caucasus,
that
ethnologists
have
seen
evidences
of a
distinct
—
the
European
—
race.
And
what
are
these?
—
not
linguistic
peculiarities,
for
the
Sanscrit
is
the
root
of
all
the
languages
of
Europe
and
Northern
Asia
;
as
little
physical
structure,
for
the
beautiful
Georgian,
whose
almond-shaped
and
somewhat
oblique
eye
proclaims
descent
from
the
Mongols, can
scarcely
be
separated
from
the
Circassian
of
the
neighbouring
mountains.
The
Laps
and
Fins
are
Esquimaux
according
to
some,
Mongols
according
to
others
;
they
are
both,
and
Caucasians
into
the
bargain.
The
Tartarian
extraction
Of
the
Russian
peasant
is
scarcely
disputed,
"
Grades
le
Russe,"
said
Napoleon,
"
et
vow
en
trouverez
le
Tartar
/"
neither
is
there
any
room
to
raise
up
a
wall
of
division
between
the
Russian
and
the
Pole,
or
the
Russian
and
Slavonian.
In
fact,
there
is
no
point
at
which
a
line
can
be
drawn,
separating
the
Englishman
from
the
Tartar,
as
types
of
great
races.
Not
as
tribes,
families,
or
sections
;
there
is
no
difficulty
in
distinguishing
these,
any
more
than
there
is
in
distinguishing
between
the
Scotsman
and
the
Englishman
—
the
Gael
and
the
Lowlander
—
*
"Dr.
Pickering
referred
to
two
Esquimaux
now
on
with
one
minor
exception,
America
was
originayll
peopled
exhibition
in
this
city.
From
their
low
stature,
florid
from
the
north-west
by
the
sea-going
tribes
following
the
complexion,
broad,
flat
countenance,
with
the
profile
very
coast,
personal
inspection
now
satisfied
him
that
the
Es-
slightly
projecting,
one
would
be
disposed
to
reject
the
quimaux
are
Mongolians,
and
that
there
is
no
distinct
idea
of
affinity
with
the
general
aboriginal
population
of
physical
race
of
man
in
the
Arctic
regions."
—
Proceed-
this
continent.
But
the
sea-going
tribes
of
north-west
ings
of
the
Boston
Society
of
Natural
History,
vol.
ix.
America,
of
which
he
had
seen
the
Chinooks,
are
inter-
p.
182. (April,
18G3.)
mediate
in
aspect,
having
very
generally
a
lighter
com-
t
Seethe
portraits
of
a
Patagonian
in
"Wilkes'
Voyage,"
plexion
and
less
prominence
of
profile
than
the
interior
or
and
of "
Jemmy
Button,"
(especially
that
in
sailor's
dress),
hunting
tribes.
In
addition
to
his
published
opinion,
that,
in
Fitzroy*s "
Voyage
of
the
Beagle."
I
58
MAMMALS.
the
Irishman
and
the
Kentish
yeoman.
All
aro
tribes
which
have
acquired,
from
force
of
cha
racter,
locality,
physical
conditions
of
life,
or
other
circumstances,
features
or
dispositions,
to
a
certain
extent,
distinctive
;
but
as
great
original
races,
they
cannot be
distinguished
one
from
the
other.
Next
to
the
Mongol
tribes,
we
have
the
Chinese
and
Japanese,
which
have
no
claims
to
more
than
tribal
distinction
;
distinct
races
they
are
not.
Of
the
Hindoos,
Major-General
Briggs
truly
says
:
—
"
The
Hindus
are universally
acknowledged
to
be
of that
branch
of
the
human
family
denominated
by
Blumenbach
Caucasian,
and
they
believe
they
invaded
India
from
the
north-west."*
Neither
are
the
Affghans
and
Persians
any
thing
more
than
tribes,
and
as
little
are
the
Greeks,
Turks,
Egyptians,
and
Arabs
of
the
shores of
the
Mediterranean.
The
Malays,
or
brown
tribes
of
the
Indian
Archipelago,
are
farther
separated
than
any
of
the
rest
from
the
other
inhabitants
of
the
continents
of
Asia
and Europe
;
and
if
any
third
race,
besides
the
whites
and
the
blacks,
is
to
be
admitted,
it
should
be
the
Malays.
Still,
there
are
points of
affinity
between
them
and
the
Chinese
and
other
Mongolian
tribes
which
prevent
their
being
so
received.
There
is
as
much
difference
between
the
South
American
Indian
of
the
Amazons,
and
many
of
the
tribes
of
North
American
Indians,
as
there
is
between
the
Malay
and
the
Chinese;
and
if
we
retain
the
two
former
as
one,
in
defiance
of
their
physical
dissimilarity,
on
what
parity of
reasoning
can
we
separate
the
two
latter
?
I
regard
the
Malays
as
merely
one
of
the
many
offshoots
or
tributaries
of
the
great
white
race.
Now
there
is
one
thing
to
be
observed
regarding
all
the
lands
and
people over
which
we
have
cast
our
eyes,
viz.
that
they
are
conterminous
and
continuous
;
and
not
only
so
now,
but
if
we
'suppose
the
northern
hemisphere
to
be
sunk
one
hundred
fathoms
(as
shown
in
Map
2),
even
then
there
is
easy
communication
between
all
the
unsunk
portions
of
this
great
extent
of
land.
The
Straits
of
Bhering
are
sufficiently
near
to
furnish
such
a
people
as
the
Esquimaux
with
an
easy
means
of
transit
from
one
continent
to
the
other
at
any
time
;
and
there
is
no
other
physical
barrier
of
any
kind
to
interrupt
the
progress of
man
from
Cape
Horn
to
Singapore.
No
doubt
Ceylon
is
separated
from
India
;
and
Sumatra,
Java,
and
Borneo,
all
of
which
are
inhabited
by
the
Malay
stock,
are
separated
from
Siam
and
China
by
straits
and
seas
;
but
these
are
narrow,
and
would
form
no
obstacle
to
the
passage
of
a
moderately
maritime
people,
and
in
addition,
a
rise
of
the
land
to
the
extent
of
100
fathoms
would
unite
the
whole
of
these
islands
with
the
continent
(see
Map
1).
As
already
said,
however,
in
the
East,
after
we
reach
the
south-eastern
extremity
of
Borneo,
the
shallow
seas
give
place
to
an
unfathomable
ocean,
out
of
which
spring
lands,
which,
although
comparatively
near
in
point
of
distance,
and
without
geological
distinction,
bear
a
different
fauna,
a
different
flora,
and
a
different
race
of
men.
These
two
regions
are
separated
from
each
other
by
the
Straits
of
Macassar
and
the
Straits
of
Lombock
;
Borneo,
Java,
Sumatra,
and
the
Malayan
Archipelago,
lying
on
the
one
hand
;
Celebes,
Gilolo,
New
Guinea,
and
Australia,
on
the
other.
It
seems
a
reasonable
inferenco
from
these
facts,
that
Borneo,
Java,
and
Sumatra,
have
been
connected
at
some
former
period
with each
other
and
the
mainland,
while
Celebes,
New
Guinea,
and
the
neighbouring
islands,
have
never
been
connected
with
them,
or
at
least
have
been
separated
from
them
for
a
long
period.
The
former
countries,
says
Mr.
Wallace
in
a
recent
paper
on
the
subject,
"are,
in
fact,
still
connected,
and
that
so
completely,
that
an
*
Briggs
on
the
Aboriginal
Tribes
of
India,
in
"
Reports
of
British
Assoc."
1850,
p.
160.
DISTRIBUTION
OK
MAN.
59
elevation
of
only
300
feet
would
nearly
double
the
extent
of
tropical
Asia.
Over
the
whole
of
the
Java
Sea,
the
Straits
of
Malacca,
the
Gulf
of
Siam,
and
the
southern
part
of
the
China
sea,
ships
can anchor
in
less
than
fifty
fathoms.
A
vast
submarine
plain
unites
together
the
apparently
disjointed
parts
of
the
Indian
zoological
region,
and
abruptly
terminates
exactly
at
its
limits
in
un
unfathomable
ocean.
The
deep
sea
of
the
Moluccas
comes
up
to
the
very
coasts
of
Northern
Borneo,
to
the
Strait
of
Lombock
in
the
south,
and
to
near
the
middle
of
the
Strait
of
Macassar.*
May
we
not,
therefore,
from
these
facts
very
fairly
conclude
that,
according
to
the
system
of
alternate
bands
of
elevation
and
depression,
which
seems very
generally
to
prevail,
the
last
great
rising
movement
of
the
volcanic
range
of
Java
and
Sumatra
was
accompanied
by
the
depression
that
now
separates
them
from
Borneo,
and
from
the
Continent
?"f
The
fauna
and
flora
of
the
Malayan
islands,
too,
is
closely
allied
to
the
fauna
of
the
neigh
bouring
continent.
The
elephant,
rhinoceros,
and
tapir,
found
in
Sumatra,
are
also
found
in
Southern
Asia.
Every
family,
most
of
the
genera
and
many
of
the
species
of
birds
and
insects,
which
are
found
on
these
islands,
are
also
to
be
met
with
on
the
continent.
On
the
other
hand,
the
species
found
in
New
Guinea,
Celebes,
and
the
islands
to
the
east
and
south,
are
of
a
totally
different
type,
in
many
respects
distinct
and
peculiar
to
themselves,
but
in
others
showing
Australian
affinities.
.Reasoning
from
these
facts,
geologists
have
conceived
that
while
Sumatra,
Java,
Borneo,
and
the
Philippine
Islands,
are
parts
of
Asia
separated
from
it
at
no
distant
period,
Celebes,
Timor,
the
Moluccas,
New
Guinea,
and
Australia,
are
remnants
of
a
vast
submerged
continent,
traces
of
the
existence
of
which
appear
in
the
coral
islands
of
the
Pacific
Ocean,
and
in
the
affinities
*
It
is
perhaps
right to
say that
it is
not
to
be
considered
as
absolutely
settled,
that
the
Straits
of
Mac
assar
are
of
great
depth
all
through.
The
western
or
Malayan
side
is
shallow
all
along
the
coast
of
Borneo.
The
soundings
which
have been
taken
show
great
depth
on
the
cast,
both
to
the
north
and
south,
but
in
the
centre
an
equal
depth
is
not
so
well ascertained.
In the
largest
and
most
detailed
map
of
soundings
which
has
been
published,
viz.
that
by
Jacob
Swartz,
the
soundings
taken
at
the
middle
of
the
straits
gradually
increase
on
the
western
side
from
fourteen
to
thirty-five
fathoms,
and
a
few
scattered
soundings
in
mid-channel
are
noted
where
the
depth
varies
from
twenty
to
forty
fathoms
:
these
are
continued
until
within
about
ten
miles
of
the
coast
of
Celebes,
when
no
more
are
recorded.
One
is
apt
to
suppose
on
seeing
this,
that
a
bank
of
from
twenty
to
forty
fathoms
in
depth
extends
across
the
middle
part of
the
straits
;
but
in
the
first
place
the
want
of
soundings
for
ten
miles
across
on
the
side
where
we
know
the
water
to
be
deepest,
and
where
a
little
to
the
north
and
south
no
soundings
are
to
be
had
with
a
hundred-fathom
line,
prevent
us
assuming
this
;
and
in
the
next
place,
on
personal
inquiry
at
Mr.
Wal
lace,
he
assures
me
of
his
firm
conviction
that
there
is
deep
water
there
as
well
as
on
each
side
of
it,
and
informs
me
that
the
scattered
sounding.3
to
which
I
have
referred
are
not
to
be
taken
as
indicating
the
general
depth
around
the
spot
marked,
but merely
the
depth
at
the
particu
lar
spot,
usually
a
reef
or
a
sand-bank,
where
they
occur
He
had
met
with
residents
who
remembered
the
taking
of
these
soundings,
and
they
informed
him
that
the
way
in
which
the
officer
who
was
charged
with
the
duty
pro
ceeded
was
this
:
ho
allowed
his
vessel
to
drift
about
during
the
night
with
a
light
anchor
attached
to
a
forty-
fathom
cable
hanging
overboard,
and
when
this
caught
upon
a
bank
or
reef,
then
soundings
were
taken
and
registered,
but
his
forty-fathom
anchor
might
have
been
swinging
about
all
around,
without
touching
the
ground.
With
this
information
to
guide
us
in
estimating
the
value
of
the
soundings
in
Jacob
Swartz's
map,
it is
clear
that
they
are
worth
nothing
for
our
purpose,
unless
where
numerous
and
close
together.
I
therefore
have
adopted
Mr.
Wallace's
view,
and
assumed
that
the
water
on
the
eastern
side
of
the
Straits
of
Macassar
is
throughout
of
very
great
depth.
t
See
paper
by
Mr.
Wallace
in
Linn.
Soc.
Proa,
Feb.
1860.
See
also
a
communication
by
Mr.
Wallace
in
the
lbti
for
October
1859.
On
this
last
point
I
am
not
pre
pared
at
once
to
go
unreservedly
along
with
Mr.
Wallace.
It
may
be
that
the
surrounding
depression
was
due
to
a
more
extensive
general
previous
sinking,
and
that
the
area
in
question
has
been
again
raised
by
the
volcanic
action
referred to
by
Mr.
Wallace,
stretching
through
or
run
ning
across
the
general
depression.
The
theory
of
alter
nate
bands
of
elevation
and
depression
may
be
pushed
too
far.
60
MAMMALS.
which
can be
traced
between
some
of
the
plants
and
animals
inhabiting
widely
separated
por
tions
of
the
supposed
continent.
On
this
subject
Professor
Owen
says,
"Certain
it
was
that
geologists
had
conceived
that
the
islands
on
the
south
of
the
present
great
Continent
of
Asia
might
be
remnants
of
some
antecedent
very
distinct
group
of
land,
and
naturalists
(and
he
would
more
especially
mention
Sir
J.
Emerson
Tennent,
who
had
paid
so
great
attention
to
the
fauna
of
Ceylon),
had
brought
to
their
knowledge
a
host
of
facta
confirmatory
of
the
idea that
Ceylon
was
not
a
dismemberment
of
India,
but
part
of
a
distinct
and
antecedent
continent.
In
confirmation
of
that
idea,
they
had
the
result
of
the
geological
researches
of
Cautley,
Falconer,
and
others
in
India,
which
seemed
to
show
that
the
Himmalayahs
had
risen,
lifting
up
the
fossiliferous
beds
on
their
present
slopes
within
comparatively
recent
geographical
time,
proving
that
India
had
been
the
site
of
one
of
the
latest
of
these
greatest
systems
of
upheaving
forces
that
resulted
in
the
formation
of
new
continents."
*
We
find,
in
the
islands
and
coral
islets
surrounded
by
this
unfathomable
ocean,
a
race
which
will
in
no
respect
harmonise
with,
and
by
no
ingenuity
can be
made
to
fit
into,
the
brown
tribes
of
the
Malayan
Peninsula
and
Islands,
and
still
less
the
white
races
of
Asia
:
this
race
is
that
known
as
the
Papuans,
or Negritos.
It
is
a
new
and
distinct
race,
the
like
of
which
we
have
not
previously
met
with.
We
shall
find
its
like,
however,
if
we
turn
to
Africa,
to
the
south
of that
point
where
a
barrier
as
effective
as
the
deep
sea
of
Celebes
has
interrupted
the
continuity
of
the
land,
viz.
the
Desert
of
Sahara.
It
does
not
much
matter
whether
we
look
upon
that
barrier
as
consisting
of
the
present
arid desert
or
a
broad
sea
occupying
its
place.
Either
barrier
would
probably
be
sufficient
to
stop
the
extension
of
the
northern
race
into
Africa
south
of
the
desert.
Be
that
as
it
may,
certain
it is
that
something
has
isolated
South
Africa
from
North
Africa,
for
north
of
the
desert
we
have
one
fauna
and
flora,
and
south
of
it
another
;
and
as to
man,
north
of
the
Sahara
we
have
the
Arabs
—
undoubtedly
a
por
tion
of
the
white
northern
race
—
while south
of
it
we
have
a
new
race,
the
Negro,
as
distinct
from
them
as at
the
other
barrier
the
Papuans
and
surrounding
nations
are
distinct
from
the
Malays
and
Chinese.
And
strange,
too,
both
of these
new
races
lying
on
the
south
side
of these
respective
barriers
have
much
in
common.
Both
are
black,
both
have
their
hair
frizzled
or
woolly,
both
have
broad
noses,
thick
and
prominent
lips,
receding
foreheads
and
chins,
and
what
should
be
the
white
of
the
eye
of a
turbid
yellow,
or,
as
a
recent
writer
phrases
it
when
speaking
of
the
aborigines
of Fraser's
or
Great
Sandy
Island,
near
Brisbane
in
Australia,
"
They
appear
to
be
very
bilious,
for
what
ought
to
be
the
white
of
the
eye
is
a
dirty
yellow."
f
Both
have
broad
shoulders
and
deep
chests,
both
are
inferior
in
the
make
of
their
lower
extremities,
having
long
lanky
legs,
splay
feet,
and
curved
shins,
and
of
bath
it
may
be
said,
"
From
every
pore
of
him
a
perfume
falls."
Two
distinctions
have
been
attempted
to
be
drawn
between
them,
—
the
one
that
the
colour
of
the
African
is
black
over
brown,
while
that
of
the
Papuans
is
blue
over
black,
or
black
with
a
bluish
tinge,
but
this
is
now
known
to
be
a
mistake.
The
blue
black
of
the
Papuans
is
due
to
some
artificial
application,
"pro-
*
Owbn,
in
"
Proceedings
of
Geographical
Society,"
vol.
that
peninsula,
than
belonging
to
Sumatra
or
the
Malayan
vi.
p.
44,
1862.
As we
go
along,
I
think
we
shall
see
reason
Peninsula.
to
doubt
the
sufficiency
of Sir
J.
Emerson
Tennent's
t
"
Narrative
of
a
Trip
from
Sydney
to
Peak
Downs,
arguments
against
the
appurtenancy
of
Ceylon
to
India,
Queensland,
and
back,"
by
E.
S.
II.,
London,
1864,
p.
4.
and
rather
to
look
upon
it
as
a
dismembered
portion
of
DISTRIBUTION
OF
MAN.
61
bably
the decoction
of
the
bark
of a
tree,
possibly
the
'
rosamala'
of
commerce."*
The
other
that
the
hair of
the
African
spreads
over
the
whole
surface
of
the
head,
while
that of
the
Papuan
grows
in
small
tufts,
each
of
which
is
separate
from
the
rest.
But
there
are
African
tribes,
the
Hot
tentots
and
Bushmen,
for
example,
which
have
the
hair
growing
in
this
same
tufty
fashion
;
and
I
see
that
M.
Du
Chaillu
observed
the
same
thing
in
the
pigmy
race,
which he
met
with
in
his
last
expedition
into
the
interior
of
West
Africa
—
a
race
which
may
possibly
be
a
tribe
of
the
Bushman
variety of
the
African
race.
Such
distinctions,
moreover,
even
although
well
founded,
are
only
of
minor
significance,
and
point
to
a
distinction
of
tribes,
not
of
races.
So
far
as
physical
character
goes
then,
the
Papuans
and
Africans
are
clearly
allied.
How
far
the
languages
are
so
is
a
point
which
is
not
yet
settled,
but
in
one
respect
they
certainly
have
an
affinity.
Some
of
the
African
tribes
make
a
peculiar
clucking
noise
in
their
speech.
This
is
a
much
more
remarkable
character
than
those
who
have
not
heard
it
have
any
idea
of.
I
remember
on
one
occasion
dining
in
company
with
some
missionaries
destined
for
Caffirland,
one
of
whom
was
a
Caffir
who
had
been
brought
to
this
country
in
early
youth,
and had
been
educated
as
a
divinity
student
in
order
to
go
back
as
a
missionary
to
his
native
land.
He
gave
us
examples
of
the
Caffir
language,
talking
in his
native
tongue,
and
the
clucking
was
so
like
the
drawing
of
corks
and
pouring
liquid
out
of a
bottle,
that
on
one
of
the
English
missionaries
who
was
to
accompany
him
saying
that
he
meant
to
take
lessons
from
him
in
the
language
in
his
cabin
on
the
way
out,
one
of
the
guests
cautioned
him
that
the
sound
of
so
many
corks
being
drawn
would
destroy
their
character
for
temperance
with
the
rest
of
the
passengers.
But
this
clucking
would
appear
to
be
a
character
of
the
language
of
some
of
the
Oriental
as
well
as
the
African
black
tribes.
Mr.
Earl,
in
speaking
of
the
North
Australians
who
have
a
certain
affinity
to
the
Papuans,
says
:
—
"In
the
Croker
Island
dialect
a
cluck
occasionally
occurs
in
the
middle
of
a
word,
which
is
effected
by
striking
the
tongue
against
the
roof
of
the
mouth.
"t
This
illustra
tion
shows
that
there
are
grounds
for
looking
for
proof
of
relationship
between
the
African
and
the
Oriental
negroes
in
their
linguistic
affinities
as
well
as
in
their
physical
attributes.
I
do
not
in
any
way
go
along
with
the
bold
conjecture
hazarded
by
Professor
Agassiz
that
"the
lan
guages
of
different
races
of
men
were
neither
more
different
nor
more
similar
than
the
sounds
characteristic
of
animals
of
the
same
genus,
and
their
analogy can
no
more
be
fully
accounted
for
on
any
hypothesis
of
transmission
or
tradition
than
in
the
case
of
birds
of
the
same
genus
uttering
similar
notes
in
Europe and
in
America."
J
On
the
contrary,
I
think
that
the
structure
and
roots
of
language
preserve
decided
evidence
of
the
intellect
of
man,
and
furnish
valuable
aid
in
tracing
the
affinities
of
nations.
To
meet
the
requirements
of
the
hypothesis
of
a
common
origin
for
the
languages
of
the
African
negro,
Oriental
negro,
and
Australian,
it
is
only
necessary
that
the
radical
structure
of
all
the
languages
should
be
the
same
;
the
languages
themselves
may
be
widely
different
and
wholly
unintelligible
to
the
different
tribes.
A
few
remote
connexions
with
the
main
staple
of
the
language
are
probably
all
that
could
be
expected,
in
countries
so
long
and
so
widely
separated
;
but
each
country,
according
to
the
hypothesis,
should
have
one
type
to
itself,
and
each
should,
in
* "Ethnographical
Library,"
vol.
i.
"The
^Native
t
Earl,
op.
cit.,
p.
222.
Races
of
the
Indian
Archipelago—
Papuans,"
by
George
\
Agassiz,
in
"
Proceed.
Amer.
Acad.
Arts
and
Sei-
Windsor
Earl.
London,
1863.
P.
47.
euces,"
vol.
iii.
p.
7.
1857.
62
MAMMALS.
some
way,
however
faint,
be
connected
with
the
other.
That
each
has
a
common
type
to
itself,
wo
know
to
be
the
case.
The
Australian
languages
are
all
referable
to
one
type.
So
are
the
African
(those
north
of
the
Sahara
always
excepted).
Mr.
Burton*
says of
one
of
the
tribes
on
the
Cameroon
Mountains
on
the
west
coast
of
Africa
:
—
"
Their
dialect
is
a
branch
of
the
great
South
African
family
whose
type
is
the
Kaffir
tongue."
And
Dr.
Kirk
informs
me
that
the
same
thing
is
the
case
with
the
languages
of
the
Zambesians
and
those
of
the
tribes
stretching
across
Africa.
The
Papuan
language
in
like
manner
has
many
dialects.
The
inquiry
leaves
an
alternative
problem
for
the
philologist
to
solve,
viz.,
either
to
point
out
the
presence
of
some
common
elements
of
structure
showing
connexion
between
the
languages
of
all
three
countries,
—
Africa,
Papua,
and
Australia,
or
else to
show
some
discrepancy
wholly
inconsistent
with
it.
They
have
this
basis
to
start
from
—
that
the
foundation
and
structure
of
these
languages
is
different
from
that
of
the
tribes
north
of
the
barriers
above
mentioned.
Let
us
now
see
what
peoples
and
countries
may
be
referred
to
this
black
stock.
Taking
Africa
by
itself,
it
is
scarcely
necessary
to
go
into
any
argument
to
prove
that
all
the
tribes
on
that
continent
south
of
the
Saharan
barrier
belong
to
the
same
race.
That
may
be
safely
assumed
as
proved.
Nearest
to
Africa,
and,
only
separated
from
it
by
a
comparatively
shallow
connecting
sub
merged
neck
of
land,
lies
Madagascar.
The
present
state
of
its
population
requires
to
be
sub
jected
to
qualification
before
it
can
be admitted
as
relevant
to this
inquiry
—
a
considerable
portion
of
it
bearing
strong
evidence
of
colonization
by
the
Malays.
This
is
of
comparatively
recent
date,
probably
within,
or
not
much
beyond
our
own
historic
times,
and
of
course
cannot
be
taken
into
account
in
speculating
on
the
aboriginal
population
of
the
island.
The
result
of
this
immigration
is
not
only
a
certain
amount
of
Malay
element
among
a
portion
of
the
Malagese,
but
the
oc
currence
in
their
language
of
a
considerable
body
of
Malayan
and
Javanese
words.
That
such
a
colonization
should
have
taken
place
is
the
more
remarkable
when we
look
at
the
great
dis
tance
(3000
miles)
from
Madagascar
to
Java
and
the
Malay
peninsula.
Ethnologists
have
attempted
to
account
for
these
peculiarities
by
supposing
that
a
fleet
of
Malay
pirates
had
been
tempest-
driven
on
the
coast
of
Madagascar,
and,
unable
to
find
their
way
back,
had
at
first
been
able
to
protect
and
establish
themselves,
and
afterwards
becoming
absorbed
in
the
general
population
by
intermarriage,
had,
besides
communicating
a
portion
of
their
blood,
imparted
some
of
their
knowledge,
cultivation,
and
language.
Mr.
Crawford,
speaking
on
this
subject,f
says
:
"
The
people
of
Madagascar
(that
is,
the
aboriginal
people)
are
not
Malays,
nor
do
they
bear
any
resem
blance
to
them.
They
are,
in
fact,
negroes
;
but
negroes
of
a
particular
description.
They
are
negroes
in
the
same
sense that
Portuguese,
and
Laps,
and
Englishmen,
Germans
and
Spaniards,
are
European,
and
in
no
other."
This
is
exactly
what
may
be
said
not
only
of
the
Malagese,
but
of
all
the
other
black
tribes
spread over
the
islands
of
the
Southern
Ocean.
The
Mauritius
and
Bourbon
Islands
may
be
dismissed
as
islands
which
were
probably
not
inhabited
at
the
time
of
the
original
peopling
of
the
other lands
of
which
I
speak.
The
Dodo
would
never
have
survived
to
furnish
even
a
solitary
specimen
or
two
to
our
museums
had
the
islands
on
which
it
lived
been
peopled
by
savages,
whether
black
or white,
or,
I
should
rather
say,
had
they been
peopled
at
all.
Next,
looking
farther
eastward,
it
will
scarcely
be
disputed
that,
whatever
objections
there
may
*
Burton,
in "
Proceedings
of
Geog.
Soc."
p.
241.
(1862.)
t
Crawford,
in
"
Proc.
Geog.
Soc."
vol.
ii.
pp.
69, 70.
(1862,
1863.)
DISTRIBUTION
OF
MAN.
63
be
to
ranking
the
Oriental
negroes
with
the
African
negroes,
all
the
New
Guinea
blacks
are
of
one
race,
whether
natives
of
Papua
itself,
or
of
any
of
the
numerous
islands
lying
around
it.
Some
authors,
doubtless
led
astray
by
the
apparently
parallel,
but
really
most
distinct
case
of
the
Hill
tribes
in India,
&c.,
have
attempted
to
make
a
distinction
between
the
natives of
the
hills
and
those
of
the
coast,
in
Papua
and
other
islands.
This
distinction
is
shown
by
the
most
trustworthy
authors*
to
be
without
foundation,
except
so
far
as
we
have
in
our
own
lands
a
population
differing
somewhat
according
to
the
nature
of
their
occupation
and
localities.
In
like
manner,
the
negritos
of
the
Phi
lippine
Islands
cannot
be
separated
from
the
other
Papuan
blacks
;
and
if
it
be
true
that
there
are
negritos
in
Formosa,
(which
Mr.
Swinhoe's
recent
observations
gives
us reason
to
question),
they
also
without
doubt
belong
to
the
same
race
;f
and,
lastly,
there
is
an
overwhelming
weight
of
testimony
that
all
the
oceanic
tribes
of
Polynesia
belong
to
the
same
race.
The
natives
of
the
different
groups
of
islands,
no
doubt,
have
each
some
peculiar
characters of
their
own,
but
all
belong
to
one
type,
and
that
type,
the black
Papuan.
Some
of
the
islands,
such
as
New
Zealand,
are
indeed
sup
posed
to
have
been
colonized
only
very
recently,
and
within
the
historical
epoch
;
but
if
so,
they
have
been
colonized
from
the
original
black
stock.
There
is,
perhaps,
more
difference
when we
come
to
estimate
the
discrepancies
and
resemblances
between
the
Papuans
and
Australians.
In
doing
so,
there
are
various
collateral
points
to
be
taken
into
consideration.
In
the
first
place,
we
must
remember
that
although
the
Papuan
Islands,
or
Austro-Malayan
region
and
the
Polynesian
have
numerous
plants
and
animals
peculiar
to
themselves,
both
their
faunas
and
floras
have,
to
a considerable
extent,
an
Australian
character.
In
mammals,
for
example,
while
the
Indian
region,
including
Borneo,
Java,
Sumatra,
&c.,
possesses
no
marsupials,
but
abounds
in
forms
of
the
most
highly
developed
mammals,
the
Austro-Malayan
or
Papuan
region
does
not,
but
has
several
marsupials
;
and
Polynesia
so
far
accords
with
it,
that
its
only
mammals
belong
to
an
order
also
found
in
Australia
—
the
bats.
In
birds,
as
Dr.
Sclater
and
Mr.
Wallace
have
shown,
although
the
actual
number
of
species
common
both
to
Australia
and
Papua
be
not
great
(about
twenty-five
out
of
one
hundred
and
eighty-six)
J
there
is
a
great
affinity
in
many
remarkable
genera,
and
the
resemblance
extends
not only
to
genera
which
have
been found
in
both,
but
also
to
those
which
are
absent
in
both,
although
present
in
strong
force
in
the
neighbouring
Indian
district.
Dr.
Giinther
has
come
to
similar
conclusions
as
regards
the
Reptiles
and
Batrachians.
In
Ento
mology,
Australian
relations
also
occur,
some
of
which
(in
the
Hymenoptera)
have
been
pointed
out
by
Mr.
Frederick
Smith
of
the
British
Museum,§
and
similar
connexions
occur
in
other
groups.
The
botany
of
Australia
and
Papua,
so
far
as
the
latter
is
known
(which
is
not
much),
has
similar
points
of
resemblance.
The
inference
to
be
drawn
from
these
facts
is,
that
as
a
connexion
subsists
between
tho
other
animals
of
Papua
and
those
of
Australia,
there
may
be
one
between
their
human
inha
bitants
also.
Professor
Agassiz
holds
that the
distribution
of
man
will
be
found
in
the
main
to
coincide
with
the
regional
distribution
of
other
animals
;
and
so
far
as
man's
tribal
distribution
goes,
the
idea
is
not
without
warrant.
For
example,
the
Arctic
fauna
and
flora
is
nearly
homo-
*
Modera,
"
Verhaal
van
eene
Reize
naar
de
Zuid-West
J
Reckoned
from
"
Catalogue
of
tho
Mammalia
and
Kust
van
Nicw-Guinea."
Haarlem,
1830.
Earl,
op.
Birds
of
New
Guinea,
in
the
Collection
of
the
British
cit.
p.
61.
Museum,"
1869.
i
Swinhoe,
in
'*
Proc.
Geog.
Soc,"
voL
viii.
p.
26.
§
F.
Smith,
in
"
Proc.
Linn.
Soc."
vol.
v.
p.
93,
et
seq
(1863-64).
1861.
64
MAMMALS.
geneous;
—
so,
one
tribe
of
man,
the
Esquimaux,
inhabits
the
same
region.
The
Mediterranean
district
has
a
sub-fauna
and
sub-flora
of
its
own,
composed
of
a
mixture
of
European
and
North
African
species
;
the
African
coast
having
the
preponderance
of
African,
the
European
of
European
types.
We
see
something
like
this
in
the
human
inhabitants
of
the
same
district
;
the
Europeans
(Spaniards,
Italians,
Greeks,
and
Turks)
are
more
swarthy
and
liker
the
Arabs
than
their
more
northerly
brethren.
Other
instances
of
tribes
of
men
corresponding
more
or
less
to
the
zoological
districts
in
which
they
live
might
be
quoted.
We
may
thus
fairly
use
the
analogy
of
such
correspondence,
between
the
regional
distribution
of
man
and
the
other
animals,
as
an
argument,
valeat
quantum,
for
holding
that
there
is
such
a
relation
between
the
human
tribes
of
Papua
and
Australia,
because
we
find
a
similar
relation
between
their
other
animals.
Another
circumstance
which
has
an
important
bearing
on
the
probable
affinity
of
the
Papuans
and
Australians
is,
that
a
rise
of
land
of
no
more
than
two
or
three
hundred
feet
would
unite
Papua
to
Australia.
We
have
already
seen
that
while
a
rise
of
the
same
amount
would
unite
Java,
Borneo,
and
Sumatra
with
the
Indian
continent,
it
would
still
leave
them
separated
from
the
Papuan
region
by
a
deep
channel.
The
probability
of
the
connexion
of
Papua
and
Australia,
and
the
fact
of
their
marked
separation
from
the
Indian
continent
being
thus
established,
we
may
be
more
disposed
to
admit
the
force
of
such
resemblances
as
can
be
traced
between
their
respective
peoples.
There
is
no
doubt
considerable
difference
in
their
appearance.
Most
of
the
Australians
have
long,
unfrizzled
hair,
and
their
hollow
cheeks
and
starved
countenances
give
them
less
of
the
features
of
the
African
negro.
We
have
been
so
long
accustomed
to
think
of
them
as
a
race
by
themselves,
that
any
proposition
which
tends
to
destroy
their
theoretical
position
goes
against
our
preconceptions.
But
examined
abstractedly,
we
must
abate
our
preconceived
notions
considerably.
First,
the
homogeneousness
of
the
Australians
is
not
absolute.
Considerable
variation
occurs
in
their
form.
They
have
not
all
lank,
straight
hair.
The
aborigines
of
Van
Dieman's
land
on
the
one
hand,
and
some
of
the
tribes
on
the
north
coast
and
in
the
interior
of
Northern
Australia
on
the
other,
have
frizzled
hair,
Papuan
features,
and
other
negritan
characters.
So
much
so,
that
Mr.
Earl*
sets
himself
to
work
to
devise
some
theory
of
Polynesians
or
Papuans
having
engrafted
Papuan
blood
on
Australian
stock
;
"
for
many
circumstances,"
says
he,
"
which
I
shall
have
to
state
more
distinctly
below,
would
induce
the
supposition that
the
aboriginal
inhabitants
of
this
part of
Australia
very
closely
resembled
the
Papuans
of
New
Guinea,
or,
what
is
almost
the
same
thing,
the
aborigines
of
Van
Dieman's
Land."
If
any
one
part
of
Australia
is
once
admitted
to
be
peopled
by
the
same
race
as
the
Papuans,
the
general
character
of
the
race
and
their
geographical
position
would
lead
to
the
inference
that
the
whole
must
be
so
too.
The
Nicobar
Islanders
and
the
Andaman
Islanders
are
other
isolated
items
of
the
great
black
race.
Without
attempting
to
find
relations
for these,
Professor
Owen
puts
very
clearly
the
negative
position
that
the
latter
do
not
belong
to
any
of
the
neighbouring
peoples
(that
is,
the
Hindoo,
Burmese,
or
Malay).
He
says:
—
"Why
should
ethnologists
when
they
come
to
study
the
natives
of
an
insulated
group
of
people
like
the
Andamaners
deem
it
necessary
to
determine
to
what
contem
poraneous
people
they
were
allied,
on
the
assumption
that
they
had
been
derived
from
some
existing
*
Earl,
in "
Journ.
Geograph.
Soc."
xvi.
239.
DISTRIBUTION
OF MAN. 65
and
neighbouring
land
?
Geological
science
had
established
the
fact
of
continuous
and
progressive,
though
extremely
slow
mutations
of
land
and
sea,
and had
taught
them
that
the
continents
of
modern
geography
were
only
the
last
phases
of those
mutations.
How
long
the
human
species
had
existed
and
how
far
they
had
been
contemporaneous
with
such
mutations
were
the
preliminary
questions
which
presented
themselves
in
grappling
with
the
problem
suggested
by
a
peculiar
insular
race
like
the
Mincopies.
.
.
.
Was
it
not
possible
that
the
Andamaners
might
have
come
from
nowhere,
that
is
to
say,
from
no
actual
contiguous
and
separate
land,
but
might
be
the
representatives
of
an
old race
belonging
to
a
former
continent
that
had
almost
disappeared?"*
*
Owen,
in
"
Proc.
Geograph.
Soc.,"
1862,
p.
82.
66
CIIAPTEE
VIII.
distribution
of
man
continued
HILL
TRIBES OF
INDIA
RANK
and
priority
of
black
and
WHITE
RACKS.
There
still
remains
undisposed
of
one
other
peculiar
type
of
human
heings
which
seems
to
be
very-
much
in
pari
casu
with
the
Andamaners,
except
that
the
latter
have
their
place
of
abode
surrounded
by
the
sea,
while
the
former
are
surrounded
by
dry
land
and
a
sea
of
strange
people.
It
is
what
are
called
the Hill
tribes
of
India.
A
number
of
isolated
tribes,
each
speaking
a
language
of
their
own,
and
described
as
the
most
degraded
specimens
of
humanity
on
the
face
of
the
earth,
are
found
in
the
fastnesses
of
the
mountains
of
India
and
some
of
the
Malayan
Islands,
and
of
the
adjoining
continent.
They
exist
in
one
or
two
parts
of
Borneo
;
*
they
are
not
found
in
Sumatra,
f
nor
in
Java,
at
least
now
;
%
but
they
occur
in
the
Malay
Peninsula,
§
in
Siam,
and,
it
was
said,
in
Burmah
;
they
are
also
said
to
be found
in
parts
of
Cochin
China,
||
and
even
in
China
itself.
They
are
not
found,
or
perhaps
it
would
be
safer
to
say
not
now
found,
in
Ceylon,^
but
they
still
remain
in
a
good
many
of
the
moun
tainous
parts
of
India
in
all
the
three
Presidencies,
where
they
are
known
under
the
name
of
Tudas
or
Todars,
Badagars,
Koters,
Kurumbers,
Bheels,
Kulis,**
&c.
The
more
general
opinion
regarding
these
Hill
tribes
is
that
they
formerly
occupied
the
land
round
about
their
present
fastnesses,
and
that
they
had
been
gradually
encroached
upon
by
the
other
nations
which
now
occupy
the
country
*
Earl,
op.
cit.
144
;
and
Dalton
in
Moor's
Dhers,
Gowlies,
Barka,
Tallary,
Carumba,
Cherumars,
"
Notices
of
the
Indian
Archip."
1831,
p.
49.
Morawa,
Collary,
Pully,
Pariah,
Yenedy,
Chenchy,
Gond,
t
Earl,
op.
cit.,
175.
Kond,
Sawara,
Banderwa,
Cheru,
Bengy,
Kooki,
Garro,
X
Remains
of
some
ancient
race,
which
had
used
spear-
Kassia,
Hajin,
Bhar,
Dhanuk
and
Dhome."
And
he
adds,
heads
similar
to
those
used
by
the
present
inhabitants
of "
Among
these
tribes
the
etymologist
may,
without
dim-
North
Australia,
arc
described
as
having
been
found
in
culty,
trace
the
names
of
many
of
the
territorial
divisions
Java,
in
the"
Natuurkundige
Tydschrift
voor
Nederlaudsch
which
have been
assigned
to several
portions
of
India
by
Indie,"
1800.
the
Hindus.
Thus,
Kolwan,
from
the
Koles
;
Bhilwan
§
A
woolly-haired
race
called
Lemanys.
See
Ander-
and
Bhilwara,
from
the
Bhils
;
Mhar-rashtra,
by
contrac-
son,
in
"
Journal
of
Indian
Archip."
iv.,
425, 1838.
tion
Mharatta,
from
the
Mhars
;
Man
Desa,
from
the
Mans
|
A
savage
race of people,
very
black,
and
resembling
or
Mangs
;
the
city
of
Beder,
from
the
Beders
;
Gondwara,
in
their
features,
the
Caflres.
Chapman's
"Report
to
the
from
the
Gonds
;
Oria-Dcsa,
or
Orissa,
from
the
Orias
;
Bengal
Government
of
a
Diplomatic
Mission
to
Cochin
Kolwan
and
Koliwara,
from
the
Koles."
China,
in
1778,"
in
Parliamentary
Papers
relating
to
India.
Doubtless,
many
of
these
may
be
mere
sub-races
of
the
^[
The
Veddahs
of
Ceylon
seem
only
what
may
be
called
Hindoos
;
my
argument
applies
only
to
those
whose
phy-
a feral
tribe
of
the other
Cingalese.
sical
and
other
characters
approach
those
of
the
Negritos.
**
Myor-General
Brings
gives
the
following
as
the
See
"Pteport
on
the
Aboriginal
Tribes
of
India,"
by
Major-
names
of
tome
of
these
tribes,
adding
that
there
are
many
General
John
Briggs,
in
Reports
of
the
British
Association,
others
of
which
he
has not
sufficient
details,
viz.
"Miuas,
1850,
p.
159.
Mers,
Bhils,
Dhiro
Kolies,
Mhars,
Mangs
or
Mans,
Beders,
HILL
TRIBES
OF
INDIA.
(17
around
them,
and
driven
into
the
hills
or
retreated
to
them
for
shelter.*
Others,
as
Mr.
Crawford,
believe
that
"
they
are
no
other
than
natives
of
the
country,
mere
mountaineers
who
had
escaped
from
the
bondage,
and
hence
from
the
civilization,
of
the
plains."
The
accounts
which
we
read
of
their
physical
attributes,
of
the
low
scale
of
their
intellectual
and
moral
perceptions,
and
the
degraded
level
which
they
occupy
in
the
scale
of
humanity,
forbid
us,
I
think,
to
accept
Mr.
Crawford's
explanation.
The
more
generally
received
view
is
less
open
to
objection,
but
there
is
usually
a
hypothesis
appended
to
it
which
does
not
appear
to
me
to
meet
the
facts
of
the
case,
viz.
that
the
tribes
of
which
we
speak
are
of
Tartar
or
Thibetan
extraction.
Major-General
Briggs
*
The
following
data,
quoted
from
Major-General
Briggs'
report
above
cited,
support
the
view
that
these
aboriginal
tribes
were
in
possession
of the
whole
of
India
prior
to
the
incursion
of
the
Hindoos,
and
that
they
had
been
gradually
driven
into their
present
fastnesses
by
their
en
croachments.
"About
twenty-seven
centuries
ago,
according
to
the
Vedas
or
Holy
Scriptures
of
the
Hindus,
it
would
appear
that
the
Hindus
had
not
yet
penetrated
further
south
than
the
twenty-second
parallel
of
north
latitude,
beyond
which
(the
work
states)
there
then
existed
"
extensive
forests,
inhabited
by
a
wild
and
impure
race
speaking
barbarous
tongues."
"
At
what
precise
period
the
Hindu
invasion
from
the
west
first
occurred
it
is
impossible
to
say,
but
the
geo
graphy
of
India
indicates at
once
that that
race
neces
sarily
came
through
Afghanistan
and
the
Punjaub
ere
it
turned
the
borders
of
the
Great
Desert
and
penetrated
in
the
direction
of Dehli.
There
is
every
reason
to
believe
that
the
Hindfi
race
gradually
overspread
the
territory
of
Upper
India
east
and
west
between
the
Himalaya
Moun
tains
and
the
Great
Desert,
without
penetrating
to
the
south
for
many
centuries
;
that
it
enslaved
the
aboriginal
races
as
it
subdued
them,
compelling
them
to
till
their
own
lands
as
serfs,
and
took
from
the
latter
the
whole
produce,
except
what
was
actually
required
as
food
for
the
tillers
of
the
soil.
"
The
historical
as well as
the
religious
works
of
the
Hindus,
of a
comparatively
modern
date,
together
with
monumental
remains
existing
in
sculptured
edifices
and
rock
caves,
all
tend
to
show
that
no
portion
of
the
Penin
sula
of
India
was
subdued
by
them
anterior
to
the
fifth
century
of
the Christian
era.
About
that
time
it
is
sup
posed
that
the
Peninsula
became
gradually
overspread
by
the
Bramanical
race.
They
seem
to
have
entered
in
two
directions
;
the
one
from
Guzerat
gradually
extending
over
Khandeish
and
Berar
till
they
reached
to
the
forests
which
fringe
the
banks
of
the
river
Wurda,
where
it
meets
with
the
Godavery
;
the
other
invasion,
according
to
tradition,
occurred
about
the
same
time.
It
passed
from
the
valley
of
the
Ganges aud
penetrated
southward
along
the
line
of
coast of
the
Bay
of
Bengal,
keeping
within
the
range
of
mountains on
the
east
and
the
ocean,
till
after
reaching
the
embouchures
of
the
Godavery
and
the
Kistna
the
invaders
spread
out
over
the
plains
and
pro
ceeded
southward.
"
It
has
been
assumed
that
about
the
same
period,
the
Bhudists,
a
peculiar
sect
of
the
Hindds,
reached
the
shores
of
Ceylon
and
Southern
India
from
the
opposite
coast,
and
thence proceeding
northward,
spread
their
religious
doctrines
among
the
aborigines.
About
the
ninth
or
tenth
century
the
Bhudists
and
Bramans
appear
to
have
met
from
opposite
directions,
which
led
to
deadly
conflicts,
and
ended
in
the
Bramans
putting
down
the
Bhudist
tenets.
"
We
have
historical
proof
that
the
island
of
Bombay
was
not
subjugated
to
the
Hindft
rule
till
the
fourteenth
cen
tury
;
and
that
in
the
beginning
of
the
next
century
the
Mahommedans
found
princes
of
th3
aboriginal
race
oc
cupying
in
force
several
strongholds
not
far
from
Poona.
The
town
and
district
of
Sorapoor,
lying
between
Hydra-
bad and
the
western
mountains,
is
still
held
by
an
abori
ginal
chief
with
a portion
of
his
tribe
;
and
within
the
memory
of
man
the
kingdom
of
Mysore
contained
several
principalities
of
the
Beder
race.
"
Further
south,
the
Morawas
and
Collars
obtained
cele
brity
in
modern
times
by
their
adhesion
to
one
or
other
of
the
European
belligerent
powers
(France
or
England),
and
evinoed
fidelity,
and
even
devotion,
to
the
cause
of
the
party
which
each
espoused.
"
The
aboriginal
races
differ,
one
and
all,
in
every
respect
from
the
Hindis.
Their
government
is
strictly
patri
archal
;
all
crimes
are
punished
and
disputes
settled
by
the
award
of
the
elders
or
heads
of
tribes
assembled.
They
have
no
prejudices
against
animal
food
of
any
kind,
whether
the
animal
be
slaughtered
or
die
a
natural
death.
In
those
parts
still
unsubdued,
such
as
a
great
part of
Gondwana
and
the
contiguous
tracts
of
Goomser
and
Bustar,
and
in
some
portion
of
the
country
lying
farther
eastward
among
the
Assam
Hills,
they continue
to
make
human
sacrifices
;
a
practice to
which
these
races
have
been
prone,
according
to
Hindfi
records,
from
the
earliest
ages.
They
also
worship
power
in
every
shape
to
avert
danger
;
hence
all
beasts
of prey,
such
as
tigers,
bears
and
leopards,
venomous
serpents
and
other
reptiles
;
as
also
the
elephant
and
rhinoceros
in
a
wild
state."
—
Briggs,
op.
cit.
p.
169.
68
MAMMALS.
says
that
their
domestic
habits
and
institutions
have
a
strong
affinity
to
those
of
the
great
Tartar
family
;
thoy
may
serve
as
a
specimen
of
the
whole
race.
In
some
parts
both
men
and
women
bore
their
ears,
and wear heavy
rings
to
extend
the
lower
lobe.
Captain
Newbold,
of
the
Madras
army,
who
has
written
on
the
Chenchies
of
the
Nalla
Malla,
or
Black
Mountains,
represents
those
he
saw-
as
having
long
bushy
hair,
thick
lips,
high
cheek-bones,
and
small
piercing
eyes.*
Sir
Richard
Jenkins
and
Colonel
Agnew
confirm
this
description
in
speaking
of
thei
Gonds;
and
I
believe
no
instance
will
be
found
of those
residing
entirely
on
the
hills
having
the
aquiline
nose
or
the
delicacy
of
feature
of
the
Caucasian
family.
General
Briggs
thinks
that
they
partake
rather
of
the
Tartar
or
Thibetan
physiognomy,
than
of
the
Hindu.
He
adds,
however,
a
sort
of
apolo
getic
explanation
which
does
not
show
great
faith
in their
Tartar
parentage
:
"
The
remote
period
of
their
settlement
in
India,
and
the
possibility
of
an
occasional
intermixture
with
the
Hindus,
may,
in
some
cases,
have
somewhat
changed
their
physiognomy
from
that
of
their
ancestors,
so as
to
render
it
doubtful
whether
or
not
they
are
derived
from
that
branch
of
the
human
family,
though
in their
habits
and
institutions
they
certainly
bear
a strong
affinity
to
the
Tartar
branch.
"f
The
view
which
has
occurred
to
me
as
most
reconcilable
with
facts
is,
that,
like
the
Andamaners,
these
tribes
are
remnants
of
the
inhabitants
of
the
great
submerged
continent
above
alluded
to
b}r
Pro
fessor
Owen.
This
continent
at
some
time
or
other,
not
all
at
one
time,
or
in
the
same
direction,
but
from
time
to
time,
and
with
breaches
of
continuity
which
interrupted
communication
between
various
parts
of
it,
probably
included
all
the
oceanic
Archipelagoes,
Papua,
Australia,
Africa
south
of
the
Sahara,
East
India
south
of
the
Ilimmalayahs,
the
Indian
Ocean,
the
Bay
of
Bengal,
Burmah,
Siam,
the
Malay
Peninsula,
Cochin
China,
part
of
China,
and
the
whole
of
the
Philippine
Islands,
Borneo,
Java,
and
Sumatra.
That
all
this
vast
space
was
at
any
one
time
a
united
continent
I
do
not
suppose
nor
maintain
;
on
the
contrary,
there
is
everything
to
lead
to
a
different
conclusion
;
there
appear
to
have
been
at
least
two
continents
;
as
now
we
see
the
very
6ame
area of the
southern
hemisphere
rising
in
some
parts
and
falling
in
others,
no
doubt
this
happened
in
former
times
also,
and
its
size
and
configuration
would
constantly
vary.
Opportunity
of
access
might
thus
be
given
for
one
type
to
traverse
and
penetrate
every
part
of
this
vast
area
;
but
by
long
interruptions
and
suspension
of
communication,
many
might
never
be
able
to
avail
themselves
of
it,
and
these
long
lapses
of
time
might
give
opportunity
for
the
development
of
new
species
or
varieties
from
others
which
had
only
reached
half
way,
as
it
were,
on
their
journey,
and
who,
while
the
way
was
still
open
to
them
to
penetrate
deeper
and
spread
themselves
further
in
one
direction,
had
perhaps
their
retreat
cut
off
by
a
subsidence
of
the
continent
behind
them,
and
no
opportunity
of
spreading
their
off
spring
of
newly
developed
forms
in
the
direction
from
which
they
came.
Lastly,
I
assume
that
these
continents
were
peopled
by
a
black
race
of
many
tribes,
of
which
the
Negritans
are
the
descendants
;
that
as
the
Chagos Bank,
the
Laccadivc
Islands
and
Maldive
Islands
have
sunk,
so
did
Ceylon
and
India
;
so
did the
land
in
the
Bay
of
Bengal
;
so
did
the
other
lands
in
which
Hill
tribes
are
found
;
in
fact,
that
the
whole
or
certain
parts
of
the
supposed
land
sunk
more
or
less
gradually
;
we
know
that
almost
the
whole
of
Africa
and
Madagascar,
and
a
*
Can
the
clucking
sound
in
the
language
of
the
Xe-
without
difficulty
by
any
but
a
native of
the
province
in
groes
have
anything
to
do
with
a
palatal
peculiarity
in
which
the
language
containing
them
is
spoken."
He
adds,
tha
.speech
of
these
aboriginal
tribes
!
Dr.
Heinhokl
Rost
"These
sounds
are
unknown
in
Sanscrit."
of
Berlin,
remarks,
"
that
the
palatal
sounds
of
the
letters
t
Bmugs,
op.
cit.
pp.
172,
173.
r,
d,
j,
t,
arc
confined
to
India,
and
cannot
be
pronounced
HILL
TRIBES
OF
INDIA.
63
portion
of
Australia,
were
not
submerged
;
but
the
most
of
the
rest,
at
one
time
or
other,
was.
As
under
the
gradual sinking
of
the
land,
which
I
suppose
to
have
taken
place,
the
ocean
encroached
upon
the
great
tracts
submerged
there
would
bo
a
delugo
and
a
loss
of
life,
such
as
we
can
only
faintly
imagine
;
something
to
which
we
have
no
parallel.
It
may
perhaps
have
been
the
Noachian
deluge,
which
still
dwells
in
the
traditions
of
every
race or
tribe
on
the
face
of
the
earth.
As
the
ocean
slowly
and
gradually
invaded
the
plains,
the
inhabitants
must
have
retreated
to
the
high
mountain-tops,
—
become
Hill
tribes,
in
fact.
Doubtless
great
tracts
of
this
supposed
continent,
as
is
the
case
in
all
other
continents,
consisted
of
vast
plains,
which,
gradually
converted
into
muddy
marshes,
may
have
taken
thousands
of
years
to
sink
beyond
the
depth
of
man
;
and
when
this
was
the
case,
he
must
have
there
died
off
by
hardship,
exposure,
and
want
of
food,
long
before
the
sea
rose
so
high
as
actually
to
drown
him
;
but
where
there
were
mountains,
hills,
or
even
trifling
elevations,
a
small
remnant
would
be
saved,
but
not
without
enduring
great
hardships.
On
the
mountains,
so
long
as
other
animals,
which
may
have
shared
the
refuge,
lasted,
they
would
have
a
precarious
supply
of food
;
but
as
the
space,
and
with
it
the
food
diminished,
bloody
struggles
must
have
taken
place
for
space
and
means
of
life
;
and
if
we
could
delve
into
the
heart
of
some
of
the
atolls
we
might
perhaps
find
there
mute
evidence
of
the
strength
and
despair
of
the
combatants,
in
mutilated
relics
of
humanity.
Let
us
assume
that
all
were
not
so
cut
off
;
that
before
the
last
familv
on
the
islet
was
extir
pated,
the
gradual
downward
motion
ceased,
over
a
portion
of
the
district
of
which
we
have
spoken
;
that
volcanoes
and
earthquakes
spoke
of
change,
and
that
by-and-byc
the
land
began
to
rise,
or,
as
the
poor
inhabitants
would
think,
the
sea
began
to
fall,
and
their
lives
were
saved
to
puzzle
the
brains
of
another
race
with
their
affinity
and
descent.
As
the
land
rose
above
the
sea,
and
the
fertile
ooze
of these
tropical seas
became
rich
in
verdure,
the
inhabitants
would
descend
and
take
possession
of
the
land
:
but
by-and-bye,
when
the
northern
hemisphere
rose
in
its
turn,
and was
peopled
with
a
fauna,
flora,
and
human
in
habitants
of
its
own,
the
events
indicated
by
General
Briggs
probably
took
place.
A
portion
of
these
northern
Asiatics
(that
is,
the
Hindoos)
invaded
India.
Now
what
would
be
the
effect
of
such
an
invasion
upon
the
aboriginal
inhabitants
who
had
been
previously
in
very
much
the
same
position
as
that
in
which
the
Andamaners
arc
now
left?
Let
us
try
to
realize
it
by
applying
the
test
to
them.
Suppose
the
Indian
Ocean
to
be
raised,
so
as
to
unite
the
Andaman
and
the
Nicobar
Islands
to
the
mainland
on
both
sides
and throw
open
the
plains
which
were
but
lately
at
the
bottom
of
the
Bay
of
Bengal,
and
now
were
rich in
vegetation,
to
the
grasp
of
the
Hindoo
and
Burmese
—
I
shall
say
nothing
of
the
European,
for
what
would
happen
were
he,
with
his
civilization
and
knowledge
of
science
and
arts,
to
come
in
contact
with
a
tribe
of
savages,
furnishes
no
fair
parallel
to
what
would
take
place
with
a
less
highly
endowed
people.
Let
us
turn
loose
the
aboriginal
Hindoos
and
Burmese
in
millions
to
compete
with
the
few
Andanniners
for
the
possession
of
the
rich
bottoms
of
the
Indian
Ocean.
The
contest
would
not
be
long.
The
fertile
plains
would
soon be
seized
and
appropriated
by
their
more
numerous,
.stronger,
and
comparatively
more
intelligent
competitors.
The
Andamaners
would
be
driven
back
to
their
old
fastnesses
—
their
original
mountain-tops.
And
what
would
happen
then
?
would
the
Hindoos
try
to
exterminate
the
Andamaners
in
order
to
seize
what
would
be
the
impregnable
tops
of
the
Andaman
mountains,
or
would
they
allow
their
inhabitants
to
live
as
the
Hill
tribes
now
do,
still,
as
on
an
island
in
the
midst
of
the
sea,
surrounded
by
a
sea
70
MAMMALS.
of
new
people,
not
increasing,
perhaps
gradually
diminishing,
but
for
long
preserving
the
memory
of
a
different
and
bygone
state
of
things
?
I
imagine
they
would
neither
covet
their fastnesses
nor
seek
to
deprive
them
of
them.
The
labour
of
toiling
to
the top
of
mountains
is
distasteful
to
these
races,
not
to
speak
of
the
aimless
warfare
they
would
have
to
encounter,
and
the
black
races
would
be
allowed
to
enjoy
their
sterile
fastnesses
unmolested.
Such
is
the
fate
which
I
believe
has
befallen
the
Hill
tribes
;
and
these
are
the
grounds
on
which
I
think
that
if
there
is
nothing
but
their
geographical
distribution
to
prevent
us
referring
them
to
the
great
black
race
on
the
ground
of
their
physical
attributes,
we
may
venture
to
follow
that
course.
There
are
other
facts
founded
on
the
distribution
of
animals
and
plants,
in
India
and
the
Austra
lian
region,
which
give
support
to
the
explanation
of
the
position
of
the
Hill
tribes
which
I
have
above
suggested.
From
the
fact
of
a
large
proportion
of
the
animals
which
are
found
in
Borneo,
Java,
and
Sumatra,
being
identical
with
those
found
on
the
mainland,
there
is
little
or
no
doubt
that
these
islands
must
at
some
former
period
have
been
united
to
it
;
so
that
it
appears
that before
the
present
upward
movement,
which
these
are
now
undergoing,
there
must
have
been
a
down
ward
one,
and
before
that
again
an
upward
one,
as
we
have
seen
is
probably
the
case
with
other
countries.
The
islands
must
have
been
first
united
with
the
mainland
to
allow
the
inter
communication
of
species.
A
subsidence
must
then
have
taken
place
to
throw
them
into
something
like
their
present
configuration,
and
there
is
now
again
a
gradual
rise
reuniting
them
slowly
to
the
mainland.
Now,
Dr.
Joseph
Hooker,
in
his
Flora
of
Australia,*
gives a
list
of
nearly
500
plants
found
in
that
country,
which
are
either
identical,
or
very
nearly
so,
with
continental
or
insular
Indian
species
;
but,
on
the
other
hand,
-he
states
that
there
is
scarcely
a
single
Australian
type
to
be
found
in
India,
and
the
few
that
occur
are
in
Eastern
India.
It
would
appear
as
if
there
had
been
no
reciprocity,
that
all
the
mutual
types
have
been
borrowed from
India,
and
that
Australia
had
given
none
in
return
(for
10,
which
is
the
number,
against
500
can
scarcely
bo
called
reciprocity).
Now,
this
is
quite
in
accordance
with
the
course of
events,
which
I
have
supposed
to
have
occurred.
If
Australia
and
India
were
united
for
a
time,
a
mutual
communication
of
their
respective
floras
must
have
followed,
as
a
necessary
consequence.
If,
when
India
sunk,
the
tops
of
the
mountains,
where
the
Hill
tribes
still
exist,
were
not
submerged,
a
certain
proportion
of
the
flora
would
be
there
preserved.
When,
long
afterwards,
India again
emerged
from
below
the
waters,
a
new
Indian
flora
would
gradually
be
developed
out
of
the
remnant
left
on
the
tops
of
the
mountains
to
supply
the
new
lands
:
but
as
the
new
emergence
went
no
further
south
than
Ceylon,
the
new
types could
not
find
their
way
to
Australia.
There
appear
to
have
been
only
ten
Australian
plants
which
have
found
their
way
by
flotsam
and
jetsam
from
Australia
to
India,
against
500
Indian
plants
which
remain
in
Australia
by
ancient
continuity.
If
there
is
any
foundation
for
the
above
speculation,
the
connexion
between
India
and
Australia
must
have
been
very
ancient,
and
at
a
time
when
one
or
other
of
them
was
not
in
a
condition
to
supply
the
other
with
mammals,
although
it
could
with
plants.
I
must
not
occupy
tho
time
of
the reader
here
with
botanical
speculations,
which
will
come
better
when
we
reach
that
branch
of
our
subject,
but
I
cannot
refrain
from
citing
one
instructive
instance
in
favour
of
the
existence
of
the
connexion
already
indicated
between
Africa
and
south
west
Australia.
It
is
long
since
a
connexion
between
the
vegetation
of
these
countries
has
been
*
"Flora
of
Australia,"
\jy
Jos.
D.
HoaKEit.
Introductory
Essay,
p.
xli'.
(1859).
RANK
AND
PRIORITY
OF
BLACK
AND
WHITE
RACES.
71
surmised.
Lambert,
in
his
"Genus
Pinus,"
forty
years
ago,
said
of
Podocarpus
Saligna,
that
it
afforded
one
of
many
examples
of
coincidence
between
the
vegetation
of
Chile
with
that
of
New
Holland,
and
the
southern
extremity
of
Africa;*
and
Dr.
Hooker,
in
the
essay
above
quoted,
mentions
various
botanical
facts
confirmative
and
indicative
of
an
ancient
communication
between
south-west
Australia
and
South
Africa.
Besides
great
differences
in
the
genera
and
species
of
south
east
and
south-west
Australia
;
he found
many
new
forms,
and
types,
and
curious
analogies
between
the
flora
of
the
latter
and
that
of
South
Africa.
On
this
Dr.
Hooker
remarks,
"
There
is
another
way
of
viewing
the
whole
question,
but one
so
purely
speculative,
that
I hesitate
to
put
it
forward.
It
is,
that
the
antecedents
of
the
peculiar
Australian
Flora
may
have
inhabited
an
area
to
the
westward
of
the
present
Australian
continent,
and
that
the
curious
analogies
which
the
latter
presents
with
the
South
African
flora,
and
which
are
so
much
more
conspicuous
in
the
south-west
quarter,
may
be
connected
with
such
a
prior
state
of
tilings."*
Here,
too,
the
relationship
between
many
of
the
plants
in
the
south-west
of
Australia
and
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
does
not
extend
to
the
mammals.
Therefore,
it
is
not
illogical
to
infer
that
the
former
continuity
of
land
by
which
these
African
types
found
their
way
to
Australia
must
have
existed
before
mammals
in
Africa
had
appeared
there,
at
all
events, in
any
numbers,
or
it
would
have
contributed
them
too.
The
period of
continuity
must
therefore
have
been
very
ancient.
Africa
here
contributed
types
;
Australia,
few
or
none.
If
it
contributed
none,
then
another
inference
follows,
viz.,
that
the
connecting
land
could
not
have
been
united
with
both
at
the
same
time.
The
bridge
must
have
been
begun
on
the
African
side,
and
by
the
time
the
in
vaders
had
reached
a
certain
distance
on
their
way,
it
must
have
been
broken
down
behind
them
;
but
as
it
continued
to
be
formed
or
to
rise
from
the
ocean
in
the
direction
of
Australia
until
it
reached
its
south-west
corner
they
completed
the
passage,
and
their
descendants
have
remained
there
after
the
land
which
formed
the
passage
has
sunk
out
of
sight.
There
still
remain
one
or
two
accessory
points
of
great
difficulty
regarding
the
distribution
of
man
which
had
better
be
here
disposed
of.
First.
Wbat
is
the
rank
of
the
two
races
?
—
the
blacks
and
the
whites.
Are
they
to
be
reckoned
as
species,
or
are
they
merely
tribes,
in
the
same
way,
although
better
defined
and
more
widely
separated
from
each
other
than
the
tribes
into
which
they
themselves
branch
off?
The
difficulty
of
separating
species
increases
as
we
ascend
the
scale
of
life.
Professor
Agassiz
has
drawn
attention
to this
in
monkeys,
in
the
lion,
the
bear,
and
other
highly
organised
vertebrata,
and
it
seems
to
reach
its
culminating
point
in
man.
It
would
appear
as
if
the
action
of
the
developing
power
had,
in
its
long
course,
undergone
some
change,
not
in
nature
but
in
degree,
some
modification
such
as
we
see
typified
in
the
actual
growth and
life
of
man
and
his
fellow-creatures
;
its
steps
were
wider
apart
and
more
decided
in
earlier
days,
and
its
ideas,
so
to
speak,
simpler
and
less
matured
:
in
age
its
action
has
become
more
precise
and
more
important,
and
as
the
creatures
developed
have
acquired
a
higher
and
higher
grade,
the
steps
in
advance
have
been
shorter
and
more
frequent.
It
may
be,
for
example,
that
had
the
influence
of
development,
or
creation,
to
which
we
owe
the
two
races
of
man,
or
any
of
the
doubtful
species
of
monkey,
been
exercised
on
less
highly
organised
animals,
the
product
would
have
been
more
absolutely
distinct
species. I
incline to
regard
the
two
races
not
as
the
result
merely
of
ordinary
generation
and
variation,
but
of
the
*
Lajibkrt,
"
Genus
Pinus,-'
2nd
edition,
1S32,
ii.
No.
71.
f
Hooker,
op.
cit.
p.
lv.
72
MAMMALS.
action
of
the
law
of
development
through
which
new
species
are
derived
;
and
I
account
for
the
product
being
something
less
than
what
would
be
reckoned
a
species in
other
orders
by
the
high
organisation
of
the
creature
developed.
Still
in
whatever
light
wo
regard
them,
or
by
whatever
means
we
attempt
to
account
for
the
difference
between
the
two,
we
must
trace
the
one
to
the
other
;
and
two
other
questions
arise
—
viz.
AVhich
race
is
descended
from
the
other,
that
is,
which
is
the
oldest?
and
through
which
of
its
known
tribes,
supposing
us
to
know
them
all,
(which,
by
the
way,
we
can
scarcely
suppose
that
we
do,)
did
the
other
draw
its
origin
?
These
are
questions
which
we
have
not
sufficient
data
to
enable
us
to
answer.
Such
as
we
have,
however,
seem
rather
to
point
to
the
white
race
drawing
its
origin
from
the
black,
than
the
black
from
the
white.
In
the
first
place,
it is
in
the
direction
of
progress.
In
the
next
place,
according
to
the
alternations
of
elevation
and
subsidence
on
which
we
have been
speculating,
while
the
great
continent
of
the
southern
hemisphere
was
in
its
prime
and
peopled
by
the
black
race,
the
northern
continents
were
almost
wholly
under
water,
and
possibly
without
human
inha
bitants.
(See
Maps
2
and
3.)
The
second
question
is
not
less
difficult
:
Where
has
the
passage
from
the
one
race
to
the
other
been
made
?
We
may
coast
along
the
barrier
line,
and
try
everywhere
for
a
point
of
resemblance
which
may
guide
us in saying, "
Here
is
the
point
where
the
crossing
took
place,"
but
we
can
find
absolutely
none
;
the
line
is
everywhere
clear
and
defined
;
and
this
is
another
reason
for
thinking
that
here
there
has
been
an
exercise
of
the
developing
power
similar
to
what
we
see
in
the
case
of
new
species.
Where
nature
really
takes a
step
from
one
species
to
another
she
leaves
no
trace
of
her
passage
;
and
this,
as
the
reader
knows,
is
the
recalcitrant
fact
which,
by
refusing
to
be
backed
into
the
line
of
Mr.
Darwin's argument,
chiefly
disarranges
its
array
;
wo
seek
in
vain
for
the
passage
from
an
elephant
to
a
rhinoceros,
or
from
a
monkey
to
a
man
;
as
Prof.
Huxley
says,
"
The
fossil
remains
of
man,
hitherto
discovered,
do
not
seem
to
take
us
apparently
nearer
to
that
lower
Pithecoid
form
by
the
modification
of
which
he
has
probably
become
what
he
is
;"*
no
such
transitional
forms
appear
ever
to
have
existed,
and
if
so
of
course
none
can
be
found.
The
only
indication
which
occurs
to
me
as
likely
to
lead
to
even
an
approximation
to
the
truth,
is
perhaps
to
be
looked
for
in
the
habits
of
tribes.
Where
two
tribes
of
the
different
races
have
similar
habits
or
weapons,
that
fact
may
perhaps
be
taken
as
evidence
of
proximity
or
acquaintance
at
some
period
long
since
gone
by;
for
instance,
the
sumpitan,
or
blow-pipe,
is
used
by
some
of
the
tribes
of
New
Guinea,
and
also
by
those
of
the
Amazons
and
Orinocko,
and
by
no
other
race
in
the
whole
world.
It
is
rather
a
peculiar
weapon,
not
one
likely
to
occur
independently
to
two
minds
;
may
they
not
both
have
derived
it
from
a
common
source
?
Dr.
Daniel
Wilson
on
other
grounds
supports
the
conclusion
to
which
this
would
lead,
—
he
says
that
"
many
analogies
confirm
the
probabilitv
of
some
portion
of
the
North
American
stock
having
entered
the
continent
from
Asia
;"
but
that
" while
theoretically
the
northern
passage
seems
so
easy,
yet
so
far
as
any
direct
proof
goes,
the
Polynesian
entrance
into
the
south
across
the
wide
barrier
of
the
Pacific
is
the
one
most
readily
sustained."f
Another
point
not
to
be
overlooked
is,
that
at
some
period
in
the
past
history
of these
regions,
South
America
was
most
probably
united
to
Australia,
if
we
may
draw
any
inference
from
the
presence
of
allied
forms
of
life
common
to
both.
*
Huxley's
"
Evidence
as
to
Man's
Place
in
Nature,"
Civilisation
in
the
Old
and
New
World,"
by
Daniel
1863.
Wilson,
L.L.D.
t
Prehistoric
man—
"
Researches
into
the
Origin
of
^i7(paiTnrrr]TisyAgfr
73
CHAPTER
IX.
MONKEYS
EXTINCT
AND
LIVING.
The
kind
and
extent
of
the
distinction
between
Man
and
the
higher
Apes,
has
formed
the
subject
of
much
discussion
of
late
years,
especially
upon
some
premises
laid
down
by
Professor
Owen.
The
Professor,
while
admitting
that
the
distinction
between
Man
and
the
Apes
could
not
be
considered
as
"
other
than
a
difference in
degree,"
maintains
that
the
difference
in
degree
is
so
great that
Man
must
form
a
separate
and
independent
section
of
equal
importance
to
the
other
great
sub-classes
into
which
zoologists
have
divided
the
animal
kingdom.
In
support
of
this
he
adduced
certain
anatomical
peculiarities
which
he
thought
he
had
discovered
in
the
brain
of
Man,
sufficient
to
distinguish
it
in
character
from
that
of
the
nearest
Apes.*
His
views
have
been
controverted
by
Professor
Huxley
f
and
other
eminent
zoologists
;
and
the
general
verdict
of
anato
mists
would
seem
to
be
that
the
differences
mentioned
by
Owen
either
do
not
exist
or
are
not
of
the
importance
he
supposed,
and
consequently
that
the
distinction
L;
not
well
founded,
so
far
as
it
rests
on
them
;
and
Professor
Huxley
has,
I
think,
satisfactorily
shown
that
Man
(considered
purely
as
an
animal,
which
is
all
that
the
zoologist
has
to
do
with)
cannot
be
regarded
as
more
widely
separated
from
the
Apes,
than
the
different
families
of
them
are
from
each
other.
The
first
quadrumanous
fossil
which
has
been
discovered
was
found
in
the
Himmalayahs
by
Lieuts.
Baker
and
Durand
in
1830.
J
It
has
proved
to
belong,
like
subsequently
discovered
quadru
manous
fossils
in
the
same
district
(the
Sewalik
(Miocene)
tertiaries),
to
the
Indian
genus
Semnopi-
thecus.
The
next
discovery
was
made
by
William
Colchester,
in
1839,
in
a
bed
of
whitish
sand,
beneath
a
stratum
of
tenacious
blue
clay
situated
by
the
side
of
the
river
Deben,
about
a mile
from
Wcodbridge
in
the
parish
of
Kingston,
in
Suffolk.
This
deposit
is
referred
by
all
geologists
to
the
eocene
period,
and
the
fossils
were
determined
by
Professor
Owen
to
belong
to
a
genus
of
Monkeys
which
he
called
Eopithecus,
and
which
had
its
nearest
affinities
with
Macacus.
Since
then,
however,
he
has
(1862)
retracted
this
opinion,
and
with
more
ample
materials
at
his
command
has
pronounced
it
to
belong
to
the
genus
Hyracotherium,
an
animal
allied
to
the
PaLjeOTHERIUM.
This
is
a
very
important
correction,
for
"
there
is
now
no
eocene
Monkey
known
to
palaeontologists,
unless
M.
Riitimeycr
is
right
in
referring
to
this
family
a
small
fragment
of
a
jaw
with
three
molar
teeth
found
in
the
upper
eocene
strata
of the
Swiss
Jura."§
*
Owen,
on
"The
Characters,
Principles
of
Division,
X
For
an
account
of
the
various
discoveries
of
the
and
Primary
Groups
of
the
Class
Mammalian."
In
"
Linn,
fossil
remains
of
Monkeys,
see
a
paper
by
Prof.
Owen
on
Soc.
Proc."
1857.
the
Gorilla
in
"Proc.
Zool.
Soc.,"
1859,
p.
18.
t
Huxley
in
"Nat.
Hist.
Rev."
Jan.
1861,
ct
seq.,
§
"
Elements
of
Geology."
By
Sir
Charles
Lyell.
Sixth
and
"Evidences
as
to
the
Man's
place
in
Nature."
By
Edition,
London,
1865.
p.
292.
Thomas
Henry
Huxley.
London,
1863.
74
.
MAMMALS.
A
monkey's
molar
tooth
was
taken
from
the
pliocene
beds
of
Essex,
which
has
been
determined
to
be
most
closely
allied
to
the
Macacos
Sinicus
(a
common
species in
captivity,
whence
doubt
has
been
thrown on
the authenticity
of
the
fossil,
but
it
is
believed
by
Owen
to
be
perfectly
genuine).
The
remains
of a
monkey
of
gigantic
size
(four
feet
in
height)
were
discovered
in
1839,
with
other
bones,
by
Dr.
Lund,
in
a
bone-cave
in
limestone
in Brazil.
Its
molar
dentition
showed
it
to
belong
to
the
platyrrhine
family
now
peculiar
to
South
America
;
the
New-
world
monkeys
having
four
more
teeth
than
the
Old
-
world,
a
supernumerary
molar
in
each
side
of
each
jaw.
It
was
described
as
a
new
genus
under
the
name
of
Protopithecus.
This
belonged
to
the
pliocene
period.
The
lower
jaw;
and
teeth
of a
small
quadrumane
was
discovered
by M.
Lartet
in
a
mioceno
bed
in
the
south
of
France,
and
described
by
him
and
De
Blainville.
These
remains
are
so
closely
allied
to
those
of the
Gibbons,
as
scarcely
to
justify
the
generic
separation
which
has
been
made
for
the
genus
to
which
it
belonged
under
the
name
of
Pliopithecus.
A
portion
of a
lower
jaw
with
teeth,
and
the
shaft
of a
humerus
of a
quadrumanous
animal
(Dryopithecus),
equalling the
size
of those
bones
in
man,
have
been
discovered
by
M.
Fontan
of
Saint-Gaudens,
in
a
marly
bed
of
upper
miocene
age,
forming
the
base
of
the
plateau
on
which
that
town
is
built.
From
this
species,
certain
inferences
have been
drawn
to
the
effect
that
this
was
a
transition
form
between
the
Chimpanzee
and
Man,
but
on
this
point
Professor
Owen
says
:
"There
is
no
law
of
correlation,
by
which,
from
the
portion
with
teeth
of
the
Dryopithecus,
can bo
deduced
the
shape
of
the
cranial
characters
determinative
of
affinity
to
man.
All
those
characters
which
do
determine
the
closer
resemblance
and
affinity
of
the
genus
Troglodytes
to
man,
and
of
the
genus
Hylobates
to
the
tailed
monkeys,
are
at
present
unknown
in
respect
of
the
Dryopithecus.
The
statement
by
Sir C.
Lyell,
that
the
parts
of
the
skeleton of
Dryopithecus
as
yet
known,
'
are
sufficient
to
show
that
in
anatomical
structure,
as
well
as
stature,
it
came
nearer
to
man
than
any
quadrumanous
species,
living or
fossil,
before
known
to
zoologists,'
is
without
the
support
of
any
adequate
fact,
and
in
contravention
of
most
of
those
to
be
deduced
from
M.
Lartet's
figures
of
the
fossils.
Those
parts
of
the
Dryopithecus
merely
show
—
and
the
humerus
in
a
striking
manner
—
its
nearer
approach
to
the
Gibbons
;
the
most
probable
conjecture
being
that
it
bore
to
them,
in
regard
to
size,
the
like
relations
which
Dr.
Lund's
Protopithecus
bore
to
the
existing
Mycetes."
Mr.
Albert
Gaudry
conducted
some
government
excavations
in
Greece,
which
produced
no
less
than
twenty
skulls
of
Monkeys,
several
jaws,
and
bonos
from
different
parts
of the
body
sufficient
to
enable
him
to
make
a
drawing
of
the
whole
skeleton.
This
Grecian
Monkey
belongs
to
the
genus
Mesopithecus.
It
resembles
in
its
skull
the
Semnopitmecus,
but
in
its
limbs
the
Macacus,
and
is
thus
an
intermediate
form
between
these
genera.
Whether
it
was
a
transitional
type,
as
Mr.
Gaudry
seems
to
think,
is
another
thing
altogether.
All
that
I
say
is
that
the
two
are
by
no
means
synonymous.
Besides
these,
ten
other
supposed
species
have
been
recorded,
but
all
upon
very
imperfect
materials.
Such
as
they
are,
two
species
are
from
South America,
three
from
Asia,
and
five
from
Europe.*
With
reference
to
this,
Dr.
Vogt
says
:
—
"
Twenty
years
ago
fossil
Monkeys
were
unknown,
now
we
have
nearly
a
dozen
:
who
can
tell
that
we
may
not
in
a
few
years
know
fifty
?
A
year
ago
no
intermediate
form
between
Semnopithecus
and
Macacus
was
known
:
now
we
possess
a
whole
skeleton
:
who
can
assert
that
in
ten,
twenty,
or
fifty
years
we
may
not
possess
intermediate
forms
between
man
and
ape?"f
*
Voqt's
"
Lectures
on
Man."
Translated
by
Anthropol.
Soc.
p.
454.
Longman
and
Co.
1864.
+
Ibid.loc.
cit.
MONKEYS.
75
So
thought
Dr.
J.
W.
Dawson,
principal
of
M'Gill
College,
Montreal,
an
acute
zoologist.
He,
like
Dr.
Vogt,
predicted
that
if
any
osseous
remains
of
antediluvian
man
should
be
discovered,
they
would
prohahly
present
characters
so
different
from
those
of
modern
races,
that
they
might
be
regarded
as
belonging
to
a
distinct
species.*
But
in
a recent
paper,
he
confesses,
somewhat
despondingly,
that
"
this
anticipation
has
not
yet
been
realized."!
To
be
sure
he
qualifies
the
confession
by
the
phrase,
"with
perhaps
one
exception,1'
and
that
is
the
Neanderthal
skull;
which
is
not
an
exception
(at
least
is
not
thought
so
by
those
who
have
no
theory
to
support).
The
geographical
distribution
of
the
recent
species
of
Monkeys
ranges
everywhere
between,
and
does
not
extend
far
beyond,
the
Tropics.
The
only
district
where
they
do
reach
beyond
a
tropic
is
Paraguay.
The
same
question
which
met
us
in
considering
the
original
starting-point
of
Man
again
occurs
in
the
Monkey.
We
had
(wo
races
of
Man,
the
black
and
white.
We
have
in
like
manner
two
sections
of
Monkeys,
those
of
the
New
World
and
those of
the
Old,
which
latter
arc
in
various
respects
more
nearly
allied
to
Man.
When
guessing
at
the
relative
antiquity
of
the
two
races
of
Man,
I
gave
the
preference
in
age
to
the
black
man,
and
indulged
in
the
speculation
that
that race
peopled
the
supposed
submerged
Pacific
continent,
and
that
the
point
through
which
the
passage
from
the
black
man
to
the
white
had
been
made
was
to
be
sought
in
the
direction
of
South
America.
There
are
objections
to
tracing
the
Monkeys
in
the
same
way.
If
we
make
the
species
found
in
Africa,
India,
and
the
Indian
Archipelago,
the-
corresponding
equivalent
of
Man
in
that
region,
and
therefore
older
than
the
species
in
South
America,
we
reverse
the
order
of
dispersal
which
we
have
supposed
to
have
occurred
in
Man
;
we
place
the
highest
Monkeys
where
the
lowest
Men
are.
But
the
cases
are
not
parallel.
Supposing
Monkeys
to
have
had
their
origin
on
the
same
ground
as
Man,
and
to
have
colonized
South
America,
as
he
may
have
done,
the
introduction
of
species
there
may
have
taken
place
before
the
advanced
forms
of
Monkeys
had
come
into
being.
If,
by
the
power
of
an
enchanter,
we
could
see
everything
as
it
stood
at
the
period
of that
colonization,
we
might
find
that
the
colonists
were
then
more
advanced
than
their
Old-world
ancestors,
and
that
the
higher
types
have
come
into
being
in
the
African
region
subsequently
to
that
date.
As
already
mentioned,
Professor
Agassiz
has pointed
out the
close
degrees
of
affinity
which
exist
between
allied
species
of
animals
possessed
of
a
high
degree
of
organisation.
He
remarks
that
the
Orang
Outangs,
which
have
been
divided
by
some
into
four
species,
have
been
considered
by
other
naturalists
as
forming
but
a
single
one
;
and
the
genus
of
long-armed
Orangs,
Kyi.ouates
(the
Gibbons
of
English
naturalists),
is
considered
by
some
as
containing
eleven
species,
while
others
make
but
two
or
three.
J
A
like
remark
may
now
be
made
on
the
Chimpanzees,
of
which
five
so-called
species
have
been
described.
The
same
is
to
be
observed
of
the
Monkeys
in
the
New
World.
The
pre
hensile-tailed species
have
been
reduced
by
one
author
(Wagner)
$j
to
two, of
which
he
regards
the
second
as
doubtful,
while
Reichenbach
||
describes
and
figures
no
less
than
thirty-seven.
Dr.
Slack
has
drawn
a
better
medium
between
the
extremes
of
these
authors,
and
reckons
them
at
fifteen.
The
Monkeys
furnish
several
illustrations
in
favour
of
the
former
existence
of a
now
submerged
Pacific
or
Indo-African
continent.
*
Dawson,
J.
W.
"Archia,"
p.
237.
§
Wagner,
A.
"Die
VollstJindigste
Naturgeschichte
t
Dawson,
J.
W.
in
"
Ediu.
New
Phil.
Jour."
Jan.
der
Affen,"
part
i.
1864,
p.
53.
||
Schrkbeu's
"
Saugethierc."
Supplement
Band.
vol.
X
"Proceed.
American
Acad.
Arts
and
Sciences,"
vol.
i.
p.
207.
1840.
iii.
p.
7.
1857.
7(5
MAMMALS.
For
example,
the
Anthropoid
Monkeys
arc
found
both
in
West
Africa,
and
Borneo
and
Sumatra
;
and
although
the
species
which
come
from
these
two
so
widely
separated
countries
differ
a
good
deal
in
appearance
they
are
undoubtedly
pretty
closely
connected.
It
is
impossible
to
avoid
supposing
that
when
India
was
connected
with
Africa,
some
other
forms
of
anthropoid
Monkeys
existed
in
the
supposed
continent,
now
the
Indian
Sea,
and
stretched
across
it
all
the
way
to
Zanguebar,
and
from
thence
to
the
Gaboon,
through
the
tropical
or
equatorial
band
of
forest,
which,
it
is
almost
certain,
spans
Central
Africa
;
and
although
far
from
likely,
other
forms
of
anthropoid
Monkeys
may
yet
be
-found
there,
wherever
the
climate
is
suitable
for
them.
In
other
classes
of
animals
recent
researches
have
detected,
on
the
east
coast,
and
far
in
the
interior,
new
species
of
genera,
which
had
previously
been
supposed
confined
to
the
west
coast,
as,
for
example,
new
species
of
the
Goliath
beetle,
a
remarkable
West
African
form,
which,
moreover,
has
also
affinities
with
species
found
in
the
Indian
Archipelago.
The
Baboons
furnish
another
instance of
Monkeys
nearly
allied
to
each
other
being
found
both
in
Africa,
and
on
the
relics
of
the
sunken
continent
in
the
east,
and
nowhere
else.
Map
9
shows
first,
that
the
true
Baboons
are
all
found
south
of
the
Saharan
barrier,
supporting
the
conclusion
arrived
at
in
last
chapter,
that
the
old
Africa
of
which
we
speak,
or
Africa
proper,
was
bounded
on
the
north
by
the
Saharan
barrier,
whether
that
were
desert
or
sea
;
and
next
that
one,
if
not
two,
allied
species
of
Baboons
also
exist
in
Celebes.
They
arc
true
Baboons,
but
are
well
distin
guished
from
the
African
type,
in
that
the
latter
have
their
nostrils
at
the
end
of
their
muzzle
like
a
dog,
while
the
Celebes
species
have
them
on
the
front
of
their face
like
other
monkeys,
without
a
projecting
muzzle.
If
it
be
true
that
a
single
straggling
species
of
Cercopithecus
(a
genus
peculiar
to
Africa,
and
more
especially
West
Africa)
exists
in
the
Philippine
Isles
or
in
Celebes
and
Timor,
as
stated
by
Dr.
Sclatcr,*
the
evidence
of
relationship
between
the
species
of
Africa
and
the
eastern
remnants
of
the
submerged
continent
will
be
still
stronger.
Mr.
Wallace,
however,
who
has
had
excellent
opportunities
of
observation,
doubts
the
accuracy
of
Dr.
Sclater's
information
on
this
point.
The
section
to
which
the
species
of
Monkeys
belong,
and
the
locality
whence
they
come,
are
easily
distinguishable
by
the
physical
characters
of
the
individuals.
The
Old-world
Monkeys
have
a
narrow
septum,
or
division,
between
the
nostrils,
whence
they
have
been
called
Catarriiini
;
the
New-world
species,
a
broad
division,
hence
their
name
Platyrruini.
None
of
the
New-world
species
have
cheek-pouches
or
callosities
;
none
of
the
Old-world
species
have
prehensile
tails.
Whenever
we
sec
an
individual
with
a
prehensile
tail
we
may
be
sure
it
is
American
;
when
ever
we
see
one
with
cheek-pouches
it
comes
from
the
Old
World.
As
already
mentioned,
also,
the
Old-world
species
have
a
tooth
less
on
each
side
of
each
jaw,
and
they
have
the
"
yellow
spot"
on
the
retina,
which
is
found
in
Man,
which
the
New-world
Monkeys
are
said
not
to
have.f
Catarrhini
—
Old-world
Monkeys.
(Maps
8
and
9.)
The
most
important
members
of
this
family
are the
—
Anthropoid
Monkeys.
(Map
8.)
They
consist
of
the
Orang
Utangs,
the
Chimpanzee,
and
*
Dr.
Sclater
in
"
Proceed.
Linn.
Soc."
vol.
ii.
p.
153.
could
never
obtain
materials.
I
suggest the
examination
1858.
as
an
interesting
inquii-y
to
any
naturalist
or
medical
man
+
I
made
several
ineffectual
attempts
to
get
my
friends
who
may
have
opportunities
in
the
country
itself.
There
to
examine
or
to
send
me
home
eyes
of
the
South
Amo-
is
little
doubt
that
the
"yellow
spot"
will
be
present,
but
ricanludian
tribes
themselves,
in
order
to
ascertain
whether
if
it
were
not,-
what
a
curious
new
source
of
speculation
the yellow spot
is
present
in
the
retina
of
their
eyes,
but
would
be
opened
to
us
!
Dty
r
S-jitL.
."]*-!.-
■
|l1-
[Document text truncated for crawler view.]